The Nine Worlds
Good evening. Or perhaps good night, by the time you find this, the difference may not matter. You've come here, I imagine, because you'd like to sleep, and you'd like a quiet story to carry you there. Tonight, we have one. Tonight we go north.
Far north. To a place that lived in human imagination for a thousand years before anyone thought to write it down, and that we know now only through fragments, copied centuries late by scribes who had themselves nearly forgotten the gods their grandparents kept. If you are listening in bed, I'd ask you to do very little. Close your eyes. Let your shoulders soften.
The story does not need your attention. It will keep moving whether you follow it or not. If you drift, that is the point. If you wake briefly and find we have moved on to another chapter, that is good. The almanac is patient.
Tonight, then, is the first episode. Episode one of twelve. We are beginning at the beginning, at the shape of the world itself, as the old Norse peoples understood it. Nine worlds. A tree at the center of everything.
Roots that reach down into the dark places, and branches that vanish into the stars. In time, we will meet the gods. We will meet the giants, and the elves, and the dwarves, and the one wolf who waits at the edge of all things. We will arrive, much later, at the end of the world. But not tonight.
Tonight, we only set the stage. And now, let us begin.
Part 2
Chapter One. The North Before the Gods. Imagine, first, a place. Not a place from one of the stories, not yet. A real place.
The land of long winters, of black coastlines, of low gray skies that hang for months without changing. The fjords of what we now call Norway. The forests of what we now call Sweden. The high empty wind of the Icelandic interior. The salt cold of the islands strung north into the dark sea.
This is the world the storytellers lived in. It is important, I think, to begin there, not with the gods, but with the people who imagined them. Because the gods of the Norse are very particular gods. They were dreamed up by people who knew that winter could kill you. By people who had buried their friends in shallow graves cut into half frozen earth.
By people who had stood, on long nights, looking up at a sky so clear and so absolute that you could believe, without difficulty, that the stars themselves were burning fires in a great hall above the world. The Norse peoples, and that is a generous term for a loose family of cultures spread across Scandinavia and into Iceland and the Faroes and Greenland, were not, on the whole, soft people. They were farmers, mostly. They were fishermen. They were ironworkers, and shipbuilders, and weavers of wool.
They were also, when the season turned poor, raiders. The image we have inherited of them, horned helmets, axes raised, longships full of howling men, that image is largely a Victorian invention, much later, and not entirely fair. But it is fair to say that they understood violence. They lived close to it. And the gods they dreamed up understood it too.
Their world was, in some sense, a working farmer's world. There were the close things, the longhouse, the byre, the field, the hearth. There were the middle things, the boundary stones, the edges of the woods, the path down to the shore. And there were the far things, the open sea, the high mountains, the unmapped forests where it was said that other peoples lived. People who were not quite people.
People who were older than people. Or younger. Or made of different material entirely. Out of this geography came their cosmology. Out of their close hearth came the idea of Miðgarðr, the Middle Enclosure, the place where mortals lived.
Out of the wild edges came Útgarðr, the Outer Enclosure, the place where the giants lived. Out of the high sky came Ásgarðr, the place where the gods lived, with their golden halls and their high mead. And out of the deepest dark came Hel, with a little H, the cold gray country beneath the roots, where most of the dead went, eventually, to wait quietly for nothing in particular. But these were only four of the nine worlds. We will get to all of them.
Tonight, I want only to plant the picture in your mind, a tree, vast beyond imagining, holding the cosmos in its branches. Some worlds in its high boughs. Some worlds along its trunk. Some worlds tangled in its deepest roots. The Norse called this tree Yggdrasill.
The name is older than the stories themselves. It comes apart, if you press it, into two pieces. Drasill is a poetic word for a horse. Yggr, well, Yggr is one of the many names of Odin. The High One.
The Allfather. The god who, as we will hear in due course, hung from this very tree for nine days and nine nights, in pursuit of wisdom. So the name is half translatable: Yggr's horse. Odin's horse. The tree on which he rode himself.
But for now, we are still in the time before any of that. Before Odin. Before any of the gods you may have heard of. We are in the time before the worlds even existed. The Norse poets, and they were poets, before anything else; the stories we have were sung long before they were written, were unusually candid about how little they knew of the beginning.
In the great mythological poem the Vǫluspá, the wise woman who speaks the poem says, in the very first stanzas, that she remembers a time before the worlds were made. She remembers the void. She remembers the first beings. She remembers, she says, before Miðgarðr, before the Middle Enclosure was raised. And she remembers a sound, or perhaps the absence of a sound.
A great yawning. A great gap. Ginnungagap, she called it. The Yawning Void. That is where we begin, in the next chapter.
With nothing at all. Or with very nearly nothing, with a kind of space, a kind of absence, that the Norse mind imagined not as black emptiness but as something more like a great quiet that had not yet decided what to be. But before we go there, I want to say a small thing about the sources. Most of what we know about Norse mythology comes from two books, both written in Iceland in the thirteenth century, long after the conversion to Christianity, long after the old gods had been pushed to the edges of memory. The first is called the Poetic Edda, a collection of older mythological poems, copied down by a scribe whose name we have lost.
The second is called the Prose Edda, written by a man named Snorri Sturluson, who was himself a Christian, and who wrote his book in part as a kind of textbook, a manual to help young Icelandic poets understand the old metaphors they were still using in their verse. Snorri's Edda is more orderly, more readable, more like a story. The Poetic Edda is older, stranger, more fragmentary, and, most scholars agree, closer to the original tradition. Where the two disagree, this almanac will tell you. Where they're ambiguous, this almanac will not pretend otherwise.
The Norse worldview was a working mythology, lived for centuries, and the gods they kept were not the tidy gods of a single canonical text. They were the gods of a thousand longhouses, told a thousand ways. We will try, when we can, to keep that texture. For now, though, let me give you only this: a picture. A great tree.
Nine worlds hanging in its branches and along its trunk and around its roots. A cold sea at the edge of everything. A long dead wisewoman, somewhere in the dark, remembering when none of it yet existed. And a wind. The wind that always seems to be moving, in these stories.
The wind that came before the gods, that will outlast them, that is, perhaps, the only thing the Norse imagined to be older than the void itself. Listen for that wind, if you can, as you fall asleep. It runs all through the rest of this season. And now, the void itself.
Part 3
Chapter Two. Ginnungagap, the Yawning Void. There is a phrase, at the very opening of the Vǫluspá, the Old Norse poem in which a long dead wise woman, called a vǫlva, recounts the beginning and the end of the world, that has given translators a great deal of trouble for the better part of two centuries. The phrase is short. It is only a few words long.
It runs, in the original: gap var ginnunga. The void was yawning. Or, more loosely: there was a great gap. The phrase itself comes after a stanza that tells us, with admirable economy, that in the beginning there was nothing at all. No sand.
No sea. No cold waves. No earth, no heaven above. There was only, and here the poet pauses, almost as if searching for the right word, the gap. The yawning.
Ginnungagap. I want to spend some time with this word, because the Norse conception of the primordial nothing is, in my reading, one of the most interesting things in any old mythology. The Greeks had Chaos, but Chaos for the Greeks was a roiling, churning, primal jumble, full of pre stuff. The Hebrews had the formless void of Genesis, but their void was traveled over by the spirit of God almost from the first sentence. The Vedic hymns of ancient India spoke of a kind of unbreathing single breath, neither being nor not being.
Each tradition reached for something different. The Norse reached for a hush. Ginnungagap was not black. It was not full of darkness. It was not even, strictly speaking, empty, emptiness, after all, implies a container, and there was no container yet.
It was simply a kind of held space. A kind of yawning. A kind of pause before any breath. If you have ever stood, very late at night, in a place so quiet that the silence itself seems to take on a weight, that is, perhaps, the closest a modern person can come to the feeling. Ginnungagap was a presence that had not yet become anything.
Snorri Sturluson, writing in the thirteenth century in his book the Prose Edda, tries to be a little more orderly about it. He writes that Ginnungagap was a great gap, yes, but a great gap with sides. To the north of it lay a realm called Niflheimr, the Mist Home, a place of cold and fog and frost so old it had no beginning. To the south of it lay another realm called Múspellsheimr, the Home of Fire, a place of heat and embers and sparks that flew up endlessly and went out endlessly and were replaced. And between them, in that long held space, lay Ginnungagap itself.
I should pause here to acknowledge something, because the almanac will keep its promises about being honest with you. The Vǫluspá itself does not describe Ginnungagap in this way. The Vǫluspá describes only the gap. It does not place a fire realm to one side and a frost realm to the other. That neat geography comes from Snorri, who was working two hundred years later, and who was almost certainly trying to make a tidy diagram of what had originally been a much stranger, much vaguer picture.
Most scholars now agree that Snorri's neatness should be taken with a grain of salt. He was a Christian writing about gods who were no longer worshipped, and he was, in some sense, organizing them on a page for the first time. So when I describe what comes next, the fire to the south, the frost to the north, the slow meeting of their breath in the middle, I want you to know that this is mostly Snorri's picture. The older poetry is messier. It hints.
It does not draw a map. Still. The picture is beautiful. And it has, over the centuries, become the standard way of imagining the Norse beginning. So I will give you Snorri's picture, gently, knowing that the truth was probably stranger.
To the south, then, far to the south, far beyond anywhere a person could walk, there was Múspellsheimr. The land of fire. We will hear more about it in the next chapter. For now, only this: imagine a place where heat had always existed, and would always exist, and where the air itself shimmered. A place no living thing could survive.
A place that, in the very beginning, no living thing yet existed to attempt. To the north, equally far, equally unreachable, there was Niflheimr. The land of mist. A place of cold so absolute it could not even be called cold; cold is something that happens to a thing, and there was no thing yet to be cold. It was simply the place where, in time, the first frost would begin to gather.
And between them, neither cold nor hot, neither bright nor dark, lay the gap. The held breath. There is one small detail I want to add, because I love it. In the Vǫluspá, when the wisewoman lists what was not yet present in this earliest age, she names, among the absences, gras. Grass.
There was no grass yet. Of all the things she might have named, no sun, no moon, no stars, no rivers, no shore, she chose, for some reason, to specifically mention grass. There was a gap. But no grass. I think about this often.
I think it tells us something about the people who first sang the Vǫluspá. To them, even grass, small, ordinary, ankle high grass, was a kind of miracle. It belonged to the made world. It was a sign that things had been put in order. And so, at the beginning, when nothing had been put in order yet, there was no grass.
The absence of grass was the absence of everything. If you are listening in bed, I'd ask you to hold that image for a moment, before we go on. The great quiet. The yawning. The place that has not yet decided to be a place.
And nowhere, in any direction, no grass. Not yet. You can feel, can't you, that something is about to coalesce. There is no narrative reason for it to do so, the void could, in principle, go on forever, and in some other tradition perhaps it does. But the Norse poets seem to have understood something about voids that all very old traditions seem to have understood, which is that they do not, in the end, stay empty.
Something will drift into the gap. Something will drift down from the north and up from the south, and they will meet in the middle. And out of that meeting, out of the simplest possible reaction, frost meeting heat, will come the first drops of water in the cosmos. And from those drops, in time, will come the first being. But that is the next chapter.
For now, only the gap. Only the great yawning that has not yet become anything else. Only the wind, somewhere, and yes, even here, in the void, there is wind in the old poetry; the Norse imagination could not quite conceive of a place with no wind in it at all. Only the wind, somewhere, very far off, moving against nothing, and making no sound. And the absence of grass.
Part 4
Chapter Three. The First Fire and the First Frost. We left off, in the last chapter, with the void. With Ginnungagap. With the great held space between the fire realm and the frost realm.
With the absence of grass. Tonight, that long stillness is going to begin, very slowly, to end. I want to be careful, in this chapter, to honor how slowly the Norse imagined this. Most modern retellings of the creation story rush through what comes next, they give you a paragraph, perhaps, on the meeting of fire and ice, and then they hurry on to the first being. But the older poetry, when we can recover it, lingers.
The image of frost slowly creeping out into a void, of heat slowly pressing against it, of the long, long, long time before anything alive happens, this is, I think, one of the most patient images in any creation myth. The Norse mind seems to have understood that the universe took a great while to put itself in order, and saw no reason to hurry. So let us begin, then, with the frost. To the north of Ginnungagap lay Niflheimr. The Mist Home.
Or, in some older readings, simply the Dark Home, the syllable nifl in Old Norse carries a meaning closer to gloom than mist, and the realm may originally have been a place of darkness more than of fog. Either way, what mattered about Niflheimr is that it was old. Older than the gods. Older than the void's other edge. It had simply, somehow, always been there.
At the heart of Niflheimr there was, and this detail comes from Snorri, in the Prose Edda, a spring. A great spring of dark cold water. The name of this spring was Hvergelmir, which translates, loosely, as the Roaring Cauldron. From Hvergelmir, eleven rivers flowed. The Norse called them the Élivágar, which means something like the Ice Waves.
They poured outward, away from the heart of Niflheimr, and they ran a long way, and they froze. This is where, in the old poetic imagination, the long process began. The rivers ran. They poured out into the void. They froze, slowly, into great walls of ice that stretched out across the empty space.
They built up and built up and built up, over what must have been an unimaginable stretch of time, there is no clock in this story, and no calendar; the time before the gods is, in the deepest sense, untimed, until the cold of Niflheimr had pressed itself a long way across the void, and Ginnungagap, which had been hushed and empty and grass less, now had, in the north of it, a great wall of slow black ice. Meanwhile, to the south, the other thing was happening. Múspellsheimr, the Home of Fire, was as old as Niflheimr, and just as opposite. Where Niflheimr was dark and cold and damp, Múspellsheimr was bright and hot and dry. Where Niflheimr had a spring at its heart, Múspellsheimr had, well, the sources are less clear on what exactly stood at the heart of the fire realm.
The Vǫluspá does not describe it in detail. Snorri describes it, but mostly as a place of perpetual burning. Most translators settle on something like an endless field of fire, with sparks rising and falling, and embers cooling and reigniting, in a kind of slow eternal blaze. There is, however, one figure that all the sources do agree on. At the edge of Múspellsheimr, at the very southern boundary of the world, the place where fire met void, there stood a being.
His name was Surtr. The Black One. We will hear far more of him in later episodes, because he will play a part in the ending of the world; he is the one who, in the very last days, will lead the armies of fire against the gods. But for now, in the first age, he simply stood there. Watching.
Waiting. The sources do not tell us what he was waiting for. He carried a flaming sword. I find this detail extraordinary, the more I think about it. Most creation myths begin with quiet, with darkness, with water, with breath.
The Norse creation begins with a sentinel. Even at the very beginning, when there are no gods and no humans and no worlds, the Norse imagination places a figure on guard. As if the universe has been at risk, even from its first second, of something terrible. So. We have Niflheimr to the north, with its spring and its eleven rivers and its ever creeping walls of ice.
We have Múspellsheimr to the south, with its endless burning and its silent watchman. And between them, the void, which has been getting slowly less empty. What happens next is, in some ways, the simplest physics in any mythology. The ice from the north creeps a long way into the gap. The fire from the south sends its heat a long way into the gap.
And somewhere in the middle, somewhere in the very heart of Ginnungagap, where the absolute cold of the north met the absolute heat of the south, the ice began to melt. It happened slowly. It would have happened slowly. There is no rushing in this story. The first drops of water in the universe formed on the southern face of the great ice walls, and they hung there for a long time, gathering weight, before they finally fell.
They fell into nothing, into the void, and they did not land anywhere, because there was nothing to land on. But they were there. Drops of water. The first liquid that had ever existed. I'd like you to hold that image, if you are still with me.
The void, mostly empty. The great walls of ice. The slow sun warm of the fire realm pressing against them. And, beginning to form, drops of water, perfectly clear, perfectly cold, perfectly slow, hanging from the edges of the ice and then falling, one by one, into the great quiet. In Snorri's account, what happens next is that the drops begin to take a shape.
The Prose Edda is quite specific about this. The drops, as they fell, did not simply become water. They began, and here Snorri's language gets strange, almost reverent, to quicken. To stir. To become, somehow, alive.
The Norse word that is sometimes used for this is kvikna, which carries the sense of an awakening, or a quickening, the way an unborn child quickens in the womb. Something in the drops of water was beginning to live. And from that quickening, from the slow meeting of fire and frost, in the heart of a void that had been empty since before time, there began to form, slowly, the first body. Its name was Ymir. We will spend the next chapter with him.
But for tonight, only this: the void was not empty anymore. The ice was meeting the fire. The first drops of water were falling. And something, deep in the middle of all that meeting, was beginning to stir. The wind was still moving.
It had not stopped, in the long age between Chapter Two and Chapter Three. It had simply waited. Now, perhaps, it was starting to bring news.
Part 5
Chapter Four. Ymir, the First Being. There is a being now. A body. A shape in the void.
I want to say his name carefully, because the Norse sources give it to us in two forms, and both are correct. In the Prose Edda, in Snorri's account, he is called Ymir. In one of the oldest mythological poems of the Poetic Edda, the Vafþrúðnismál, he is called Aurgelmir, a name whose first part is uncertain, but which most scholars translate as something like the Gravel Yeller or the Mud Yeller, referring, perhaps, to the wet primal slurry of melting frost and fire warmed earth from which he was made. Most scholars now think these are two names for the same being, kept in different traditions and eventually reconciled by Snorri into a single figure. The almanac will use Ymir, because it is the more familiar name.
But you may keep both, in your mind, if you prefer. Ymir was, in the Norse imagination, the first living thing. He was older than the gods. He was older than the worlds. He was older than the first dawn.
He came into being, as we said in the last chapter, from the meeting of fire and frost, from the drops of water that quickened in the heart of Ginnungagap, in the warm place where the ice walls of Niflheimr were finally beginning to melt against the breath of Múspellsheimr. He was not a god. The sources are very clear on this. He was something older than gods. He was a jǫtunn, a giant, though the word giant is not quite right; the Old Norse jǫtunn refers to a being of great size and great age, not necessarily evil, not necessarily hostile, but other.
Older. Pre divine. The first jǫtunn was Ymir, and from him, eventually, all the other giants of Norse mythology would descend. Snorri describes Ymir's appearance only obliquely. He says that Ymir was very large.
He says that Ymir was, in some readings, neither male nor female, or perhaps both at once; the Old Norse word used for him, hrímþurs, the frost giant, does not specify a sex, and there is some indication in the poetic tradition that the first being was, in modern terms, intersex. From Ymir's body, in time, other giants would be born, not in the way that modern living things are born, but more strangely, more primally. The sources say that when Ymir slept, sweat formed under his arms, and from the sweat under his left arm, a man and a woman grew together, and from his two feet, a son was born. This is the way the first family of giants came into being, in the Norse imagination, not from coupling, but from the body itself, almost as if the body of Ymir was a kind of slow fountain of beings. I should pause here, again, to acknowledge how strange this is.
The Norse creation account, taken literally, is one of the strangest in any mythology. There is a body. From the body, other bodies come, not by birth, but by exudation. The first beings appear under arms and between feet. This is not metaphor, in the sources.
This is what Snorri describes, and what the Vafþrúðnismál implies. I think the strangeness is important. The Norse imagination did not begin with anything like the dignified, ordered, almost legal creations of other traditions. It began with a great body in the void, sweating new life out of itself, and a long slow process of beings emerging from the meeting of fire and ice. This is a mythology that does not flinch from the body.
It does not flinch from process. It begins messy. Now. There is one more being who comes into existence in this earliest age, and she is one of my favorite figures in any mythology, because she is so quiet, so domestic, so utterly unlike what a creation story usually contains. Her name was Auðumbla.
She is sometimes spelled Auðhumla in older sources; the spelling varies. She was a cow. That is not a joke. The Norse creation story, as Snorri tells it, includes a cow. Auðumbla, like Ymir, came into being from the slow meeting of fire and frost in the heart of Ginnungagap.
The sources do not tell us why a cow, of all things, formed in the void. Snorri seems to take it for granted, as if of course there would be a cow, what else would feed the first being? Four rivers of milk, the sources tell us, flowed from her, one stream from each of her four teats. And from those rivers, Ymir drank, and was nourished, and grew strong. I love this image.
I love the patience of it. The first being is a giant, alone in the void. The void is mostly empty. There is no land, no sky, no other beings. And there is a cow.
And the cow has milk. And the giant drinks the milk. And this goes on, for what must have been a very long time, before anything else happens at all. But the cow also had something else to do. According to Snorri, and this detail does not appear in the Poetic Edda, only in the Prose; so it may be Snorri's invention, or it may be a tradition older than the surviving poetry, Auðumbla, in addition to feeding Ymir, was also slowly licking a great stone of salt rime.
A stone of frozen salt, formed in the meeting of fire and ice. She licked it gently, day after day, the way a cow will lick a salt block in a barn. And as she licked, the stone began, very slowly, to reveal something. On the first day of her licking, there appeared, in the stone, the hair of a man. On the second day, the head emerged.
On the third day, the whole man stepped forth. His name was Búri. And he was, the sources tell us, very tall and very beautiful. He had been, somehow, inside the stone all along, the way a sculpture is said to be inside the block of marble before the sculptor begins. The salt and the milk and the patient tongue of the cow had, over three days, revealed him.
Búri was, in some sense, the first ancestor of the gods. Snorri says he had a son, though the source does not tell us how, since there were no women yet, only the giants and the cow. Perhaps Búri, like Ymir, simply produced his son from his own body. Perhaps the sources are silent because the storytellers themselves did not know. In any case, the son's name was Borr.
And Borr eventually took a wife, a wife from among the early giants, a being called Bestla, who was the daughter of one of Ymir's descendants. And Borr and Bestla had three sons. You may have heard of the eldest. His name was Odin. The middle son was called Vili.
The youngest was called Vé. These three would become, in time, the first gods of the Norse pantheon, the Æsir, the gods of Asgard, the high ones, the rulers of the world to come. But they were not yet gods, at this point in the story. They were three young men, born in the void, born among giants, born long before there was any world for them to rule. They were Borr's sons, and they were the descendants of the patient cow and her salt stone, and that is all they were.
For now. I would like you to hold this scene in your mind, if you are still listening, before we move on to what they did. The void. The first giant, Ymir, drinking from a cow's four rivers of milk. The cow, licking a stone, day after day, until a man emerged.
The man fathering a son. The son taking a wife from among the giants. The three boys born to them, in the great quiet, with no world yet to put their feet on, and no fire to gather around, and no stars yet hung overhead to look up at. There is one important thing the sources tell us about the three boys. They were unlike Ymir.
They were unlike the giants. They were something new. And when they were grown, they would do something that the giants could not have done, and that would change the universe forever. They would decide that the world needed to be made. But that, again, that is the next chapter.
For now, the wind is still moving. The cow is still licking. The giant is still drinking. The three young men are still small, still gathered close to their mother, still listening to her stories of what had been before. The void is mostly quiet.
And the great work, the work of making the world, has not begun yet. Sleep, if you can.
Part 6
Chapter Five. The Sons of Borr and the Slaying of Ymir. We arrive now, in this chapter, at a moment in the Norse creation story that I have, over the years, found difficult to tell. It is not difficult because it is graphic, though it is somewhat graphic, in a slow archaic way. It is difficult because it is, on its face, a story about three brothers who killed their great grandfather.
And to tell that story in a way that does not jolt you awake, which is, after all, the purpose of this almanac, requires some care. So I will tell it gently. I will not linger. And I will frame it the way the Norse themselves seem to have framed it, which is as a kind of necessary turning, not a tragedy, not a triumph, but the moment at which the world tilted from one age into another. You will remember, from the last chapter, that three young men had been born to Borr and Bestla in the void: Odin, Vili, and Vé.
They were the sons of a man who had himself been produced by a cow's slow licking of a salt stone. They were the great grandsons of Búri, the first ancestor. They were, in some sense, the first beings in the cosmos to be fully neither giant nor god, to be something new. And as they grew, in the patient quiet of those earliest ages, they came to a decision. The world, as it was, was not yet a world.
The void had a giant in it. The void had a cow. The void had three brothers and the lingering presence of older giants who had emerged, as we said, from Ymir's own body. But the void did not yet have land, or sea, or sky, or sun, or moon. It did not yet have anywhere for the three brothers to make a home.
And the three brothers, in their long quiet conversations during those ageless ages, came to feel that something needed to change. The Norse sources are not entirely clear on why they decided what they decided. The Prose Edda tells us only that they killed Ymir. The Vafþrúðnismál implies it, but does not describe it. There is no scene of confrontation.
There is no quoted speech. There is only, in the texts, the matter of fact statement that Borr's sons slew the great giant, and that from his body the world was then made. Some scholars have read this as a kind of necessary act of cosmic gardening, the Norse equivalent of the Indo European pattern in which a primordial being must be sacrificed in order for the world to take shape. The Vedic tradition of ancient India has a strikingly similar story, in which a primordial figure named Purusha is sacrificed by the gods, and from his body the elements of the world are formed. The Persian tradition has Gayōmard, the first man, whose body is similarly broken open to produce the materials of the cosmos.
Across the Indo European world, this image of a primal being whose body becomes the world is so widespread that most scholars now think it must trace back to a single very ancient story, told and retold by peoples whose languages would later split and migrate across continents. The Norse account is, in this reading, one branch of a story so old that we cannot any longer trace its root. I am drawn to this reading. It feels honest. The Norse poets, working in their cold longhouses two and three thousand years after that original story was first told, were not, in the deepest sense, inventing.
They were preserving something they had inherited. And what they had inherited included the idea that the world could not begin without the death of something very large and very old. So. The three brothers killed Ymir. The texts tell us only that they did it.
They do not tell us how. There is no weapon named, no blow described. We are simply told, as if it had always been the case, that Ymir was dead. When he died, and here the sources do become more specific, a great quantity of blood flowed from his body. The Old Norse word used for this flowing is hreyrr, which carries something of the meaning of a torrent.
And in the cosmos as it then existed, with no land yet and no sea, this great flowing of blood became a kind of flood. It rolled outward across the void. It surrounded all the other giants, who had themselves been born from Ymir's body in the earlier ages. And it drowned them. All of them, the sources say, except one.
His name was Bergelmir. And he was, by the time of the slaying, an old giant, already a grandfather, already wise. He and his wife, whose name the sources do not give, escaped the flood. The Vafþrúðnismál tells us specifically how: they climbed onto a hollow log, a kind of mill trough, in some translations; a kind of small boat, in others, and they rode the great flood out, the two of them clinging to the wood, while around them all the other early giants drowned. And in time, when the flood receded, Bergelmir and his wife stepped down from their boat and went on to father the second great line of giants, the line that survives into the later mythology and that will play a part, in due course, in the war between the gods and the giants at the end of the world.
But that is far off. For tonight, I would like you to hold the moment after the slaying. The void. The great body of Ymir, no longer alive. The flood of his blood spreading outward in a slow tide.
The single hollow log carrying the only two survivors. The three brothers, Odin, Vili, and Vé, standing somewhere in the middle of all that. And the silence afterward. The strange immense silence of having done a thing that could not be undone. The Norse poets do not, as far as I can tell, ever describe what the three brothers said to each other after the killing.
They do not describe regret. They do not describe pride. They describe, instead, what came next, which is that the three brothers went to work. They had, lying before them, the great dead body of the first being. And they had a decision to make.
They could leave him there, in the void, and continue to drift in the ageless quiet of pre creation. Or they could begin, with what they now had, to build something. They chose to build. And the way they chose to build is one of the strangest and most arresting images in any mythology. Because what they did, in the next chapter, was take Ymir's body apart, piece by piece, and from each piece make a part of the world.
His flesh became the earth. His blood became the seas. His bones became the mountains. His teeth became the rocks. His skull became the dome of the sky.
His brains became the clouds. His hair became the trees. His eyebrows, and this detail I love, his eyebrows became the wall around Miðgarðr, the middle enclosure where humans would, in time, come to live. But I am racing ahead. I will tell you about each transformation slowly, in the next chapter, because each is worth its own quiet pause.
For now, only this: the killing has happened. The flood has receded. The three brothers are standing in the void, with the great body of their ancestor before them, and the work of making the world is about to begin. Sleep, if you can. The hardest part of the story is behind us.
What comes next is gentler, though no less strange.
Part 7
Chapter Six. The Making of the World. I want to begin this chapter with a small confession, which is that the chapter you are about to hear is, in my reading, the most difficult chapter in the entire creation story to tell well. Not because it is violent, the violence is behind us, and the slaying of Ymir, as we said, has been done. The difficulty, rather, is that what comes next is, on the page, almost laughably matter of fact.
The Prose Edda, when it describes the making of the world, does it in something like five sentences. Snorri lists the parts of Ymir, lists the things they became, and moves on. The Grímnismál, one of the older mythological poems of the Poetic Edda, is similarly economical. It gives us a few stanzas, almost a kind of inventory, and then proceeds. There is no narrative drama.
There is no scene of construction. There is no point in either text where the three brothers stand back, sweat on their brows, and admire their work. There is, instead, a list. I have come to think that the list, in its strange flatness, is part of what makes the Norse creation story feel so old. There is no rhetoric.
There is no celebration. There is only a body, and the body has parts, and the parts become the world. So let me give you the list. Slowly. The way I think the old Norse storytellers would have given it, as a series of simple, almost reverent statements, each followed by a long pause for the listener to imagine.
The flesh of Ymir, the sources say, became the earth. I would like you to think about this for a moment. Not the violence of it, the violence is over. Think about the image. The great body of the first being, no longer moving, no longer breathing.
And the flesh of that body, slowly, somehow, through whatever process the gods used, becoming earth. Becoming soil. Becoming the loamy, dark, ordinary stuff that grass would, in time, grow out of. The same earth that you and I have walked on. The earth was once, in this reading, a body.
The blood of Ymir, the sources tell us, became the seas. The Norse, of course, knew the sea well. They lived against it. They depended on it. They had thrown their dead into it, in long ship funerals; they had fished from it; they had crossed it in great migrations to Iceland and Greenland and as far west, in time, as the eastern coast of North America.
And they imagined, when they imagined the beginning of things, that the sea, that great salt restless thing, was, in some deep sense, the blood of an ancient body. The brine taste of it. The slow heave of it. They imagined that this had once been alive. That every wave was, in some measure, the slow pulse of a heart that had stopped a long time ago.
The bones of Ymir, the sources say, became the mountains. This image, perhaps, is easier for us. The mountains do look like bones, when you have lived among them. They have that quality of jutting, of structural, of geometry from some larger body. The Norse, who lived among the dramatic mountains of Norway and the volcanic ridges of Iceland, would have seen this resemblance directly.
Their mountains were, in their imagination, the skeleton of the first being, lifted up into the daylight. The teeth of Ymir, the sources say, and the broken pieces of his bones, became the rocks. The stones. The smaller scattered things on the surface of the earth. The pebbles in a streambed.
The boulders on a hillside. The hand sized rocks a person might pick up and turn over in their palm. All of them, in the Norse imagination, were the smaller pieces of that great old body. The hair of Ymir, the sources tell us, became the trees. I find this one beautiful.
The forest as the hair of a body. The slow growth of pine and birch and oak and fir, the long boreal forests of northern Europe, all of it imagined as a kind of slow hair, emerging from the earth that had once been flesh, blowing in the wind, growing and falling and growing again. Trees in this reading are not simply alive. They are the living growth of an older life. They are what continues, in green, after the great body has stilled.
The skull of Ymir, the sources tell us, became the dome of the sky. This image, I think, requires the most patience. The sky as a skull, arched overhead, holding everything in. The Norse imagination did not picture the sky as we picture it, as an open atmosphere fading into the vacuum of space. They pictured it as a kind of bowl, or a kind of dome, set over the earth like a ceiling.
And the dome, in their picture, was the inside of a skull. The skull of the first being. To hold the great dome of the sky in place, because, in the Norse cosmology, even the sky needed to be held up, the gods placed four dwarves at its four corners. The names of these dwarves are given in the Prose Edda. They are called Norðri, Suðri, Austri, and Vestri.
North, South, East, and West. They stand, the sources say, at the four corners of the sky, one at each corner, holding up the great curve of the dome forever. They are, in this reading, the first laborers in the cosmos, and the most patient. They have been at their work since the very beginning, and they will be at their work until the end. Each carries one corner.
None of them, the sources tell us, ever sets it down. The brains of Ymir, the sources say, became the clouds. This detail is, in some ways, the strangest. It has, I think, more poetry than logic in it. The clouds as the brains of a body, drifting, soft, gray and white, gathering and dispersing across the sky.
There is something almost humorous about the image, and yet something almost devastating about it. The Norse seem to have wanted, in this final detail, to suggest that even the thinking of the first being, even his mind, had been given over to the world. The clouds drift. The mind drifts. The body had become the world, and the mind had become the things that drift across the world.
There is one more transformation, and I want to give it to you because it is among my favorites. The eyebrows of Ymir, the sources tell us, became the wall around Miðgarðr. Miðgarðr, the Middle Enclosure, the realm where humans would, in time, come to live, was, in the Norse imagination, a kind of fortified middle ring of the world. A safe place. A bounded place.
And the wall that surrounded it, that kept out the giants and the trolls and the older creatures of the outer dark, was, in this reading, made from the eyebrows of the first being. I cannot fully explain why I love this detail. I think it has something to do with the smallness of eyebrows in the context of a body, and the importance of the wall in the context of a world. A small thing, in the body, became a large thing, in the cosmos. As if every part of Ymir, even the smallest and most ordinary, had a role in the world to come.
And there is one more detail, before we close this chapter. The Vǫluspá tells us that the gods, in the course of making the world, took sparks from Múspellsheimr, the realm of fire we visited two chapters ago, and used them to make the stars. The sun. The moon. The points of light in the dome of the sky.
The fire realm, in this reading, gave the cosmos its lights. The frost realm gave it its first being. And the body of the first being gave it everything else. The world, after this great work, was no longer a void. It was a world.
There was earth, and there was sea. There were mountains, and there were trees. There was a sky, and there were stars. There was a wall around the middle of it all, where humans had not yet appeared but would soon. There was a dome held up by four patient dwarves.
It was not yet finished. There was no Yggdrasill yet, no great tree at the center. There were no nine worlds yet, as we now know them. There were no gods other than the three brothers, and there were no humans, and there were no elves, and there were no dwarves other than the four corner dwarves and a few others who had begun to appear from the maggots that crawled in Ymir's flesh, a detail I have left out only because it is, even by Norse standards, a little strange, and because we will get to the dwarves properly in a later chapter. But there was a world.
There was, for the first time, something to stand on. The making of the world was, in some sense, finished. The shaping of the worlds, the nine of them, with the great tree at their center, was about to begin. That is the next chapter. For tonight, sleep, if you can.
The void is gone. The world has been made. Whatever else comes, from here forward, will be built on top of what was raised tonight. The wind, of course, is still moving. It is now moving across the new earth.
It is now lifting through the new trees. It is now pulling at the edges of the new clouds. It has, perhaps, more to do. But it does not seem to be in a hurry.
Part 8
Chapter Seven. Yggdrasill, the World tree. There is a tree now. Or, at least, the sources tell us that there came to be a tree, somewhere in the long age after the world had been made and before the first humans walked on it. The Norse did not, as far as I can tell, ever describe the moment of the tree's appearance.
There is no scene of planting. There is no description of a seed. The tree, in the surviving poetry, simply is, as if it had been there all along, or as if it had grown so slowly and so quietly that no one noticed until it was already touching the sky. Its name was Yggdrasill. We met the name in the first chapter, Yggr's horse, Odin's horse, the tree on which the High One would one day hang.
But tonight I want to spend time not with the future of the tree, but with the tree itself. As an image. As a presence. Yggdrasill was, in the Norse imagination, an ash. The Old Norse word askr, which gives us the English word ash, the tree species, is used in the sources.
Some scholars have argued that it might originally have been a different kind of tree, perhaps a yew, given certain ambiguous references; but the dominant tradition gives us an ash. A great ash tree, growing somewhere in the center of the cosmos, with its roots going downward and its branches going upward, holding the worlds in its great architecture. The sources tell us that Yggdrasill had three roots. Only three. This is one of the details on which all the Norse sources seem to agree.
Where the three roots went is, however, a matter of some disagreement. The Prose Edda, written by Snorri, tells us that one root went down to Asgard, where the gods lived; one root went down to Jǫtunheimr, where the giants lived; and one root went down to Niflheimr, the old frost realm we visited many chapters ago. The Poetic Edda, specifically the poem Grímnismál, gives us a slightly different account. It says one root goes to the world of men, one root goes to the giants, and one root goes to Hel, the realm of the dead. The two accounts are similar but not identical, and most scholars now believe that the older poetic version is closer to the original tradition.
Snorri, in his usual way, was probably reconciling several variant accounts into a single tidy diagram. The almanac will tell you both. Where the sources disagree, the almanac will not pretend otherwise. What is consistent across both accounts is that the roots of Yggdrasill go down into very different places. One root reaches into the realm of the gods or the realm of men, depending on the source.
One root reaches into the realm of the giants. And one root reaches into the deep cold places, where the dead and the older powers live. The tree connects the high realms and the low realms. It holds the cosmos together. Now.
The branches of Yggdrasill, what was happening up there, in the high air, where the leaves moved? The sources tell us a great deal about this. More, in fact, than they tell us about the roots. Yggdrasill, in the Norse imagination, was alive in a particular and beautiful way. It had inhabitants.
It had visitors. It had its own ongoing private cosmic drama. At the very top of the tree, at the highest point, where the branches reached into the open air above the dome of the sky, there sat an eagle. The eagle was nameless in most of the sources. He was simply called the eagle.
He sat in the topmost branches and looked out across the worlds. Between the eyes of the eagle, the Grímnismál tells us, there sat a hawk. His name was Veðrfǫlnir, which translates loosely as the Storm Pale. Why a hawk would sit between the eyes of an eagle, and what the hawk did up there, the sources do not explain. He is simply there.
The almanac will not invent a reason for him. Running up and down the trunk of Yggdrasill, moving constantly between the eagle at the top and the dragon at the bottom, which we will get to in a moment, was a squirrel. His name was Ratatoskr, which translates roughly as the Drill Tooth, or in some readings the Bore Tooth. The Old Norse name is faintly comic; ratatoskr sounds, even to a modern ear, like a small busy creature. And he was, by all accounts, a busy creature.
He spent his days running up the trunk of the great tree, bringing messages, usually insulting messages, from the dragon at the roots to the eagle at the top. And then running back down, bringing the eagle's insults to the dragon. He was, in the Norse imagination, the gossip of the cosmos. I find this detail wonderful. The great world tree, holding all the realms together, holding the gods and the giants and the dead all in its branches and roots, and at its center, going about its work, a small chattering squirrel, carrying messages of mutual irritation between an eagle and a dragon who could not, by reason of their stations, speak to each other directly.
The Norse imagination had room for the cosmic and the petty in equal measure. In the middle branches of the tree, the sources tell us, there were four stags. Four red deer. They are named in the Grímnismál, and the names are worth giving you, because they are quite beautiful in Old Norse. They were called Dáinn, Dvalinn, Duneyrr, and Duraþrór.
Their names, very roughly translated, mean something like the Sleeper, the Unconscious One, the Thundering in the Ear, and the Thriving Slumber. They moved among the branches of the tree, eating the leaves, the bark, the new shoots. The dew that gathered in their antlers, the sources tell us, became, in some readings, the rivers of the world. I will say that last detail again, because I think it is one of the most striking images in any mythology. The dew that gathered, on cold mornings, in the antlers of four deer eating leaves in the middle branches of a cosmic tree, that dew became, when it dripped to the ground, the rivers of the world.
The rivers of the world, in this reading, were the slow morning shake off of four sleeping deer in a tree. Now. At the roots, at the very bottom of Yggdrasill, in the dark wet places where the great tree drove down into the older realms, there was a dragon. The Norse called him Níðhǫggr, which translates roughly as the Striker of Malice, or the Tearer in the Dark. He lay coiled around one of the roots of the tree, and he did, the sources tell us, three things.
He gnawed. He waited. And he occasionally surfaced, into the upper world, to feed on the corpses of the wicked dead. He was not, like a dragon in a later European story, a hoarder of gold. He was, in the Norse imagination, simply a slow dark hunger at the base of the world.
Along with him, the sources tell us, there were many other serpents. They had names, in the Grímnismál, Góinn and Móinn (the sons of an older serpent called Grafvitnir), and Grábakr, and Grafvölluðr, and Ófnir, and Sváfnir, and they gnawed at the roots alongside Níðhǫggr. The great tree, in the Norse imagination, was constantly being eaten from below. The leaves were constantly being eaten from the middle, by the four stags. The bark was constantly being scarred, in the higher branches, by Ratatoskr's claws.
And yet the tree stood. The Norse poets do not tell us, exactly, why the tree did not die. The sources say only that the Norns, three women who lived at one of the roots, whom we will meet properly in two chapters, tended the tree. They drew water from the well at its root. They poured the water back onto the bark.
They kept the tree alive against all the small daily destructions of squirrel and stag and dragon and serpent. This image, of a tree being slowly, patiently, ceaselessly destroyed, and slowly, patiently, ceaselessly mended, is, in some readings of Norse mythology, the deepest image the tradition has. It is the image of the cosmos itself. Always being unmade. Always being remade.
Held together, in the end, by the patient daily work of beings whose names we have nearly lost. The tree holds the worlds. The worlds hang in the tree. And in the next chapter, we will walk through each of them, slowly, by name. Sleep, if you can.
The picture is now complete. The world has been made. The tree has been raised. The squirrel is still running up and down. The stags are still eating.
The dragon is still gnawing. The Norns, whom we have not met yet, are still pouring water. And the wind is still moving, through the leaves, in a sound that has been going for so long, by now, that it has nearly become the sound of the universe itself.
Part 9
Chapter Eight. The Nine Worlds Named. We have come, in the slow course of this episode, to the heart of what its title promised. The Nine Worlds. I want to be honest with you, before we name them, about a problem in the sources.
The Norse sources are unanimous that there were nine worlds. The number nine recurs all through Norse mythology, Odin hung on the tree for nine nights, Heimdallr was said to have nine mothers, the messenger god Hermóðr would later ride for nine nights through dark valleys to reach the realm of the dead, and the number had, for the Norse, a kind of cosmic importance that scholars have spent two centuries trying to fully account for. So we can be quite sure that there were nine worlds. The Vǫluspá says so explicitly. The wise woman who speaks the poem remembers, she says, nine worlds.
What the sources do not give us, anywhere, is a clean numbered list of those nine worlds. This is the problem. We have, scattered across the Poetic Edda and the Prose Edda and several other sources, references to a great many worlds. We have Ásgarðr and Vanaheimr and Álfheimr and Miðgarðr and Jǫtunheimr and Niflheimr and Múspellsheimr and Svartálfaheimr and Niðavellir and Hel. That is ten names, at least.
And depending on how you count, you could find one or two more in passing references. So which nine make the canonical list? The honest answer is that there is no canonical list. Different modern scholars have proposed different reconstructions. Most agree on the same seven or eight names; the disagreement comes around the edges.
Was Svartálfaheimr the same place as Niðavellir, just under a different name? Were both real, and did the count include both? Was Hel a separate world, or was Hel merely a region of Niflheimr? On these questions, the medieval sources are silent or contradictory, and modern scholarship has had to guess. What I will give you, tonight, is the list that most scholars now consider the most defensible reconstruction.
It is not the only possible list. But it is the list that comes closest to what the surviving evidence suggests. I will walk through the nine slowly. One paragraph, more or less, per world. We will hear all of these again, in much greater detail, in later episodes of this season.
The first world is Ásgarðr. The realm of the Æsir gods. The high enclosure of the high ones. This is where Odin lives, in his great hall Valhǫll, and where his wife Frigg sits, and where Thor and Týr and Heimdall and most of the gods you have heard of make their home. Ásgarðr sits, in the Norse imagination, at the very top of the cosmos, usually pictured as a kind of high plateau or great floating realm, with golden halls and bright meadows and the high seat of the Allfather at its center. It was reached, from the world of men, by a single bridge of light.
We will hear about the bridge in two chapters. The second world is Vanaheimr. The realm of the Vanir. The Vanir were a second family of gods, older perhaps than the Æsir, or perhaps simply different from them. They were associated, in the Norse imagination, with fertility, with the seasons, with the slow growth of crops and the slow movement of animals.
The Vanir included Njǫrðr, the god of the sea, and his children Freyr and Freyja, the great twin gods of love and harvest. The Vanir and the Æsir, the sources tell us, fought a great war in the very early days, and then made peace; afterwards, certain Vanir came to live in Ásgarðr, and certain Æsir went to live in Vanaheimr, as a kind of mutual hostage exchange. Most of the lore now positions Vanaheimr as a quieter, more agricultural, more pastoral realm than Ásgarðr, though the sources are spare, and we know less about it than we would like. The third world is Álfheimr. The realm of the elves.
The Old Norse álfar, which gives us our English word elf, referred to beings of light and grace, neither gods nor humans, who lived in their own separate realm. The Prose Edda specifies that Álfheimr was the home of the ljósálfar, the light elves, and goes on to imply, somewhat confusingly, that there were also dökkálfar, dark elves, who lived elsewhere. The light elves, Snorri says, were fairer than the sun to look upon. They lived their own lives in their own realm, and they appear only rarely in the surviving myths. We will return to them, in a later episode, but tonight only this: they were, in the Norse imagination, beings of a beauty that we cannot fully picture, and a realm of a brightness we cannot fully imagine.
The fourth world is Miðgarðr. The Middle Enclosure. The world of human beings, of you and me. This is where the wall of Ymir's eyebrows stands, holding off the wilder powers of the outer dark. This is where mortals plant their crops, raise their children, bury their dead.
The Norse imagined Miðgarðr as a ring or a disk at the center of the cosmos, surrounded, in some accounts, by a great sea, and in that sea a great serpent called Jǫrmungandr, who lay coiled around the world with his tail in his mouth. We will meet the serpent properly in a later episode. For tonight, only this: Miðgarðr is the human realm, and it is the only one of the nine worlds where we can be quite sure that we have ever set foot. The fifth world is Jǫtunheimr. The realm of the giants.
The home of the jǫtnar, the older beings, who descended from Ymir's body and from Bergelmir's surviving line. Jǫtunheimr was, in the Norse imagination, a wild place. A place of high mountains, of deep cold forests, of long ravines and frozen rivers. The giants who lived there were not, on the whole, evil, though some were dangerous, but they were other. They belonged to an older order.
They had been there before the gods came. And in the very last days of the world, as we will hear in due course, they would rise against the gods in a great final battle. The sixth world is Niflheimr. The Mist Home. The old frost realm we visited many chapters ago, when we were still in the time before the world was made.
Niflheimr is, in the surviving sources, the great cold pole of the cosmos. It is where the eleven rivers come from. It is where the dragon Níðhǫggr lies, gnawing at the root of Yggdrasill. It is, in some accounts, where the cold dead go, those who died of old age, of sickness, of any death that was not heroic. The seventh world is Múspellsheimr.
The Home of Fire. The other primal realm we visited long ago. Múspellsheimr is the hot pole of the cosmos. It is where Surtr, the dark sentinel, stands at the southern edge with his flaming sword. From Múspellsheimr come the sparks that became the stars.
In the very last days of the world, the sources tell us, the armies of Múspellsheimr will ride out across the rainbow bridge, and the bridge itself will break beneath their weight. The eighth world is Svartálfaheimr. The realm of the dark elves. Or, in some readings, the realm of the dwarves, the sources are unclear on whether the dark elves and the dwarves were the same beings under different names, or two different peoples sharing similar realms, or whether Svartálfaheimr and Niðavellir were two names for the same place. Most scholars now think there was a single underground or twilit realm where the smith peoples lived, the dwarves who forged the great weapons of the gods, who made Thor's hammer and Odin's spear and the ship that could be folded up to fit in a pocket.
They were craftsmen. They were patient. And they lived, in the Norse imagination, in long deep workshops where the forges never went out. The ninth world, in most reconstructions, is Hel. The realm of the dead.
Not, as in later medieval Christian imagination, a place of fire and punishment, that is a different idea, from a different tradition. The Norse Hel was a cold quiet country, a kind of long gray underworld, ruled by a goddess named Hel, who was the daughter of Loki. Most of the dead went there, eventually, to wait. There was no torment in Hel. There was simply, the sources suggest, a great quiet that went on and on.
The heroes who died gloriously in battle did not go to Hel; they went, instead, to the high halls of Ásgarðr, Valhǫll, or Freyja's hall Fólkvangr. But for the ordinary dead, Hel waited. That is the list, then. Ásgarðr. Vanaheimr. Álfheimr. Miðgarðr.
Jǫtunheimr. Niflheimr. Múspellsheimr. Svartálfaheimr. Hel.
Nine worlds. Hanging in the branches and along the trunk and at the roots of the great tree. Each different. Each with its own peoples. Each, in some sense, its own private world.
The wind, by now, is moving through all of them. The wind has somehow always been moving. It does not require introduction. In the next chapter, we will go down to the roots. We will look at the three wells beneath the great tree.
We will meet the women who tend them. And we will, finally, find the place where fate itself is woven. Sleep, if you can.
Part 10
Chapter Nine. The Wells Beneath the Roots. If you would like to know where fate itself comes from, in the Norse imagination, you have to go down. You have to leave the high branches, where the eagle sits, and the middle branches, where the stags eat, and you have to follow the slow downward run of the great tree to its base. You have to go past the trunk.
You have to go past the visible roots. You have to go beneath, into the dark wet places where the tree drinks its water. There you will find the wells. There were three wells beneath Yggdrasill, the sources tell us. Three, the way there were three roots.
The Prose Edda gives us a tidy account: one well beneath each root. The Poetic Edda is, again, less tidy, sometimes the wells overlap, sometimes the same body of water seems to wear two names. But on the number three, the sources agree. Three wells. One at each root.
The first well is called Urðarbrunnr. The Well of Urðr. The Well of Fate. This is, perhaps, the most important place in all of Norse mythology that no one ever fully describes. The sources say it is a body of water.
They say it is sacred. They say that the gods come to it, in the course of their long lives, to hold council together, the Æsir ride down from Ásgarðr, every day, in some accounts, to gather around the well and decide matters of importance. The water of Urðarbrunnr was, the sources say, so pure that anything which touched it became white. White as the inside of an eggshell. White as the membrane between yolk and white.
White in a way that was not a color, exactly, but a kind of purity that had passed beyond color. By this well lived three women. Three figures who, in many ways, are the most important figures in all of Norse cosmology, more important, even, than Odin, though Odin himself feared them. They were called the Nornir. In English, the Norns.
Their names, the sources tell us, were Urðr, Verðandi, and Skuld. The names themselves carry meaning. Urðr means what has been. Verðandi means what is becoming. Skuld means what must come.
They were the past, the present, and the future. They were not goddesses, exactly, they did not live in Ásgarðr, they were not numbered among the Æsir or the Vanir. They were older. They were stranger. They had been there since the beginning, and they would be there at the end, and in between, they wove fate.
How they wove it, the sources tell us, varied. Some accounts speak of them carving runes on the trunk of Yggdrasill. Some accounts speak of them spinning a great thread, the way women in the longhouses of medieval Iceland would spin wool, measuring out a length of thread for each newborn child, and cutting it when the time came for that child to die. Some accounts speak of them simply tending the tree, pouring water from the well over its bark, packing white clay around its wounds, keeping the great cosmic ash alive against the slow gnawing of the serpents below. All three accounts may be right.
The Norns, in the Norse imagination, were never quite pinned down to a single image. They were what was, what is, and what must come. They were the weight of fate itself. And even the gods, the sources tell us, were subject to them. That is a remarkable thing, and worth pausing over.
In Norse mythology, the gods are not all powerful. Odin himself does not know everything; he has to work hard, in many of the surviving stories, to learn even small pieces of what is to come. But the Norns know. The Norns have always known. They sit at the root of the tree, they pour their white water onto its bark, they keep their threads in order, and they know how everything will end.
This is the first well. Urðarbrunnr. The Well of Fate. The second well is called Mímisbrunnr. The Well of Mímir.
The Well of Wisdom, though it is also, in some readings, the Well of Memory. The Old Norse word mímir is etymologically related to the English word memory. The sources tell us that this well lay beneath the root of Yggdrasill that reached into Jǫtunheimr, the realm of the giants. By the well lived a being called Mímir, who was sometimes counted among the giants, sometimes counted among an older order of beings, sometimes counted as something else entirely. He was, the sources are clear, very wise.
The water of his well was wisdom itself, and Mímir drank from it daily, and he had been drinking from it since the beginning of things. There is a story, which we will tell properly in a later episode, about how Odin came to this well. About what Odin gave, and what he received. The short version is that Odin wanted to drink from the well of wisdom, and Mímir would not let him drink without a price, and the price was an eye. Odin's eye.
So Odin gave his eye. The Vǫluspá, the older of the two main sources, does not describe the moment in detail. It tells us only that Odin's eye lies, to this day, at the bottom of Mímir's well, given as a pledge for the wisdom he drank. The image of him physically plucking it out comes mostly through later tradition. What the older poetry tells us is simpler.
The eye is in the well. The wisdom was bought. We will return to this. For tonight, only this: there was a well of wisdom, beneath one of the roots of the great tree. A being named Mímir kept it.
And the eye of the All Father lay, the sources say, at the bottom of that well, and lies there still, looking up through the water at whoever might lean over to drink. The third well is called Hvergelmir. The Roaring Cauldron. We have heard the name before, Hvergelmir was the spring at the heart of Niflheimr, in the old time, from which the eleven rivers flowed when the world was still being made. It was older than the tree.
It was older than the gods. And when the tree finally raised itself over the cosmos, one of its three roots came down, the sources tell us, into the same dark cold water where Hvergelmir had always been. By this well there lived no gentle being. No three women, no patient Mímir. By this well, instead, there coiled Níðhǫggr, the dragon we met two chapters ago, in our walk through the tree itself.
He gnawed at the root of Yggdrasill that came down to Hvergelmir. He waited. The water around him, the sources say, was full of writhing serpents, the same serpents whose names were given in the Grímnismál, the slow tireless eaters of the deepest root. The water itself was said to be cold, and dark, and very old. The three wells, in some readings, are three different faces of the same thing.
The well of fate. The well of wisdom. The well of decay. What has been. What we have learned.
What is slowly being lost. The Norse imagination put all three at the root of the same tree, and asked you to imagine that a tree that grew from such waters would be a tree of all of those things at once, a tree of fate, of memory, of slow ruin. A tree, in other words, exactly like the cosmos. I find this image, more than almost any other in the Norse tradition, the one that lingers. The great tree.
The three wells. The fates pouring white water on the bark. The eye in the dark. The dragon at the cold root. All of it underneath the worlds we live in.
All of it slowly happening, every minute, even as we sleep. Sleep, if you can. The wells are quiet down there. They have been quiet for a long time.
Part 11
Chapter Ten. The Bridge of Burning Light. There is one more piece to set in place, before we close the picture of the Norse cosmos. One more structure to name. We have the tree.
We have the nine worlds. We have the three wells beneath the roots. What we do not yet have, in our picture, is the way between any of them. How did the gods, who lived in Ásgarðr at the top of the tree, come down to Miðgarðr, to the world of men, when they wished to? They did not, in the Norse imagination, simply step down.
The cosmos was not arranged so casually. The realms were genuinely separate, genuinely far apart, genuinely walled off from one another. To go between them, you needed a road. And the road, in this mythology, was a bridge. The bridge had a name.
The Norse called it Bifrǫst. In some older spellings, it appears as Bilrǫst, the spelling is debated, and most scholars now think the older form may have been Bilrǫst, with the more familiar Bifrǫst arising later. The name, in either spelling, translates roughly as the trembling road, or the swaying way. A road that was not entirely solid. A road that you could see, on a fair day, arching across the sky between worlds.
You may already have guessed what Bifrǫst was. The sources, when they describe it, describe a great arch of three colors in the sky. A great band of light, suspended between Miðgarðr and Ásgarðr, with the colors of a rainbow. It was a rainbow. The Norse imagined the rainbow, that occasional bright shimmering thing that appears in the sky after rain, as a bridge.
A road. The visible track between the world of men and the world of the gods. When you stood, in medieval Norway or Iceland, in your wet farmer's field after a long shower, and saw a sudden arc of color over the mountains, you were looking, in the imagination of the people who told these stories, at the place where the gods walked when they came down. You were looking at infrastructure. I find this beautiful, and a little funny, in equal measure.
The Norse imagination took something we all know, a rainbow, the most ordinary heavenly sight, present in every sky on every continent, and made it the most important piece of architecture in the cosmos. Their bridge between worlds was not hidden. It was not secret. It was, in fact, the most visible thing in the sky after the sun and the moon. You could see it any time you were lucky with the rain.
The three colors of Bifrǫst, the sources tell us, had meaning. The red was fire, burning fire, the sources specifically say, the kind of fire that would consume any giant or troll who tried to climb the bridge from the lower worlds. The other two colors are less clearly identified in the sources, they may have been a kind of greenish blue and a kind of yellow gold, in some interpretations; the medieval Icelandic poets do not seem to have agreed exactly on what the rainbow's other bands were. But the fire was important. The bridge, the sources insist, was not just beautiful.
It was a defense. The red band of fire was meant to burn anyone who attempted, in the slow age of the worlds, to march on Ásgarðr from below. There was a guardian of the bridge. His name was Heimdallr. We will hear far more of him in later episodes, because Heimdallr is one of the strangest and most interesting of the Norse gods.
For tonight, only this: he stood at the upper end of Bifrǫst, where the rainbow met the high walls of Ásgarðr, and he kept watch. He had, the sources tell us, extraordinary senses. He could hear, the Prose Edda says, the grass growing in the fields. He could hear the wool growing on a sheep's back. He could see for hundreds of miles in any direction, by day or by night.
He needed no more sleep than a bird. He stood at his post, and he watched, and he watched, and he watched. He watched, in particular, for the day when the giants would come. The day was prophesied. The day was, in some sense, certain.
Heimdallr did not know when, exactly, even the gods, as we have said, did not know what the Norns knew, but he knew that one day, in the long fullness of time, the giants of Jǫtunheimr would rise. They would march toward Ásgarðr. They would attempt to cross Bifrǫst. And the bridge, the sources tell us, would not hold. This is one of the most striking images in the entire Norse tradition.
The bridge, the great burning road between worlds, was always meant to fail. It was never meant to last forever. It had been built to be beautiful, and to be defended, and to be, in the very end, broken under the weight of the armies who would come riding across it. The Norse poets seemed to find this neither tragic nor hopeful. It was simply how the cosmos was made.
Some things hold for a long time, and then they do not. Even the rainbow. When Heimdallr saw the giants coming, the sources tell us, he would blow his horn. The horn had a name. It was called Gjallarhorn, which means, roughly, the Yelling Horn, or the Loud Horn.
He carried it at his belt. He had carried it for a very long time. He had never yet blown it. But he would, one day. And the sound of it would be so loud, the sources say, that it would be heard in every one of the nine worlds at once.
That sound, that long single blast, would be the beginning of the end. The Norse called the ending Ragnarǫk, the Fate of the Gods. We will tell that story properly in the last episode of this season. For tonight, only that the sound was waiting. The horn was at the watchman's hip.
The bridge was still standing, burning at its midpoint, swaying in the wind between worlds. I would like to leave the picture there, before we move on to a chapter of reflection. The bridge. The three colors. The fire in the middle band.
The watchman at his post, on the high end, with his horn ready. The world of men below, going about its business, none of the men or women below ever quite realizing that the colors they sometimes saw in the wet sky were the same colors that had been there since the world began, holding the gods and the mortals apart and connected at once. In some translations of the Vǫluspá, in the very last age of the world, the bridge is described breaking. Not in dramatic detail. Just a line.
The bridge of the gods, the wise woman says, will fall. And after that, very quickly, everything else will fall too. But for now, for now, in this chapter, in this episode, the bridge is still there. The watchman is still watching. The wind is still moving across the high arch of color.
Nothing has yet given way. The picture is nearly complete. There is one more chapter of reflection, and then a quiet closing. We are almost to the end of tonight. Sleep, if you can.
The bridge will hold for a long time yet.
Part 12
Chapter Eleven. A Quiet Reflection on the Edda. I would like, in this chapter, to step back from the story. We have spent most of tonight inside the Norse cosmos, in the void, in the meeting of fire and frost, in the body of Ymir, in the slow construction of the world, in the high branches and deep roots of Yggdrasill, in the nine worlds named, in the three wells of fate, in the rainbow of Bifrǫst. We have moved, more or less, through the whole shape of the Norse imagination as it relates to the structure of things.
What I want to do now, before we say goodnight, is acknowledge something. The Norse cosmos that I have described tonight is, in some sense, my construction. And also Snorri Sturluson's construction. And also the unknown thirteenth century scribe's construction, who first wrote down the Poetic Edda. And also the construction of the long lost generations of poets who memorized the stories in the centuries before that scribe ever lifted his pen.
What I mean is: the Norse cosmos as we now have it has passed through many hands. Most of what we know comes, as I have said before, from two books. The Prose Edda was written by Snorri Sturluson, a man we know more about, by accident, than we know about almost any other figure in this story. Snorri lived from roughly 1179 to 1241, in Iceland. He was a wealthy chieftain.
He was a politician. He was, in the very last years of his life, assassinated. The order came from the king of Norway, who had declared him a traitor for leaving the royal court without permission. The killing was carried out by men sent by Gizurr Þorvaldsson, an Icelandic chieftain who had once been Snorri's son in law, and who had since turned against him. They came in the night, on the twenty third of September, twelve hundred and forty one, to Snorri's house at Reykholt.
Snorri heard them at the door. He fled, the chronicler tells us, down into his cellar. Five men followed him. His last words, the same chronicler records, were Eigi skal höggva, Do not strike. The man with the axe struck.
He was also a Christian. The Iceland in which he lived had officially converted from the old gods to Christianity in the year 1000, more than a century and a half before he picked up his pen to write the Edda. By Snorri's day, the old religion was no longer practiced. The Norse gods were no longer worshipped. The stories were still told, in farms and in halls, but more as inheritance than as belief.
Snorri wrote his Edda not because he believed in Odin or Thor, but because he wanted to preserve, for young Icelandic poets, the technical vocabulary of the old kennings, the elaborate metaphorical phrases that had been the bread and butter of Old Norse poetry for centuries. To use those metaphors, a young poet had to know who Odin was, and what he was famous for, and what kinds of phrases were associated with him. Snorri wrote the Edda as a manual. That is, in some ways, the strangest fact about Norse mythology as we now know it. The most important single source we have for it was written by a Christian, as a poetry textbook, two centuries after the religion had died.
The Poetic Edda is, I should say, older, most of the poems in it appear to date from earlier, perhaps from as early as the ninth or tenth century, when the old religion was still being practiced. But we have those poems only in a single manuscript, the Codex Regius, which was copied down around 1270 by a scribe whose name we do not know. The manuscript was lost, for a while, after being copied. It was rediscovered, in 1643, by an Icelandic bishop named Brynjólfur Sveinsson, who found it in the personal collection of a country farmer who had it kept among other old papers in a chest. It was given, eventually, to the king of Denmark, and then, after centuries in Copenhagen, and after a long legal dispute that was finally settled by the Danish Supreme Court in March 1971, it was returned to Iceland.
It came home on the twenty first of April, 1971, aboard a Danish naval vessel called the Vædderen. A crowd gathered at the harbor in Reykjavík to meet the ship. The manuscript came down the gangplank, in its small protective case, after more than three centuries away. So our knowledge of Norse mythology depends, in a real way, on a few accidents of preservation. On a Christian writing in the thirteenth century.
On an unknown scribe also writing in the thirteenth century. On a single farmer's chest, in seventeenth century Iceland, which happened not to burn. On a Danish ship, in 1971, which crossed the North Atlantic in spring weather without incident. I find this remarkable, and a little humbling. We talk about Norse mythology as though it were a tradition we have inherited intact.
But what we have is a fragment. A handful of poems. A textbook by a Christian. A few names whose meanings we still argue about. Most of what was once known about these gods is gone.
The longhouses in which the stories were first told are gone. The poets who first composed the kennings are gone. Even the runic memorials, scattered across Scandinavia, are mostly silent on cosmology, they tend to record names and short events, not stories. What we do have, we have because someone cared enough to write it down. I think about that, sometimes, when I sit with the old material.
I think about how easy it would have been for all of it to vanish. How thin the chain of preservation is. How many ancient mythologies, peoples, languages, ways of understanding the world, have not, in fact, been preserved at all. The Norse story survives because of accidents. The Mayan creation story survives partly because of accidents.
The Sumerian creation story survives partly because of accidents. Every old mythology we still have is, in some sense, a piece of luck. I do not want to make this a sermon. But I do want, before we close this episode, to mark gratitude. Gratitude that someone, in the thirteenth century, in Iceland, took the trouble to copy down the Vǫluspá.
Gratitude that the farmer, in the seventeenth century, did not throw out the chest. Gratitude that the airplane, in 1971, did not crash. Gratitude that the language survived. Gratitude that the names, Yggdrasill, Bifrǫst, Urðarbrunnr, still mean something, to anyone, in the year you are now listening to this. The stories are an inheritance.
They are not a perfect inheritance, they are partial, contested, sometimes contradictory. But they are an inheritance, and they have come through a long dark hallway of centuries to arrive in your room tonight, in whatever form they are arriving, in this voice, on this recording, drifting through the soft late night air toward where you are lying. Sleep, if you can. The chapter is almost done.
Part 13
Chapter Twelve. Goodnight, and the Beginning. We have come, then, to the close. I would like to return, at the very end, to where we began. To the cold northern shore.
To the fjords and the high empty wind and the longhouses with their small warm windows lit against the dark. To the people, eleven hundred years ago, who imagined all of this, who first sat in their halls on long winter nights and told one another, in slow careful voice, about a void, about a giant, about a tree, about the nine worlds hung in its branches. It has been a long episode. You have been very patient. We have walked, tonight, through the beginning.
We have seen the void. We have seen the meeting of fire and frost. We have seen Ymir, the first being, fed by the cow Auðumbla in the great quiet. We have seen the three brothers, Odin, Vili, Vé, and the slaying that made the world. We have walked through the parts of the body that became the parts of the world.
We have stood at the trunk of Yggdrasill, where the squirrel runs up and down. We have named the nine worlds, and gone down to the three wells beneath them, and stood for a moment in the burning light of the bridge. It is, in the Norse imagination, the picture of everything that is. A great tree. Nine worlds hanging in it.
A burning bridge. Three wells of fate beneath the roots. A wind that has been moving since before the gods. In two days' time, on Wednesday at eight in the evening Eastern, the next episode will appear in your feed. It is called Odin's Search for Wisdom.
We will follow the All Father, the highest of the gods, the wanderer, the giver of his own eye, through the long strange journey by which he came to know what the Norns knew. It is a darker story than tonight's. It has more action. But it is paced, as all the episodes will be paced, for sleep. For now, however, you are here.
In this room. In this night. With whatever else you carry into bed with you tonight, the worries, the small unresolved things, the day that has just ended. The almanac would like to offer, if it can, a small companionship. We have walked, tonight, through the entire shape of the Norse cosmos.
We have visited the void. We have seen the world made. We have learned where the rivers come from, and what the dwarves are doing at the corners of the sky, and where the gods walk on rainy afternoons. You can let all of it go now. The story has been told.
The picture is complete. There is nothing left to follow. Close your eyes, if they are not already closed. Let your shoulders settle. The wind, in the old poetry, is still moving, across the great tree, across the new earth, across the dome of the sky held up by four patient dwarves.
It is moving now in the room around you, too. It has always been moving. It will go on moving long after this recording ends. Until next time. Sleep well.
Odin's Search for Wisdom
One small note before the quiet. The voice telling these stories is an AI clone of my own voice, made from recordings of me. Sleep well.
Odin's Search for Wisdom
Good evening. Or perhaps good night, if you've made your way here in the small hours, the difference may already have stopped mattering. You've come back, perhaps, because the first episode helped you sleep. Or you've come for the first time, and the second episode happened to be the one that found you. Either is fine.
Tonight stands on its own. We will not require you to remember anything from before. If you are listening in bed, I'd ask you to do very little. Close your eyes. Let your jaw soften.
Let your shoulders drop, even a little, even if you didn't know they were tight. The story does not need your attention. It will keep moving whether you follow it or not. If you drift, that is the point. If you wake briefly to catch a single sentence and then sink again, that is good.
The almanac is patient. Last episode, we set the stage. Nine worlds. A great tree at the center of everything. Roots that reach down into the dark places, and branches that vanish into the stars.
Tonight, we meet the figure at the heart of it all. The wanderer. The one eyed god. The Allfather. The hanged god, who gave himself to himself, on a tree, in the wind, for nine nights, in pursuit of something he could not get any other way.
This is the story of Odin. And of what a god is willing to give, when what he wants is wisdom. Now, let us begin.
Part 16
Chapter One. The God Who Could Not Be Still. Before we go to the well, and before we go to the tree, we should first sit, for a while, with the figure of the god himself. Because Odin is not what most people now think of when they think of a chief god. If you've grown up with the Greek and Roman tradition, you may picture a great seated figure, Zeus on Olympus, Jupiter in his temple, a king god, settled, established, presiding over a stable cosmos.
A god who does not need to leave his throne, because the world comes to him. Odin is not that. Odin is a god who cannot be still. He has a throne, we'll come to it in a few chapters, and from it, the medieval Icelander Snorri Sturluson tells us, he can see across the nine worlds. He has a hall, called Valhǫll, where the slain warriors gather.
He has wives, sons, beasts that follow him. He has every reason, if he wanted, to sit and rule. But the surviving stories almost never find him sitting. They find him walking. They find him on the road, in a wide brimmed hat pulled low over his face, leaning on a staff.
They find him in disguise at the courts of kings. They find him in the wilderness, between worlds, on the back of a strange horse with eight legs. They find him asking riddles of a giant whose name no one else has dared to learn. They find him hanging from a tree in a wind that does not stop. The old stories almost never let him rest.
And the reason, or one reason, the reason the surviving sources keep coming back to, is that Odin is hungry. He is hungry for one specific thing. He is hungry for wisdom. Now, hold that word lightly for a moment. The old Norse poets did not mean by it quite what we now mean.
They did not mean book learning, or cleverness, or the kind of wisdom one ascribes to a quiet old man on a porch. The word the poets used, the word that appears, again and again, when the sources describe what Odin is reaching for, is closer to knowledge of hidden things. Frœði. Visdómr. The kind of knowledge that is kept under stones.
Under roots. Under the surface of dark water. The kind of knowledge that has to be paid for. That is what Odin pursues. You will hear, in many of his stories, the same arc, repeating.
Odin discovers that someone, somewhere, knows something he does not. The someone is usually old. Usually a giant. Usually living far from Asgard, at the edge of the world, in a place no other god wants to go. And Odin goes.
Often alone. Often in disguise. He pays, sometimes in his body, sometimes in his form, sometimes in something more precious than either. And he comes back changed. This is the shape of the god you should hold in your mind tonight.
A king god who refuses to behave like a king. A god who would rather walk than sit. A god who is willing, again and again, to give up something he already has, because he cannot bear the thought of not knowing the thing he doesn't have. In one reading of the Eddas, and this is the reading the great twentieth century mythographer Mircea Eliade favored, Odin is not properly a king god at all. He is a god of a much older type.
A god of the seekers. A god of the shamans. A figure whose nearest cousins are not Zeus and Jupiter but the spirit walkers of the Sámi north and the great hunter gods of Siberia. A god who travels not by chariot but by trance. A god whose throne is not a seat of authority but a vantage point, used the way an old hunter uses a high rock to see what is moving on the plain.
That reading is not the only reading. Other scholars, Georges Dumézil among them, placed Odin firmly within an Indo European tradition of sovereign gods, the kind one finds across many cultures. There is no need, tonight, to settle the question. The texts allow both readings, and the truth is probably that Odin contained both, that he was, by the time the surviving sources were written, already a layered figure, with the older shaman god still visible beneath the newer king god. You don't need to choose.
You only need to know, as we begin, that the god we are following tonight is not the kind of god who waits for you to come to him. He goes. And in this episode, we will follow him on the two journeys for which he is best remembered. The journey to a well, at the foot of the great tree, where the giant Mímir keeps watch over a water that holds something Odin needs more than he needs his own eye. And the journey, longer and stranger, that took him up into the branches of that same tree, where he hung for nine nights, in the dark and the wind, given to himself, with the point of his own spear in his side, until something rose out of the depths to meet him.
These are the two great sacrifices of Odin. The eye. And the body on the tree. The two payments he made, in the surviving stories, for the kind of knowledge he could not get any other way. We will come to both, slowly.
But first, before the well, before the tree, we should learn the rest of who he is. We should walk with him for a little while. We should learn the company he keeps, the gear he carries, the throne he uses on those rare occasions when he does sit. We should learn his names. He has many names.
Part 17
Chapter Two. The Many Names of the Allfather. In one of the strangest passages of the Poetic Edda, a poem called Grímnismál, the Sayings of the Masked One, Odin is sitting between two fires, bound by a king who does not yet realize who his prisoner is. And in this position, in the long terrible heat of the fires, the god begins to speak. And one of the things he speaks is his own list of names.
He gives them slowly, in long lines of old Norse verse. He gives them in clusters. He gives them like a man who is trying to make a young king understand, before he runs out of time, that he is in the presence of someone much older than he had imagined. The names go on for stanzas. I will not give you all of them tonight.
The list, if you count every variant in every source, Grímnismál, the longer prose tradition of Snorri's Skáldskaparmál, the scattered references in skaldic poetry, runs to well over a hundred. Some scholars put the figure closer to two hundred. We do not need that many. But we should sit, for a little while, with a few of them. Because the names of Odin are not, in the way modern names are, just labels.
Each one is a small description. Each one tells you what kind of god he is in the moment that name is used. Some of them are quiet. Some are unsettling. Some sound, even at a thousand years' distance, like the names of figures who would not necessarily wish you well.
The most familiar to modern ears is Allfather. Alfǫðr. The father of all. It is the name Snorri uses most often in the Prose Edda, and it carries the king god weight of the Christian period in which Snorri was writing. It is also a name Odin uses of himself.
It is a true name. But it is not, I think, the truest one. Consider, beside it, the name Yggr. The Terrible One. The Awful One.
The one who makes you afraid. From this name comes the name of the great tree itself, Yggdrasill, which in Old Norse means Yggr's horse. Odin's horse. And the horse, here, is not a horse. The horse, here, is the gallows.
Because in the old Norse poetic tradition, a hanged man was said to be riding the gallows tree, the way one rides a horse. To call the tree Yggr's horse is to name it as the gallows on which Odin once hung. So the great tree at the center of the world, the one we spent so much of last episode describing, it carries Odin's name in its own. And the name it carries is not the comforting Allfather. It is the unsettling Yggr.
The Terrible One. The hanged one's gallows. Consider, beside that, the name Bölverkr. Evil Doer. Worker of Bale.
This is the name Odin uses when he goes, in disguise, to steal the mead of poetry from a giant, a story we will arrive at later in the season. He gives himself the name Evil Doer the way a thief gives himself a false name in a tavern. He does not, in that moment, deny that what he is doing is theft. He simply does it. Consider Grímnir.
The Masked One. The Hooded One. The traveler in the wide hat with his face turned away. The figure on the road who does not wish to be recognized. Consider Hangatýr.
The God of the Hanged. The one to whom hanged men were said to belong. The Roman writer Tacitus, looking at the Germanic peoples a thousand years before Snorri, wrote that they sacrificed men to a god he called Mercury, and many scholars believe Tacitus's Mercury is, at least in part, an early form of Odin. The sacrifices were sometimes made by hanging. Consider Vegtam.
Way Tame. The One Used to the Road. The wanderer. Consider Síðhǫttr. Long Hat.
Wide Brim. A name not a man would normally use, but a description that became a name. The hat pulled low over the face. The half shadow over the missing eye. Consider Gangleri.
Walk Weary. Wandering Tired. The one whose feet are sore. Do you hear what these are doing? They are not titles.
They are not royal honorifics. They are descriptions of a god who travels, who hides his face, who is known to the dead, who lies when it is useful, who is tired, who is feared. They are descriptions of a god you might not, if you met him on a road at dusk, immediately want to invite home. In one reading of the Eddas, the proliferation of Odin's names is itself part of the point. Odin is a god who refuses to be one thing.
He is the figure who appears in many forms, in many places, at many moments, and the names are the way the old poets kept track of him. Here he is the wanderer. Here he is the hanged one. Here he is the masked one in the king's hall. Here he is the wise one in the giant's cave.
Here he is the terrible one. This is not, I think, a god who is easy to love. The Norse sources do not present him that way. They present him as a god you respect, and one you fear, and one you are careful around. The skaldic poets sometimes addressed him with a kind of nervous formality, the way one addresses a powerful patron who is also unpredictable.
And yet. He is also the god who, in his hunger to know hidden things, is willing to suffer. He is the god who gave his eye. He is the god who hung on the tree. These are not the acts of a comfortable king.
These are the acts of a seeker who has decided, somewhere in the long dark of his own beginning, that knowledge is worth more than comfort, more than wholeness, more than the body's safety. So the names matter. They are how we know what kind of seeker he is. He is the masked one. The hooded one.
The wanderer. The hanged one. The terrible one. The all father. The evil doer.
The way weary. The god of the gallows. He is, by his own count, given to a young king who did not know he was speaking to a god, many. Tonight, we are going to follow one of him. The seeker.
The one who gave up his eye, and the one who gave up his body, in the pursuit of something the rest of the gods did not even know how to ask for. But first, let us meet the company he keeps. He has, in the surviving stories, three sets of companions. Two ravens. Two wolves.
And one horse, with eight legs, which we will come to in its own chapter. We will start with the ravens.
Part 18
Chapter Three. Thought and Memory, the Two Ravens. Each morning, in the surviving Norse tradition, two ravens leave Odin's shoulders. They are large birds. Black, of course.
The poets do not bother to describe their appearance in any detail, the audience already knew what a raven looked like, and the audience already knew, in particular, what a raven looked like at dawn, lifting from a high place and turning into the wind. The Norse poets are spare in this way. They tell you what matters, and they assume the rest. What matters is the names. The first raven is called Huginn.
The name comes from the Old Norse word hugr, which is usually translated thought, but which carries a fuller meaning than the English word can hold. Hugr is mind, intent, attention, the directed force of a person's interest. It is what you are doing, in your head, right now, even as you let your eyes close, the gentle drifting that is still, just barely, the work of attention. The second is called Muninn. From munr, which is usually translated memory, but which also means desire, longing, the things one holds in oneself across time.
Munr is what you carry. The unsent letter. The face of someone you have not seen in years. The smell of the kitchen of the house you grew up in. The thing you cannot quite stop turning over.
Munr is the part of memory that is alive. Thought, and memory. This is what Odin sends out, each morning, to bring him news of the world. The ravens fly out across the nine realms. They go over fjords and forests and battlefields.
They go down into the deep places. They go to the houses of men, and to the halls of giants, and to the borders of the underworld. They see what is happening. They listen. They watch.
And in the evening, they come back, and they land on Odin's shoulders, and they tell him, in low voices that only he can hear, what they have seen. This is the image. A god sitting on a high place at evening, with two black birds whispering into his ears, the world being delivered to him in fragments, hour by hour, from every horizon. It is one of the most beautiful images in Norse mythology. It is also one of the more melancholy.
Because in the Poetic Edda, in Grímnismál, Odin himself describes the arrangement. And then he adds a line. A line that is, when you stop to consider it, almost startling. Hugin and Munin fly each day over the wide world, he says. I fear for Hugin, that he may not return.
But more anxious am I for Munin. I fear for Hugin, that he may not return. But more anxious am I for Munin. Read it twice. The god, the king of the gods, the figure of greatest power in his pantheon, admits that he is afraid.
He admits that each morning, when his thought and his memory leave him, he does not know with certainty that they will come back. And he admits that of the two, it is memory that worries him more. Now, scholars have spent a great deal of time on this line, and there is no single agreed reading. Some take it literally, that Odin fears his ravens, who are after all only birds, may meet an accident in the wide world. Others read it as a meditation on what it means to be a god of wisdom, that even Odin, with all his power, cannot guarantee that thought and memory will continue to serve him.
Others read it as a foreshadowing, that Odin is a god who, in the long view, is fated to lose everything, including, perhaps, the contents of his own mind. Others read it as a moment of vulnerability that the poet allowed the god, deliberately, to humanize him, to make the listener feel, even at a great distance, that the Allfather himself was not free of the worry every old person eventually carries, that one's mind will not, at the end, be reliable. You can hold whichever reading you prefer. The Norse poets, more often than the Greek, leave room for the listener to settle into the line themselves. What is consistent, across readings, is the structure of what the ravens represent.
Odin does not know the world directly. He is too big, in some sense, to know it directly. He is the Allfather. He sits in the high place. His sight is broad, but it is broad in the way a mountain's view is broad, it sees everything, and so it sees no one thing closely.
To know the world closely, he sends out birds. The birds are smaller. The birds can land on a windowsill. The birds can hear what is said in a kitchen. The birds can listen to a king's whisper to his queen, or to a farmer's complaint, or to the secret of a giant's grief.
And the birds can come back, in the evening, and place what they have heard at Odin's ear. In one reading of the Eddas, and this reading I find quietly compelling, the ravens are not separate creatures at all. They are extensions of Odin himself. They are his thought, sent out. They are his memory, sent out.
The god does not have two ravens because he needs spies. The god has two ravens because that is how a being of his kind goes looking. He casts pieces of his own mind into the wind, and waits for them to come back. It is not so different, though I offer this only as a suggestion, from what your own mind is doing, on a long quiet evening, when you let yourself drift back over the day. Pieces of your attention go out.
They return with what they found. You sift through what they bring you, and you decide what to keep, and what to release before sleep. You are, in this small way, doing what Odin was said to do. You are sending out Thought. You are sending out Memory.
You are letting them go to the corners of the day, and you are waiting for them to come back. When they do, when the last of the day's images have been turned over and set down, you sleep. The ravens, in the old stories, did the same. They flew. They returned.
The god received them. And the day, in Asgard, ended. Now, we have spoken of the ravens. Let us turn to the wolves.
Part 19
Chapter Four. The Wolves at His Throne. Odin keeps wolves. This may surprise you, depending on what associations the word wolf now carries for you. In the modern imagination, wolves and chief gods do not often go together.
Wolves, in many later traditions, Christian, Roman, fairy tale, are figures of menace. The wolf at the door. The wolf in the fold. The wolf who eats grandmothers. By the time of the European Middle Ages, the wolf had become, in much of the surviving folklore, something close to a villain.
The Norse, by contrast, lived with wolves. They knew them. They feared them, yes, they hunted them, yes, but they also recognized in the wolf a kind of dignity. A great hunter. A creature of the long winter.
A creature that, in its way, deserved the respect that one beast of the cold gives another. And so Odin has wolves. The first is called Geri. The name means, simply, the greedy one. Ravenous.
The one who is hungry. The Old Norse word gerr carries the suggestion of a creature whose hunger is constant, not desperate, not starving, but simply present, the way breathing is present. The second is called Freki. The name also means, more or less, the greedy one. Another word for hunger.
The Old Norse poets liked these doubled names, pairs whose meaning rhymes. Huginn and Muninn. Geri and Freki. The two birds of the mind. The two beasts of the appetite.
The pattern is intentional. So at Odin's throne, on either side of him, there are two beasts of hunger. And here, the Eddas tell us something quite striking. In Grímnismál, the same poem in which Odin gives his many names, there is a small stanza that describes what the god does with his food. The gods, of course, feast in Valhǫll.
The slain warriors, in the old vision of the afterlife, feast with them. There is meat, and there is mead, and the tables are long. But Odin himself, the Allfather, the king god, eats nothing. The stanza tells us: the food set before him, he gives to Geri and Freki. The Old Norse phrase is precise.
Geri ok Freki seðr Herjafǫðr, Geri and Freki, the father of armies sates them. The food is for the wolves. The god himself, the stanza adds, lives on wine alone. On mead. On the drink, not the meat.
This image is worth sitting with. The god of war, the god of the slain, the god who is said to gather the heroic dead into his hall after every battle, that god does not eat the meat of the feast. He passes it down. He feeds his wolves. He drinks the wine.
There are several readings. One reading is ritual: that the poet, in describing Odin this way, was making him fit the pattern of certain initiated men and certain magicians in the historical record, figures who, in the surviving accounts, were said to fast from solid food during periods of trance or vision. To live on drink alone, in the old Norse imagination, was already to be moving toward the kind of state where wisdom became possible. A man who ate normally was a man with his feet on the ground. A man who lived on wine was a man whose feet were already, slightly, off it.
A second reading is symbolic: that the wolves are Odin's hunger. That, in giving his food to them, he is acknowledging that the hunger he experiences is not, in fact, for meat. It is for something else. The hunger has been transferred. The hunger has been embodied, in two beasts, who can be fed in his place.
The god himself can then turn his attention to the harder thing, to the hunger that the wolves cannot eat for him. A third reading is poetic: that the Norse poets simply liked the picture. A great hall. A long table. A king god at its head.
Two black wolves at his feet, eating what he passes down. A horn of mead at his hand. The hunger of warriors all around him, satisfied. And the god himself, the only being in the hall whose hunger is not satisfied, and who, somehow, has been at peace with that hunger for as long as anyone can remember. You can choose your reading.
They are not exclusive. What I want you to carry away, for the rest of this episode, is the shape of the image. Because we are going to come back to it, in different forms, again and again. Odin is a god of withheld appetite. He is a god who does not let his own hunger be satisfied in the normal way.
He gives the meal to the wolves. He gives his eye to the well. He gives his body to the tree. Each act, in its way, is the same act. Each one is the god refusing to take what is offered, in order to reach for something further out.
In one reading of the Eddas, this is again the kind of reading Eliade favored, Odin is the patron god of every figure in human culture who has ever traded comfort for vision. The seeker. The mystic. The poet who could have lived an easier life, but who chose the harder one because the easier one would not have given him what he wanted. Odin is the divine face of the choice, repeated, in human form, across cultures, to refuse the meat in front of you because you sense, somewhere, that there is something further you have not yet reached.
That is the god we are following tonight. He has thought. He has memory. He has hunger, given to two wolves so that he can be free of it. And he has, at his side, two pieces of gear that the poets gave him by name.
A spear. A ring. We will turn to those now.
Part 20
Chapter Five. The Spear and the Ring. Every god, in every pantheon, has objects. Zeus has his thunderbolt. Thor, we will come to him next episode, has a hammer.
Poseidon has his trident. Hermes has his winged sandals. The objects are not, in the surviving traditions, accidental. The objects are part of the god. They tell you what kind of god you are looking at.
They are, in a sense, the god's body extended out into the world, the hammer is part of Thor, the way Thor's beard is part of Thor. Odin has two such objects. The first is a spear, called Gungnir. The second is a ring, called Draupnir. We will begin with the spear.
Gungnir, in the Norse tradition, was made by the dwarves of Svartalfheim. We met that realm last episode, briefly, the great underground city of forges, where the most skilled metalworkers of the nine worlds lived. The name Gungnir comes from a verb meaning to sway, to tremble. The spear that trembles. Some scholars read this as a reference to the haft's quiver in flight, a well thrown spear is a thing that hums in the air.
Others read it as a kind of magical attribute, that the spear, when not in use, shivers slightly at Odin's side, the way a hunting dog shivers when it senses game. The defining property of Gungnir, in the surviving sources, is simple: it never misses. Whatever Odin throws it at, it strikes. Whatever Odin aims at, even in the dark, even at a great distance, even with one eye, the spear goes there. This is a small but consequential detail.
Because in the Norse worldview, the throwing of a spear was not merely a military act. It was, at certain moments, a sacred one. To throw a spear over an army before battle, the spear of Odin over you, was to dedicate that army's enemies to the god. The throw was the marking. The throw was the giving.
Whichever side received the spear's flight was, in some sense, already promised to Odin. So Gungnir is not only a weapon. It is a marker. A spear that always finds its target is a god's way of saying: this one is mine. I have chosen.
We will see this spear again, later in the episode, in a different and more troubling context. Because the spear that always finds its target, when Odin himself hangs from the tree, in the great sacrifice we are circling toward, pierces the god's own side. Geiri undaðr, the Hávamál says. Wounded by a spear. And though the text does not specify which spear, the long tradition of reading has assumed it was his own.
The spear that always finds its target finds, on Yggdrasill, the god who throws it. But we are getting ahead of ourselves. Hold the spear for now. Set it down. We will come back to it.
The second object is Draupnir. Draupnir is a ring. Specifically, it is a great gold arm ring, the kind of object a chieftain would wear on his upper arm, the kind that signified, in the old Norse world, both wealth and the obligation to give wealth away. A ring giver was a leader. A king.
A man whose hands were open. The chieftains in the surviving sagas are praised, often, for the freedom with which they distributed their gold. Draupnir is the perfect ring for such a giver. Because of all its qualities, the one the poets emphasize is this: every ninth night, from Draupnir, eight identical gold rings drip. The name itself means the dripper.
The Prose Edda is precise on this, eight new rings of the same weight as the original, on every ninth night, without interruption. The wealth, in the surviving picture, is the kind that flows so steadily a king could give and give from it, and never empty his hoard. In the surviving stories, Draupnir was made by the dwarven brothers Sindri and Brokkr. They made it as part of a larger contest, a strange episode, which we will come to in a later season, in which Loki bet his own head that the brothers could not make objects finer than those another set of dwarves had made. The brothers, working at their forge, made three things: Draupnir, the ring; Gullinbursti, a golden boar that ran through the air faster than any horse; and Mjǫllnir, the hammer of Thor, which we will discuss at length next episode.
The objects were judged. The brothers were declared the winners. Loki, by sleight of language, escaped the loss of his head, but Draupnir, by then, was already in Odin's keeping. The ring tells you something about the god. Odin is a giver.
Odin keeps a hall, in which he gives. Odin's followers, in the surviving sagas, are themselves often described as ring givers, chieftains who hold open hands, the way Odin does, modeling themselves on him. The ring is not just an ornament. It is a description of how the god wishes to be in the world. The god of withheld appetite is also, in his way, the god who cannot stop giving the wealth of his arm away.
Both can be true at once. Now hold these together. The spear. The ring. Both gifts from the dwarves.
Both with magical properties. Both descriptive, the spear says I always find what I choose, the ring says what I have I give. Together they describe a god who decides, and a god who gives. A god who is willing to mark a man for death with a thrown spear, and a god who is also willing, in the next moment, to lay a ring of gold on the table for whichever follower has earned it. It is not a tidy combination.
Norse gods rarely are. We have, then: thought, memory, hunger, the spear, the ring, the throne. We have the god's company and the god's gear. We have the names. We have the shape of who he is.
Now, at last, we can begin to walk with him toward the journey for which he is most remembered. The journey to the well of Mímir.
Part 21
Chapter Six. The Well Beneath the World. We must, for this chapter, return to the great tree. Last episode, we walked all the way around Yggdrasill. We described it from a distance, the way the old Norse poets did, its three roots reaching down into different realms, its branches lost among stars, the eagle at its crown, the squirrel running its length, the four stags eating its leaves, the serpent gnawing at its base.
We described it as a structure. As the architecture of the cosmos. Tonight, we return to it for a smaller purpose. We are going to go to one of its roots, and we are going to look at what is kept there. There is, depending on which source you trust, some disagreement about exactly how many wells lay beneath Yggdrasill, and which root led to which.
Snorri Sturluson, writing the Prose Edda in the early thirteenth century, names three. The Poetic Edda mentions wells without always specifying which is which. The names overlap. The traditions have, by the time they reach us, been folded together by centuries of telling and re telling. What is consistent is this.
Beneath at least one of Yggdrasill's three great roots, there is a well of water. And the well is not ordinary water. The well holds, depending on which source you read, wisdom. Memory. The deep knowledge of how the world is and how it is going.
The water of that well is something older than the gods. Something the tree itself drinks from. The well we are going to tonight is called the well of Mímir. Mímisbrunnr. Mímir's spring.
It sits beneath the root of Yggdrasill that reaches into the realm of the frost giants, the place last episode we called Jotunheim. So Odin, to reach it, must leave Asgard. Must cross the bridge. Must travel down the long cold reach of one of the world's three great taproots. This already tells us something.
The wisdom that Odin wants is not stored in Asgard. The wisdom is kept in the giants' country. The giants, the older powers, the beings who came before the gods, the children of Ymir's children, hold what Odin needs. He must leave home to find it. The keeper of the well is called Mímir.
We do not, in the surviving sources, know much about him. He is, by general agreement, a being from before the named gods, but the Norse sources do not agree on which side of the divine families he belonged to. The Ynglinga saga places him among the Æsir, and tells us he was sent, after a war between the Æsir and the other divine family, the Vanir, as a hostage, and was eventually beheaded, and his head preserved by Odin for counsel. Other sources place him simply among the jötnar, the giant kind, of an unusually wise sort. Either way, he is older than most of the named gods, and his wisdom is the kind that pre dates them.
His name, in Old Norse, is related to the verbs minna, to remember, to bring to mind, and minni, memory. He is, in his name itself, the rememberer. The one who keeps. The one who does not let things be lost. Before we go to what Mímir keeps, we should spend a small moment with what Mímir was.
Because the figure who sits at the well is not, in the surviving sources, simply a quiet old keeper who has always been there. He has a history. And the history, briefly told, helps us understand why the well is where it is, and why the keeper is the one chosen to keep it. The story comes to us, in its fullest form, from Snorri Sturluson, writing in the early thirteenth century, and from a shorter account in the Ynglinga saga, attributed to Snorri or to his school, depending on which scholar you read. The two sources, taken together, give us this.
There was, in the older days of the gods, a war. Not the great battle at the end of time, that war is still to come, and we will arrive at it in its season. This was an earlier war. A war between two families of divine beings. On one side, the Æsir, the family to which Odin belongs, the family that lives in Asgard, the family whose names we have been learning.
On the other side, the Vanir, an older family, gods of a different kind, associated with fertility, with the sea, with the slow patient work of growing things. The Vanir lived in their own world, called Vanaheim. They had their own ways. They were, in the surviving sources, not lesser than the Æsir, only different. And for reasons the sources do not entirely explain, the two families went to war.
The war, the sources tell us, was long and went badly for both sides. Neither family could entirely defeat the other. And eventually, in the way such wars sometimes end, the two families made peace. The terms of the peace were these. Each side would send to the other two of its most valued members, to live among the foreign family, and to serve, in effect, as both ambassador and hostage.
The Vanir sent Njǫrðr, the sea god, the older one, and his children Freyr and Freyja, beautiful, generous, gods of fertility and of the harvest, to live among the Æsir. The Æsir, in return, sent two of their own. One of them was a god named Hœnir, tall and handsome and impressive in council. The other was Mímir. Mímir, the wise one, the rememberer, the keeper of memory.
The Æsir sent the wisest of their own number to live among the Vanir, in token of the seriousness of the peace. The peace did not, for Mímir, end well. What happened, in the surviving accounts, was that the Vanir came eventually to suspect they had been cheated. Hœnir, they discovered, was a fine speaker only when Mímir stood at his side, without Mímir, Hœnir gave only short answers, and seemed to depend on his companion for every important word. The Vanir, feeling deceived, did to Mímir what was, in the old usage, sometimes done to a hostage whose value had turned out to be different than promised.
They cut off his head. And they sent the head back, by some long road, to the Æsir. What Odin did when the head arrived is one of the strangest acts in all of Norse mythology. He did not bury it. He did not burn it.
He took the head, the sources tell us, and he treated it with herbs that would keep it from decaying, and he spoke charms over it, and he kept it by him. And the head, the head, continued to speak. Mímir, even severed from his body, continued to give counsel. The Allfather, in many of the later stories, is described as carrying his wisdom counselor's preserved head with him, consulting it in private, listening to it speak the way one listens to an oracle. This is the Mímir we meet at the well.
Or rather, and this is the point, this is the Mímir we meet, depending on which source you trust. Because in some of the Eddic poems, Mímir is alive at the well, sitting beside it, drinking from it every morning. In other sources, the well is associated with the head Odin keeps, the well is where the head was set, or where the head dwells, or where the head's wisdom is somehow gathered. The two traditions do not entirely line up. What is consistent, what every surviving source agrees on, is that Mímir, in whatever form he persisted, was the keeper.
The wisdom of the well was his. And when Odin came, in his disguise, down the long cold root of the tree, he came to a being who had himself paid a price for the knowledge he held. Mímir had given his body. The well had taken his head. Whatever was left of him sat, or floated, or rested, beside the still water, waiting for whichever god would be foolish enough to come asking for a drink.
And what does he keep? He keeps the well. The water of Mímir's spring, the sources tell us, contains the deep knowledge of the past, not the past as one might recall it casually, but the past as it really happened, in all its weight, with all its consequences visible. To drink from Mímir's well is to know the world the way Mímir knows it. To see, in any present moment, the full lineage of choices and counter choices that led to it.
To know, with certainty, what has been done. You can imagine, perhaps, what such knowledge would mean to a god whose central concern was wisdom. The Allfather, who already knows much, who already has thought and memory flying back to him each evening, who already sits on a high throne and surveys nine worlds, even he does not have this. The well holds something he cannot get any other way. And so he goes.
In one reading of the Eddas, and the sources here are spare, so a good deal must be inferred, Odin first travels to the well alone. He travels in his disguise, the wide hat, the dark cloak, the staff, the half shadow over his face. He walks the long road down the great cold root of the tree, and he comes, at last, to the place where Mímir keeps watch. The well, the surviving images suggest, is set in stone. The water is still.
Around it, perhaps, there are runes, though the sources do not specify. Mímir himself sits beside it, in some accounts; in others, he is somewhere nearby, perhaps within the great root itself, perhaps in a small stone seat at the water's edge. The atmosphere, in every account, is quiet. The well is not a place of crowds. The well is a place where one being keeps watch over a water that very few have been allowed to drink.
Odin asks for a drink. The sources do not give us, in any complete form, the conversation that follows. There is no preserved dialogue. There is no recorded back and forth. There is only the bare fact, which appears in Vǫluspá, the Seeress's Prophecy, one of the oldest surviving Eddic poems, and which is elaborated, briefly, by Snorri in the Prose Edda.
The fact is this. Mímir agreed. Odin was permitted to drink. But the drink was not free. The price was an eye.
We will go to that scene in the next chapter. We will sit with it for a while. We will look at it carefully, because it is one of the most consequential scenes in all of Norse mythology, and the surviving sources, sparse as they are, give us enough to look closely. For now, only hold the structure. A god, on a long road, in a disguise.
A keeper at a stone well. A water that holds the past. A price that has not yet been named. Outside, in whatever room you are listening from, the wind is doing what wind does. The night is doing what night does.
The almanac is moving slowly. We have time. We will go to the well now.
Part 22
Chapter Seven. The Eye in the Water. I want to slow down, here, for a moment. This is a scene that the surviving sources do not give us in detail, and I think that is on purpose. The Norse poets had a kind of restraint, in their most consequential moments, that is easy to miss if you read them quickly.
They did not, as the Greek poets sometimes did, linger on the visual. They did not describe the god's face. They did not describe the keeper's face. They did not give us the small psychological detail. They simply told us, in a few lines, what was done.
In Vǫluspá, the seeress is speaking. She is telling Odin himself, in a kind of summoned vision, what she knows of his own life. And she says, and this is a paraphrase, because I do not wish to be precise to the line, She says: I know where your eye is hidden, Yggr. It is in the deep well of Mímir. There Mímir drinks the mead, every morning, of Valfǫðr's pledge.
That is the line. That is, very nearly, all we are given. Odin's eye is in Mímir's well. Mímir drinks from it. Every morning.
The eye is the pledge. The eye is the price. The exchange has been made. Snorri, three centuries later, elaborates only slightly. He tells us, in Gylfaginning, that Odin came to the well and asked for a single drink.
Mímir would not grant it without payment. The payment was an eye. Odin gave it. The eye remained, after that, in the well, visible, in some accounts, to anyone who looked carefully into the water. That is the scene.
Let me sit with it for a moment. Because what the source does not give us is the small thing, the human thing, that I think we are meant to feel, even at a thousand years' distance. The god, standing at the well. The keeper, waiting. The naming of the price.
Now imagine, for a moment, what such a moment would actually contain. To give an eye is not, in any human or godly sense, a small matter. It is not a piece of clothing. It is not a coin. The eye is a part of the body that, once given, does not return.
There is no replacing it. There is no second eye, kept in reserve, that will grow back. The god who gives an eye gives it permanently. Whatever he sees afterward, he sees with one fewer aperture than he had before. And yet, and this is the central strangeness of the scene, Odin, in every surviving account, gives the eye without hesitation.
There is no recorded protest. There is no recorded bargaining. The keeper names the price, and the price is paid. You may be wondering, as you listen, whether there is any way to read this other than as a kind of madness. To give half of one's sight, permanently, for a single drink of water, even magical water, even water that holds the past, seems, by any ordinary measure, a wild exchange.
The god is taking the worst of the deal. He is giving what cannot be recovered, in exchange for what amounts, in the moment, to a swallow. And yet the surviving Norse tradition does not present it as madness. It presents it as the defining act of the god. There are, again, a few ways to read this.
One reading, the simplest, is that what the well gave was worth what the well asked. That the drink of Mímir's water was not, in fact, a single moment of vision. It was a permanent reorganization of how the god understood the world. The past, after the drink, was visible to Odin in a way it had not been before. Every present moment carried, for him, its full lineage.
He saw, in the face of every being, what had happened to bring that being to be there. He saw, in every battle, the long chain of choices that had led to its first blow. He saw, in himself, the long arc of his own becoming. The wisdom was permanent. The eye was a one time cost.
The math, by that reading, makes sense. A second reading, more subtle, is that the loss of the eye was itself part of the wisdom. That a god who gave up half his sight in exchange for deeper sight became, by that act, a different kind of seer. A one eyed god cannot see what is in front of him the way a two eyed god can. But a one eyed god has paid, in his own body, for the right to see what is behind the front of things.
He has bought, in a way, the right to see crookedly. The right to see askance. The right to see what cannot be seen straight on. In this reading, the loss is not a side effect. The loss is the wisdom.
The wisdom and the loss are the same thing. A third reading, and this is the reading the great mythographer Eliade leans toward, is that the scene at the well is a kind of shamanic initiation. In the surviving accounts of circumpolar shamanism, the spiritual traditions of the Siberian and northern Eurasian peoples, there is a recurring pattern in which the initiate must give up part of their body, or part of their identity, in order to enter the spirit world. The loss is the ticket. The wound is the door.
Odin, in giving his eye, is buying not a single drink but an entire mode of being. He becomes, by the act, the kind of being who can travel the deep places. He becomes, by the act, a shaman god. You can hold any of these readings. They are not exclusive.
But what I want you to hold, as we close this chapter, is the image itself. Because it is one of the most affecting images in all of mythology. A god, in a wide hat, standing at the edge of a stone well. The keeper beside him. The water, dark and still.
The god's hand, perhaps, lifted to his own face. The act. The moment of giving. The water, after, accepting what has been given. The eye, settling somewhere into the depths, visible, the sources tell us, to anyone who later looked closely.
A small bright thing at the bottom of the well, where Mímir himself would drink, every morning, after. And then the drink. The god, lifting the cup. The water. The taste of the deep past.
The flood of what is now known. The world, when the god lifted his face from the cup, was the same world it had been. But the god was not the same. He was now what the sources call him for the rest of his existence. Báleygr, the Flame Eyed.
Bileygr, the Wavering Eyed, the Weak Eyed. New names, now, accumulate around this moment, around the missing eye, around the price he has paid. The names mark it. The names tell us, across a thousand years, what the act meant. He paid in body.
He received in mind. The exchange was permanent. He turned, after, from the well. He walked back up the long root of the great tree. He returned to the upper world.
He took up his throne again. He let the ravens fly. He fed his wolves. He drank his wine. But he was different now.
And the next time he wanted something deeper, something the well of Mímir, even, could not give him, he would have to pay again. He would have to pay more. He would have to pay, this time, in his whole body. He would have to give himself to the tree.
Part 23
Chapter Eight. Sleipnir, the Eight legged Horse. Before we go up the tree, we should meet the horse. I want to give you the horse now because the horse, in the sources, is the way Odin gets between worlds. He is, in the literal sense, the god's vehicle, the means by which Odin, who travels constantly, travels at all.
And because much of what is left in this episode is travel, into the upper branches of the tree, into the dark of the nine nights, into and out of the places where the runes lie, it helps, before we go further, to know what Odin rides. The horse is called Sleipnir. The name means, roughly, the slipper. The glider. The verb root carries the sense of moving smoothly, of slipping, of passing over surfaces without effort.
It is, by every account, the finest horse in the nine worlds. It has eight legs. This is, in the surviving Norse iconography, one of the most consistent and recognizable details about the god. Wherever Odin appears in surviving art, on standing stones, on small bronze figurines, in the carvings of medieval Sweden and Norway, he is often accompanied by a horse with more legs than a horse should have. Two extra.
Four pairs. The legs, in the images, double back on themselves. The horse is in motion even when it is not, in the sense that an eight legged creature is, by definition, moving four times as fast as a four legged one. The horse is built for distance. Where does the horse come from?
The origin story is, I am afraid, one of the stranger ones in the corpus. It involves the gods' decision to hire a builder for the walls of Asgard, an obscure stranger who turned out to be a giant, a wager about completion dates, and the trickster god Loki, whom we will meet much more thoroughly in later episodes. The full story is long enough that we will not, tonight, walk all the way through it. We will arrive at the bottom of it, which is what matters for our purposes here. At the bottom of the story is this.
Loki, for reasons we will not now untangle, found himself needing to distract a great work stallion called Svaðilfari, the giant's horse. The simplest distraction Loki could think of was to take the form of a mare. He did. Svaðilfari followed. Loki ran.
Svaðilfari followed further. The mare led the stallion off into the woods, and the work the giant was doing stopped, and the gods escaped a costly bargain, and Loki, sometime later, returned to Asgard with a foal. The foal was Sleipnir. It had eight legs from the start. It was, by all surviving accounts, supernaturally strong, supernaturally fast, supernaturally calm.
Loki gave it to Odin. Or, in some readings, Loki simply abandoned it in Asgard and Odin claimed it. Either way, the horse became the god's. And it remained, from then on, the means by which Odin moved. I want you to sit, for a moment, with the strangeness of this.
The chief god of the Norse pantheon, the Allfather, the lord of the slain, the figure of greatest authority and dignity in his cosmos, is mounted on a horse that was born from a male trickster god in the form of a female horse, who allowed himself to be pursued by an actual male horse in order to delay a building project. The genealogy is, to put it mildly, unconventional. The Norse, however, did not treat this as scandalous. They treated it as, simply, what had happened. Loki is a trickster, and tricksters do trickster things.
The trick worked. The foal was produced. The foal turned out to be the finest horse in the worlds. The god received it. The story ended.
This is, I think, one of the differences between the Norse and the Greek mythological imaginations. The Greeks would have, in such a moment, made the genealogy into a problem, a source of shame, a thing to be hidden or fought over. The Norse simply accepted it. The horse was excellent. The god rode it.
The conversation moved on. What you should keep, then, is the function of Sleipnir, not the genealogy. Sleipnir is the means by which Odin crosses between worlds. A horse with four legs runs across the ground. A horse with eight legs, the surviving Norse imagination suggests, runs across other surfaces.
Across air. Across the surface of water. Across the boundary between the upper world and the lower. Across the path from Asgard down to Hel. There is, in the Eddic poem Baldrs Draumar, The Dreams of Baldr, a passage in which Odin rides Sleipnir down into the underworld, down to the gates of Hel, to summon a long dead seeress to answer his questions.
The horse carries him there. The horse carries him back. The boundaries that, for a four legged horse, would be impassable, the horse with eight legs simply slips through. In one reading of the Eddas, Sleipnir is, like the ravens, an extension of Odin himself. The god is a god of motion.
The god moves. The horse is the vehicle of the motion. The eight legs are the structural fact that allows the motion to be more than natural. The god is not, in fact, traveling on a horse. The god is traveling on a piece of his own travel.
In another reading, and this reading some folklorists have explored at length, the eight legs are a particular kind of magical sign. Eight is, in the surviving Norse symbolism, a number associated with the passage from one state to another. Eight legs may suggest a creature that exists in two worlds at once, four legs in this one, four legs in the next, and that can move between them at will. Either reading is available to you. What matters, for the rest of this episode, is that when we follow Odin up onto the tree, in the next chapter, we are following him on a horse that does not behave like a horse.
We are following a god who, by the time he reaches the great tree, has already traveled between worlds in a way no mortal horse could carry him. We are following a god who has, by the moment he begins to climb, already made the kind of journey that human imagination usually reserves for dreams. The tree is in the wind. The horse is between the worlds. The god is going up.
Let us follow him.
Part 24
Chapter Nine. The Hanging on the Tree. I am going to do something now that I do not, in the ordinary course of these episodes, do. I am going to read you a piece of the original source. Not in Old Norse, though I will give you the Norse words, briefly, because they are themselves part of the texture of the moment.
I will read you the English of the Hávamál. The high speech. The sayings of the high one. And specifically I will read you the stanzas that scholars have come to call the Rúnatal, the runic tale, in which Odin himself, speaking in the first person, describes what happened on the tree. I will give you the lines in plain modern English, paraphrased lightly for the cadence of narration.
I will not over translate. The original is spare. The narration should be spare with it. Here is what the god says. Hávamál 138 141.
I am paraphrasing slightly: I know that I hung on the windy tree, vindgameiðr, the wind swept gallows, for nine full nights. Wounded by a spear, and given to Odin. Myself, to myself. On that tree of which no man knows from what root it runs. They gave me neither bread nor any drink from a horn.
I looked downward. I took up the runes, screaming, I took them up. Then I fell back from there. That is the passage. Read it again, slowly, in your own mind, because we are going to spend the next chapter sitting with it.
I hung on the windy tree, for nine full nights, wounded by a spear, and given to Odin. Myself, to myself. Let us look at what the god has just told us. He has hung on a tree. The tree is in the wind.
He has hung there for nine full nights, not nine days, not nine days and nights, but specifically nine nights. The Norse, for what it is worth, often counted time in nights rather than days. Eight nights ago meant, in the old usage, something like a week and a day in modern English. So nine full nights is, in old time keeping, just shy of a fortnight. A long, long stretch to hang from anything.
He has been pierced by a spear. The text does not specify whose. The long tradition of reading has assumed it was his own, Gungnir, the spear that never misses, here finding the body of the god who threw it. Some scholars argue the spear was wielded by someone else, perhaps a priest, perhaps a personification of the act itself. The text is, in its bareness, ambiguous.
But the most common reading, and the one most consistent with the Norse sense that Odin is the god who sacrifices himself to himself, is that the spear was Odin's own. He was given to Odin. Gefinn Óðni. He was a sacrifice to himself. The god, in this passage, is both priest and victim.
He is the giver and the given. He is the one performing the rite, and the one upon whom the rite is performed. There is no other god involved. There is no audience. There is no one watching except, perhaps, the tree.
Myself, to myself. Sit with that line. It is, by general scholarly agreement, one of the most striking lines in all of Germanic poetry. It is the moment in which a god says, in plain words, that the sacrifice he is making is internal. That what is being given is not being given to another being.
That the god is reaching some part of himself, and offering it to another part of himself, and the rest of the cosmos is simply the place where the act happens. I do not want, in a sleep narration, to push too hard on the philosophy of this. But I would like you to notice that there is no exchange, in this scene, with anyone else. There is no Mímir. There is no keeper.
There is no other being from whom a price has been demanded. There is only Odin, and Odin, and the tree. There is something I want to say about the nine nights themselves, before we follow the god's eye downward. The text gives us, you may have noticed, almost nothing about what happened in those nine nights. The Hávamál, in the stanzas we are walking through, does not describe them.
The god says, in the spare way the Old Norse poets had, that he hung on the tree, that he was wounded, that he was given to himself, that no one brought him bread or drink. He does not describe the slow turning of the wind. He does not describe the cold deepening, hour by hour, as the first night gave way to the second. He does not describe the way his body, which was a god's body and could not die, nevertheless began, by the third or fourth night, to forget what being a body meant. The Old Norse poets, in their restraint, did not give us the inside of the experience.
They gave us only the outside. The act, the duration, the price. But you can, if you sit a moment, imagine what was probably inside. You can imagine the first night. The cold coming on.
The wind not yet so terrible. The body still familiar to itself. The spear wound, no doubt, sharp at first, a single bright line of pain in a body that had not, until that moment, been a body in pain. The mind, in that first night, would have been alert. It would have been counting hours, in the way a mind counts hours when the mind has just begun a thing it has chosen to endure.
You can imagine the second night. The cold deeper now. The wound, somewhere, dulling toward an ache that did not move. The wind, picking up. The first long dark stretch in which the eye no longer found anything new to fix on, because there was nothing to fix on except the tree and the wind and the long fall beneath.
You can imagine the third night, and the fourth. The body becoming strange to itself. The thirst, in particular, becoming a presence in the throat that was no longer separable from the rest of the body's sensation. The arms, perhaps, no longer felt as arms. The shoulders, somewhere in the second or third night, no longer felt as shoulders.
The pain, no longer felt as pain, only as a great cold weight, holding the god to the tree. You can imagine the fifth night. The mind, by now, no longer counting. The hours, no longer separable. The wind, the wood, the long dark, the small distant stars, all of it folding together into a single condition that the god, hanging there, simply was.
And then, somewhere in the sixth or seventh or eighth night, and here we are passing entirely beyond what the surviving sources are willing to say, into what later readers have only inferred, somewhere in those middle nights, the dark beneath the tree, the dark that the god, in the surviving line, had begun to look downward into, began to give back something. Not a shape. Not yet. Only a sense. A pressure.
A weight in the dark that had not been there at the beginning. A slow rising, the way a dim shape rises out of black water as the eye learns to see it. The god, the sources tell us, hung for nine nights. We do not know what happened in the first eight. We know only that on the ninth, at the end of the ninth, something rose up to meet him.
The shape that had been gathering in the dark beneath the tree, the thing his downward gaze had been calling, came up to meet him. I would like you to hold, as you listen, that the nine nights were not nothing. They were the price. They were the slow weathering of a god into a vessel that could receive what the runes were. They were the long emptying, by hunger and thirst and wind, of everything that would have kept the god full of his ordinary self.
You cannot, the Norse sources seem to suggest, receive deep knowledge while you are still full. The god had to become empty. The nine nights were the emptying. They gave me neither bread nor any drink from a horn. The plural is interesting.
The text says they. There is no specified subject. The most common reading is that the they refers to anyone who might have, in the ordinary course of things, given the god food or water. The tree did not offer him bread. The wind did not offer him drink.
The other gods, wherever they were, did not come to bring him sustenance. The god hung in the wind for nine nights, without food, without water, alone. This is, by any measure, an extreme of bodily suffering. A human body without water for nine days does not survive. The god's body, being divine, does not die, but the god, hanging there, is by every measure suffering.
He is, in the Norse imagination, undergoing what we now might call an ordeal. A controlled extremity. A pushing of the body to a place where the ordinary boundary between the body and the spirit becomes thin. I looked downward. A small line.
Easy to miss. The god, hanging on the tree, looked down. What was beneath him? The sources do not specify. The tradition has read it many ways.
Some readers have understood the downward gaze as a turning of the god's attention away from the bright upper world, the world of Asgard, of feasts, of names, and toward the darker root realms, the deep places, the wells beneath the tree. Some have understood it as the god's gaze passing into himself, into the inner darkness that ordinary daylight does not penetrate. What is consistent is that the looking downward is followed by an event. I took up the runes. The Old Norse is upp nam ek rúnar.
I took them up. Upward. To me. The runes are what the god finds, when he looks down. The runes rise up.
The god takes them. There is, in the Norse syntax, no mention of climbing or reaching. The runes are simply there, beneath the god, and the god, looking, lifts them. Screaming, I took them up. This line, more than any other in the passage, is the one I find affecting. Œpandi nam.
The act of taking the runes is not a quiet act. The god, in the moment of receiving them, screams. The wisdom, when it comes, is not gentle. It does not arrive as a soft whisper. It does not arrive as a benediction.
It arrives, the god tells us in his own words, as something that pulls a cry from his throat. There are several readings of why. The simplest reading is physical. The god has been hanging for nine nights, in the wind, without food, without water, with a spear in his side. He is, by every measure, in agony.
The scream is the body's release. The runes, when they come, come at the moment the body could not have held on any longer. The cry is the cry of an exhausted creature finally being given what it has been waiting for. A second reading is mystical. The runes, in the Norse tradition, are not merely letters of an alphabet.
They are forces. They are condensations of the world. To take a rune is to take, in a sense, a piece of the structure of being into one's mind. The body cannot accept such things easily. The cry is the cry of a finite vessel suddenly being filled with something larger than itself.
A third reading, and this is the reading I find most affecting, though it is not necessarily the right one, is that the cry is grief. That the god, in the moment of receiving the runes, becomes aware of what they will cost him. They will give him knowledge. They will give him power. They will give him the ability, in the coming centuries of his rule, to see further than any other being.
But they will also bind him to a fate. They will show him, in the future, the death of his son. They will show him the final battle. They will show him his own end. The cry, in this reading, is the cry of a god who in a single instant has been given everything he wanted, and has seen what it will cost.
Then I fell back from there. The line is bare. The Old Norse: fell ek aptr þaðan. The god falls. He falls aptr, back.
The act is finished. The god, by his own account, falls from the tree. And then the passage ends. The Hávamál goes on, in the stanzas after, to discuss the runes themselves and what they enable. The god lists spells.
He lists the kinds of knowledge he can now exercise. He lists the words and shapes by which a wise man can affect the world. But the hanging, the act itself, ends with the falling. We do not know where he fell. We do not know who, if anyone, was there to receive him.
We do not know what state his body was in. We do not know how long it took him to walk again, or whether walking was even the right word. We know only that the god, who entered the tree as one being, descended from it as another. He was now the god who had taken the runes. He was now the god who knew.
And the rest of his eternity, the rest of the stories that the surviving Norse tradition tells about him, proceeds from that moment. Outside, in whatever room you are listening from, the wind is doing what the wind does. The night is doing what the night does. The almanac is moving slowly. We have, in the chapters left, only a small amount of unwinding still to do.
We will look, more closely, at what the runes themselves were. We will look at what the god brought back. And then we will say goodnight. For now, let the image of the tree stay with you. The god, hanging.
The wind. The spear. The dark beneath him. The thing rising up to meet him. The scream.
The fall. The act is done. Let us look at the runes.
Part 25
Chapter Ten. What the Runes Whispered. What are the runes? This is a question scholars have spent a very long time on, and the answer, frustratingly, is not single. In one sense, the runes are simply an alphabet.
The historical fact is that the Germanic speaking peoples of northern Europe, sometime in the first or second century after the Roman period began, developed a writing system. The earliest examples, short inscriptions on objects, on stones, on weapons, date to roughly the second century. The system is now called, by linguists, the Elder Futhark. The name comes from the first six letters of the script: F, U, Th, A, R, K. Twenty four characters.
Each one corresponds to a sound. Each one can be carved into wood, into stone, into bone, into metal. Each one, when arranged in lines, can spell out a word. In this sense, when Odin takes the runes, he takes, quite literally, the technology of writing. He takes the ability to fix language in matter.
He takes the means by which words can outlast the throats that spoke them. He becomes, by the act, the god who introduced literacy to the Germanic world. This is one reading. It is not, in the surviving sources, the most prominent one. In a second sense, the runes are not merely letters.
They are powers. Each rune, in the surviving Norse tradition, has a name. Fehu, the first rune, means cattle, wealth. Úruz means the aurochs, the great wild ox. Thurisaz means giant. Ansuz means god, and specifically, in many readings, Odin himself.
Raidho means journey. Kenaz means torch. Gebo means gift. Wunjo means joy. Hagalaz means hail.
Naudhiz means need. Isaz means ice. Jera means year, the harvest cycle. Eihwaz means yew. Pertho means a cup, or a dice cup.
Algiz means protection, sometimes elk. Sowilo means sun. Tiwaz means the god Tyr. Berkano means birch. Ehwaz means horse.
Mannaz means man. Laguz means water. Ingwaz means the god Ing, or Yngvi. Othalaz means inheritance, homeland. Dagaz means day.
Each of these, and this is the second sense in which the runes were not merely letters, was a name for a force. A pattern in the world. A thing that could be invoked, or warded against, or aligned with. To carve the rune Ansuz onto a stick was not only to write the sound A. It was to invoke the presence of the gods.
To carve Algiz was to ask for protection. To carve Naudhiz was to acknowledge a moment of necessity, or to compel one. Let me give you a few of these runes more carefully, because the names do not tell you, by themselves, what the rune was felt to be. The names are the doors. The forces are behind the doors.
Take Ansuz. The rune of the gods. The rune whose name means a god, and which, in many of the surviving accounts, points specifically at Odin himself. Ansuz, when carved, was understood to draw the presence of the divine word, the breath of the god, his speech, his ability to make a thing real by naming it. The poets, when they wanted to invoke their craft, sometimes invoked Ansuz.
The skalds, sitting before a king, sometimes traced it in the air before they began. To carve Ansuz was to say, in a single mark, that what was about to be spoken was not ordinary speech. The mouth, in that moment, was the god's mouth. Take Algiz. The rune of protection.
The shape that the Old English rune poem associates with sedge grass, sharp leaves that wound the hand that grasps them, and that the long Norse rune tradition has come to read as the standing posture of the great elk in the forest, the antlers raised, the body held. Algiz, in the rune traditions that descend from the Norse, became the rune of warding. The shape one carved, in later practice, on a token before a journey. The shape one carved, in later practice, on the threshold of a home. The rune of the standing upright, the not falling, the held line.
To carve Algiz was to ask the long pattern of the world to keep what it had been keeping. Take Naudhiz. The rune of need. The shape that is carved, the sources tell us, in moments when there is no other path. When the harvest has failed.
When the road is closed by snow. When the loved one is sick beyond the medicines that are known. Naudhiz was not a hopeful rune. It was an honest one. To carve it was to acknowledge that the moment one was in was a moment of necessity, and to ask, by the act of marking it, that the necessity be answered, somehow, by whatever in the world was capable of answering.
The rune does not promise. It only names the condition under which the speaker is asking. Take Thurisaz. The rune of the giant. The hostile force.
The pressure that pushes back against the world the gods made. To carve Thurisaz was to acknowledge that the world contained powers older than the named ones, powers that did not particularly wish humans well, powers that could be invoked, if one were brave enough, to do harm to enemies. In some of the surviving inscriptions, Thurisaz appears in curse formulas. It is, of the runes we have been describing, perhaps the most uncomfortable. The Norse imagination did not flinch from acknowledging that the world contained, alongside its protective forces, forces that were the opposite.
Take Hagalaz. The rune of hail. The sudden, destructive moment. The thing that comes from above and ruins, in a quarter of an hour, the work of a season. Hagalaz was the rune of disruption, but also, in some of the deeper Norse readings, the rune of necessary disruption.
The world, in the Norse imagination, sometimes required hail. The pattern occasionally needed to be broken before it could be re set. To carve Hagalaz was to acknowledge that something in one's life had been broken, and to suggest that the breaking, perhaps, had been necessary. And take, last, Sowilo. The rune of the sun.
The wheel of the year. The bright thing in the sky that the Norse, living in the long northern dark, watched with particular attention. The Old English rune poem describes the sun as a joy to seafarers when they cross the wide sea, a small bright thing that meant home was still findable. In the rune traditions that descend from the Norse, Sowilo became the rune of healing, of warmth, of the return of light. The shape one might carve on a token for a sick child.
The shape one might trace on a threshold as winter began to break. It was the most hopeful of the runes, the one that asked, simply, for the sun to come back. These are six of the twenty four. The other eighteen each have, in the surviving Norse tradition, similar depth. The Hávamál, in the long passage immediately following Odin's account of the hanging, lists eighteen spells the god learned through the runes.
The list is famous in Norse studies. The spells include the ability to give help in distress. To heal the sick. To dull the edges of enemy weapons. To free oneself from bonds.
To turn aside arrows in flight. To turn back hostile sorcery. To put out a fire with a word. To reconcile a feud. To calm a storm at sea.
To bring a hanged man down from the gallows so that he walks and speaks. To make a woman love. The list ends with one final spell, the eighteenth, which the god declines to share with anyone, except, the verse says, his sister or his wife. Each spell, in the surviving tradition, was associated with a particular rune or combination of runes. The god, by taking up the runes, took up the spells.
This is the third sense in which the runes were not merely letters. They were practical magic. You can choose, depending on your temperament, which of these readings you wish to hold. The Norse, I think, held all three at once. The runes were letters.
They were forces. They were spells. The god, in taking them, took the alphabet, the metaphysics, and the toolkit of the magical practitioner, and he took them, the sources are clear, by hanging on a tree for nine nights and screaming. I want to spend a moment on what this combination means. In modern English, the word wisdom is almost entirely interior.
It refers to a quality of mind. To say a person is wise is to say something about how they think. It does not, in most modern usage, refer to anything they can do. The Norse word, vísdómr, was different. Vísdómr was not only interior.
It was also operative. A wise person, in the Norse imagination, was a person who could affect the world. The wise man could carve a stick. He could whisper a word. He could put his hand on a wound and stop the bleeding.
He could speak over a sword and dull its edge. The wisdom was knowledge that did something. This is the wisdom Odin won. He did not, by hanging on the tree, become merely contemplative. He did not become merely thoughtful.
He became the kind of being who, with twenty four small marks and a knowledge of how to combine them, could change what happened next. The cost, the sources are clear, was real. Nine nights. The spear. The hunger.
The thirst. The scream. The fall. But what he received, the sources are equally clear, was real too. In one reading of the Eddas, and this is the reading that the great twentieth century historian of religion Mircea Eliade leaned toward, the runes are themselves a kind of shamanic knowledge.
They are the knowledge that an initiated practitioner brings back from the spirit world. The hanging on the tree is the initiation rite. The runes are the souvenir. The god is the patron of every human practitioner who, in the centuries after, would carve runes onto cattle horns and ships and grave stones and silver brooches, hoping to attract some small piece of the same power. In another reading, more sober, the runes are simply the writing system.
The mythological frame is a poetic explanation, by a tradition that valued poetry above accuracy, of how such a thing as written letters came to exist among the Germanic peoples. The god is credited with the invention not because anyone literally believed he carved the first stone, but because the gift was understood to be of the kind that, in the Norse imagination, only a god could give. Either reading, again, is available. What I would invite you to hold is the third reading, which is mine, and I offer it only as a suggestion, since I cannot prove it and the Norse sources do not directly support it. The third reading is that the runes, whatever else they were, were a kind of language that Odin found by looking down.
By facing his own depths. By hanging long enough, and going hungry long enough, and giving up enough of the ordinary supports of his being, that something that lived beneath the surface of consciousness rose up to meet him. In this reading, the runes are what every long sleepless night, every long fast, every long silence has always brought to the seeker who would not turn away. The runes are not invented. The runes are found, by anyone willing to sit long enough at the edge of their own depth that the depth begins to give up what it has been keeping.
This is, I think, why the Norse imagination held the god of the runes in such complicated regard. Odin is not safe. Odin is not comfortable. Odin is the god who proved that wisdom is gettable, but only at a price. And the price, he showed, is paid in the body.
In the eye, given. In the body, hung. In the cry, released. In the fall, taken. And then the god went back to his hall.
And he taught what he could. And he carried, for the rest of his eternity, the knowledge of what such things cost. We have one chapter left, before the goodnight. Let us turn to what he became.
Part 26
Chapter Eleven. The Wisdom He Brought Back. When Odin fell from the tree, he was changed. The surviving sources do not give us, in detail, the moment of his return. They do not tell us who, if anyone, found him at the foot of the tree.
They do not tell us how long he lay there. They do not tell us whether he was helped to stand, or whether he stood on his own. They tell us only that, after the hanging, Odin was Odin in a different sense than he had been before. The god, having taken the runes, returned to the company of the other gods and the work of his rule. But the rule was now done by a being who had experienced what he had experienced.
What does it mean, in the surviving stories, to be a god who has hung on a tree? It means, first, that he is permanently associated with the act. The names accumulate. Hangatýr, the god of the hanged. Hangaguð, the hanged god.
Yggr, the terrible one, whose horse is the gallows. Galga valdr, the wielder of the gallows. The act, in the language, becomes the god's identity. He cannot, after the hanging, be referred to without the hanging being implied. The wind in his name is the wind in the tree.
It means, second, that he becomes the patron of certain kinds of human practice. Men who, in the Norse historical world, were hanged in sacrifice, and there is some evidence in the archaeological record that ritual hanging was occasionally practiced, were said to be given to Odin. The god received them. He had himself been hanged, and so he, more than any other god, knew what it meant. It means, third, that he becomes the god of seekers.
Of the men and women in human history who, in the Norse imagination, undertook the kind of self imposed ordeals, the long fast, the long vigil, the long silence, by which deep knowledge had traditionally been pursued. Odin was their patron. He had done it first. He had paid the price, and he had returned, and he was the proof that the act could yield something. The shamans of the Sámi north, the seiðr workers of the Norse south, the wise women in the small villages who knew the runes, all of them, in their way, were continuing the act Odin had begun on the tree.
It means, fourth, and this is the hardest one, that he carries the knowledge of his own end. Because among the things the runes gave Odin, the surviving sources are clear, was foresight. The ability to see what is coming. And what is coming, for the gods of Asgard, in the long arc of the Norse imagination, is not survival. You may already know the word.
Ragnarǫk. The twilight of the gods. The final battle. The day on which the wolf swallows the sun. The day on which the great serpent rises out of the sea.
The day on which the gods of Asgard go out to meet their fates, and most of them fall. Odin, after the tree, knows this is coming. Every other god in Asgard lives, in the surviving stories, in a kind of innocence about the end. They feast. They drink.
They fight. They love. They go about the business of being gods, in the great hall of the world, without the heavy knowledge of how the hall will end. Odin, alone, knows. This is the wisdom he brought back.
Not only the runes. Not only the spells. Not only the alphabet. But the long sight that sees, in every present moment, the fate that is approaching. The god who hung on the tree is, from that moment on, the god who knows what is going to happen, and who continues, despite knowing, to do the work of being a god.
In one reading of the Eddas, and I find this reading the most affecting, the entire rest of Norse mythology is shaped by this. Odin's restlessness, his constant traveling, his hunger to know more, all of it, after the tree, can be read as the work of a god who is trying, in whatever time is left, to find a way out. He cannot find one. The end is fixed. But the god keeps moving, keeps gathering wisdom, keeps sending his ravens, keeps feeding his wolves, keeps drinking the wine, because what else is there to do, when you know how the story ends, but to live the days you have with as much attention as you can.
That is the Odin who, in the later stories, will steal the mead of poetry from the giants. That is the Odin who will gather warriors into Valhǫll, training them, the surviving sources tell us, for the battle that is coming. That is the Odin who will, on the last day, ride out himself, in golden armor, on Sleipnir, to meet the wolf Fenrir. He will lose. He has known he will lose, for as long as there has been a him to know it.
He goes anyway. This is, I think, the deepest reason the Norse held Odin in such ambivalent regard. He is not a god of comfort. He is not a god whose stories are easy. He is the god who showed, by his own example, that knowledge is gettable, and that what knowledge gives you is not always peace.
Sometimes, often, in the Norse imagination, knowledge gives you the certainty of how things will end, and the work of continuing to live, and to rule, and to be good to those who depend on you, anyway. This is the god we have followed tonight. We have walked with him from the throne to the well. We have watched him give his eye. We have met his ravens, his wolves, his horse.
We have followed him up onto the tree. We have heard him scream. We have heard him fall. We have heard, in his own words, what the act gave him. And we have arrived, now, at the place in the story where he goes back to his hall, and sets up his throne, and continues the rule that had been waiting for him.
The almanac, like the god, has done its work for the evening. We will say goodnight in a moment.
Part 27
Chapter Twelve. A Quiet Reflection on the Allfather. Before we go to goodnight, I would like to sit, for a few minutes, with what we have been holding tonight. Because Odin is a strange god to sit with. He is not a god of comfort.
He is not a god whose stories end with everything restored. He is, in the surviving tradition, a god who got what he wanted, and who paid for it, in his body, in his sight, in the long knowledge of how the story he was inside would eventually end. The Norse imagination did not, in its wisest moments, soften him. They held him as he was. A god who could not be still.
A god who paid in his eye for the past, and in his body for the future, and who returned from both transactions changed in ways he could not have undone if he had wanted to. This is not, by any modern measure, an easy figure. There is no part of the Odin story in which the god is rescued. There is no part in which someone else makes the sacrifice for him. There is no part in which a wiser elder tells him he need not pay.
The god, in every version of every surviving story, pays. He pays himself, to himself. He hangs, on a tree, in a wind, in the dark, alone. And then he goes back to his hall, and he does the work, and he keeps moving. If there is a teaching here, and the Norse poets did not, mostly, write to teach, but the stories nevertheless do, it is, I think, this.
That deep knowledge is not free. The Norse imagination held, in all its sources, that the things worth knowing in this world have prices. That a person who wishes to see the past clearly will give up, in the giving, some part of what they had before. That a person who wishes to see the future will pay, in the seeing, more than they thought they had. That the wisdom you actually receive will not be the wisdom you imagined.
It will be harder. It will be costlier. It will leave you carrying things you cannot put down. And yet, and the Norse poets seem, very gently, to insist on this, the act is, in the end, recommended. Not by anyone in particular.
Not by Odin himself, who in the surviving Hávamál says only what he did, not what others should do. But by the long shape of the tradition. The god, the tradition seems to say, was not wrong to pay what he paid. The hanging, the eye, the cry, the fall, these were the right acts. The wisdom was, in the end, worth the wisdom's cost.
The god, hanging in the wind for nine nights, was doing what gods are sometimes called upon to do. He was doing what, in your own smaller scale, you have probably been called upon to do, in the long nights of your own life, when something you needed to know was on the far side of a darkness you had to pass through. You may, when you wake in the morning, not remember any of this. That is fine. The almanac does not require remembering.
The almanac is here to hold, while you rest, the kind of stories that took the old peoples a thousand years to set down. You have rested, for an hour or two, in the company of a god who paid for what he wanted, and who continued, after, to do the work of being himself. That is enough, for one evening. The Allfather, somewhere, is continuing. The wind is doing what the wind does.
We are nearly to goodnight.
Part 28
Chapter Thirteen. Goodnight, and the Allfather Continues. The episode is nearly over. Whether you have heard much of it, or only a little, or only this last chapter, you have done what you came here to do. You have given the night somewhere to rest.
The almanac has carried what attention you had to give it, and the rest, the almanac has carried alone. In the long quiet of the Norse imagination, this is what the god himself is now doing. He has finished his work for the evening. He has come back from the tree, in some moment beyond our reach. He has resumed his hall.
He has fed his wolves. He has called his ravens back. He has lifted, perhaps, a horn of mead, and let himself sit. And in the deep north, in the wind that has not stopped since the world began, the great tree is doing what it has always done, standing in the long dark, with its branches in stars, and its roots in places older than the gods. You may, sometime in the coming nights, want to come back.
The almanac will be here. Episode three is coming next. It is the story of how the dwarves of Svartalfheim made the hammer Mjǫllnir for the god Thor. We will spend a night with the smiths in their underground city. We will meet the trickster Loki, who set the whole thing in motion.
We will meet Thor himself, the son of Odin, the protector of the world of men. And we will see how a hammer, which, on first encounter, sounds like a small thing, became the object on which the safety of nine worlds depended. That story comes next. It will be here, on the same schedule. New episodes Wednesdays and Sundays, at 8pm Eastern.
For tonight, though, you have done enough. The wind in the tree is doing what the wind has always done. The runes are where the runes have always been, in the small inscriptions on old stones, in the carvings of old grave markers, in the dark, beneath the surface of things, where they have waited, since the god first reached down and took them up. The god himself is in his hall. The ravens are on his shoulders.
The wolves are at his feet. The horse is between worlds. The spear is at hand. The ring is heavy on his arm. The eye is in the well.
He is, in his hall, quiet. The Allfather is, for the moment, at rest. As you, in your bed, are at rest. Let the breath slow. Let the shoulders drop.
Let what remains of the day go to the same long darkness in which the runes lay before Odin found them. Let it go down. Let it rest there. The almanac will continue. The next chapter of the season will arrive in its time.
For tonight, the work of the day is finished. Goodnight. Sleep well. The Sleeping Almanac will be here when you come back.
Mjolnir, the Hammer of Thor
Good evening.
Mjolnir, the Hammer of Thor
Or perhaps good night, if you've made your
Part 31
way here in the long hours after midnight
Part 32
the difference may already have stopped mattering.
Part 33
You've come back, perhaps, because the last two episodes
Part 34
helped you sleep.
Part 35
Or you've come for the first time.
Part 36
And the third episode happened to be the one
Part 37
the algorithm offered.
Part 38
Either is fine.
Part 39
The almanac is patient.
Part 40
Tonight stands on its own.
Part 41
If you are listening in bed, I'd ask you
Part 42
to do very little.
Part 43
Close your eyes.
Part 44
Let your jaw loosen.
Part 45
Let your shoulders drop, even a little
Part 46
even if you didn't know they were tight.
Part 47
The story does not need your attention.
Part 48
It will keep moving whether you follow it or
Part 49
not.
Part 50
If you drift, that is the point.
Part 51
If you wake briefly to catch a single sentence
Part 52
and then sink again, that is good.
Part 53
In the first episode, we walked the shape of
Part 54
the world, nine realms joined by one great
Part 55
tree.
Part 56
In the second, we met the wanderer, the Allfather
Part 57
the hanged god.
Part 58
Tonight we meet the figure who stood between the
Part 59
world of men and the great old powers at
Part 60
its edges.
Part 61
The god of thunder.
Part 62
The red bearded one.
Part 63
The one who carried, at his belt
Part 64
a hammer that had been forged in the underground
Part 65
halls of the dwarves, under conditions so strange they
Part 66
have been told and retold for a thousand years.
Part 67
This is the story of how that hammer came
Part 68
to be.
Part 69
And of the small cruelty.
Part 70
And the long descent.
Part 71
And the bet that nearly cost a god's head
Part 72
that lay behind it.
Part 73
Now, let us begin.
Part 74
Chapter One.
Part 75
Thor, the God of the Hammer.
Part 76
Before we go to the dwarves.
Part 77
And before we go to the forge
Part 78
we should sit, for a while, with the figure
Part 79
of the god whose hammer this story is about.
Part 80
Thor.
Part 81
If you have come to Norse mythology through the
Part 82
surface of modern culture, through comic books
Part 83
through summer blockbuster films, through the cheerful merchandise that
Part 84
fills airport shops near Reykjavík, you may carry
Part 85
in your mind, a particular picture of him.
Part 86
A tall blond figure.
Part 87
A square jaw.
Part 88
A red cape.
Part 89
A hammer with a short handle held aloft as
Part 90
lightning strikes around him.
Part 91
A face that smiles easily.
Part 92
The Thor of the old Norse sources is
Part 93
in some ways, that figure .
Part 94
And in other ways, not quite that figure at
Part 95
all.
Part 96
He is described, in the surviving texts, as red bearded.
Part 97
Rauðskeggr.
Part 98
The redbeard.
Part 99
A man, or a god.
Part 100
But the texts often use the language of men
Part 101
for him, of enormous appetite and enormous strength.
Part 102
He eats more than any other being in Asgard.
Part 103
He drinks more.
Part 104
He sleeps deeply.
Part 105
He is, by every account, the strongest of the
Part 106
gods, and one of the few who openly enjoys
Part 107
his own strength.
Part 108
He laughs easily.
Part 109
He grieves easily.
Part 110
He is, in the long view of the surviving
Part 111
stories, the most directly accessible of the Norse gods
Part 112
the one whose feelings, when he has them
Part 113
are not hidden behind cunning or grief or many
Part 114
names.
Part 115
He shows you what he feels.
Part 116
The redbeard.
Part 117
Rauðskeggr.
Part 118
The word in Old Norse means exactly what it
Part 119
looks like.
Part 120
The color was, in the old Scandinavian world
Part 121
not common, fewer than one in fifteen people
Part 122
were born with it .
Part 123
And a red beard, on a god
Part 124
was the sort of detail the poets did not
Part 125
include by accident.
Part 126
Red was the color of fire.
Part 127
Of the smithy.
Part 128
Of the moment when iron came out of the
Part 129
coals and could be shaped.
Part 130
It was the color, too, of the lightning that
Part 131
the old farmers in Norway and Sweden saw flicker
Part 132
across summer skies and named for him.
Part 133
The skies in the north were his work.
Part 134
The thunder, the storms that broke open the long
Part 135
midsummer afternoons, the rain that came after
Part 136
all of it carried his name.
Part 137
Þórsdagr.
Part 138
Thor's day.
Part 139
The fifth day of the week, in the old
Part 140
Norse calendar, was named for him.
Part 141
It still is, in every Germanic language that survives.
Part 142
In English we say Thursday and most of us
Part 143
no longer remember why.
Part 144
But the name has been carried, across a thousand
Part 145
years, by the simple weight of repetition.
Part 146
Children learn it without knowing it is a name.
Part 147
The god of thunder, in this small daily way
Part 148
has outlived nearly every temple and every ceremony that
Part 149
was ever raised to him.
Part 150
And there is more to him than the lightning.
Part 151
His father, the sources tell us, was Odin.
Part 152
Whom we met last episode.
Part 153
The Allfather.
Part 154
The wanderer.
Part 155
And, in this single particular, the two could not
Part 156
be less alike.
Part 157
The father is the god of hidden things
Part 158
of long roads, of self imposed ordeals, of wisdom paid
Part 159
for in body.
Part 160
The son is the god of openness, of feasts
Part 161
of direct collision with whatever stands in his way.
Part 162
The father goes alone.
Part 163
The son arrives at the gallop, on his goat drawn
Part 164
chariot, with the sky cracking behind him.
Part 165
His mother, in the surviving accounts, was Jǫrð.
Part 166
The Earth.
Part 167
Sometimes called Hlóðyn or Fjǫrgyn in the older Eddic
Part 168
poems.
Part 169
Thor is, by this lineage, the son of the
Part 170
wanderer god and of the earth itself.
Part 171
Sky and ground, joined in a single body.
Part 172
The figure who, in the old Norse worldview
Part 173
was meant to stand exactly at the place where
Part 174
Asgard met Midgard, where the high world of
Part 175
the gods reached down to the world of human
Part 176
farms and human halls.
Part 177
He had a hall of his own.
Part 178
The texts call it Bilskírnir.
Part 179
Lightning Bright.
Part 180
The hall is said to have had five hundred
Part 181
and forty rooms, which is the largest hall in
Part 182
Asgard, larger even than Odin's Valhǫll.
Part 183
The figure comes to us from Grímnismál
Part 184
one of the older Eddic poems, and Snorri Sturluson
Part 185
who liked numbers, preserved it in his
Part 186
Prose Edda.
Part 187
Whether it is literal or simply a poet's way
Part 188
of saying immeasurably large is a matter for the
Part 189
listener to decide.
Part 190
He had a wife.
Part 191
Her name was Sif.
Part 192
We will meet her, in earnest, in the next
Part 193
chapter.
Part 194
Because she is essential to the story we are
Part 195
walking toward tonight.
Part 196
He had children.
Part 197
The principal ones in the surviving sources were two
Part 198
sons, Magni and Móði, whose names mean, roughly
Part 199
Strength and Courage.
Part 200
There is also a daughter, Þrúðr, whose name means
Part 201
Strength in a different sense, closer to Might.
Part 202
The children are mentioned in the sources but rarely
Part 203
take center stage.
Part 204
Thor's stories are, with very few exceptions, Thor's stories.
Part 205
And he had two goats.
Part 206
This is the detail that, more than any other
Part 207
separates the Norse Thor from the modern Thor of
Part 208
popular culture.
Part 209
The Norse Thor did not fly.
Part 210
The Norse Thor did not, in the surviving texts
Part 211
hover above the ground or call down lightning at
Part 212
will from the sky.
Part 213
The Norse Thor moved across the worlds the way
Part 214
most beings moved, on a vehicle.
Part 215
And his vehicle was a chariot, pulled by two
Part 216
goats.
Part 217
Their names were Tanngrisnir and Tanngnjóstr.
Part 218
Which translate, in the rough English the names allow
Part 219
as Tooth Barer and Tooth Grinder.
Part 220
The surviving sources do not, by and large
Part 221
describe the goats themselves, only their function.
Part 222
They are the animals that pull Thor's chariot.
Part 223
Their names suggest, in the Norse imagination
Part 224
the kind of bared teeth countenance one might still meet
Part 225
today, in the highlands of Iceland or the Faroe
Part 226
Islands, on a path one would not particularly want
Part 227
to share.
Part 228
The goats had a remarkable quality, which I cannot
Part 229
in good conscience leave out of an episode about
Part 230
Thor.
Part 231
They could be eaten, and then resurrected.
Part 232
In the Eddic story of Thor's journey to the
Part 233
giant Útgarða Loki, which we will not visit in
Part 234
full tonight, since it deserves its own episode in
Part 235
a later season, Thor and his companions
Part 236
traveling across the long roads of the world
Part 237
stop at a peasant's farm for a meal.
Part 238
Thor slaughters his own goats, butchers them
Part 239
and shares the meat with the family.
Part 240
After eating, he gathers the bones in the goatskins
Part 241
blesses the hides with his hammer.
Part 242
And the goats stand up alive in the morning.
Part 243
There is no explanation.
Part 244
The text simply records what happened.
Part 245
This image is, in some ways, more telling about
Part 246
Thor than any description of his appearance.
Part 247
The hammer was not only a weapon.
Part 248
The hammer was also, in the Norse imagination
Part 249
a tool of consecration.
Part 250
A thing one used to bless.
Part 251
A thing that could, when laid on the right
Part 252
thing, restore what had been broken.
Part 253
We will come back to this.
Part 254
What you should keep, from this short tour of
Part 255
the god, is the shape of the being we
Part 256
are following tonight.
Part 257
He is the son of the wanderer and the
Part 258
earth.
Part 259
He is red bearded, easily moved, openly strong.
Part 260
He has a hall larger than his father's.
Part 261
He has a wife with golden hair
Part 262
whom we will meet in the next chapter.
Part 263
He has two goats, who pull his chariot across
Part 264
the worlds, and who can be killed and brought
Part 265
back to life.
Part 266
And he has, by the time the surviving
Part 267
stories were written
Part 268
a hammer.
Part 269
A short handled hammer.
Part 270
Mjǫllnir.
Part 271
The crusher.
Part 272
The lightning tool.
Part 273
The defense of the gods.
Part 274
The weapon that, in the old Norse imagination
Part 275
stood between everything that mattered and everything that wanted
Part 276
to break it.
Part 277
Tonight is the story of how that hammer came
Part 278
to be.
Part 279
And before we go down into the dwarven forges
Part 280
where the hammer was made, we should first meet
Part 281
the figure whose suffering set the whole story in
Part 282
motion.
Part 283
Because the hammer was made by accident.
Part 284
The hammer was made because Loki, the trickster
Part 285
had done something cruel to Thor's wife.
Part 286
We meet her now.
Part 287
Chapter Two.
Part 288
Sif and the Golden Hair.
Part 289
The wife of Thor was called Sif.
Part 290
This is, on first encounter, a remarkably short name.
Part 291
Two syllables.
Part 292
Almost a sound.
Part 293
In Old Norse, the word sif means, roughly, kinship.
Part 294
Relation by marriage.
Part 295
In law.
Part 296
In its broadest sense, it is the word for
Part 297
the bonds between people who are not bound by
Part 298
blood but who are bound, nonetheless, by the structures
Part 299
of family.
Part 300
To be in sif with someone is to be
Part 301
tied to them by something other than birth.
Part 302
This is, scholars have long noted, an unusual sort
Part 303
of name.
Part 304
Most Norse god names are descriptions, Allfather, Thunder
Part 305
The Just, The Bright One.
Part 306
Sif's name is, by contrast, almost an abstraction.
Part 307
She is named after the very idea of being in relation.
Part 308
She is, in her name itself, the one who
Part 309
is tied.
Part 310
We know remarkably little about her, in the surviving
Part 311
sources.
Part 312
The Norse poets, who lavished long stanzas on the
Part 313
deeds of the male gods, were briefer when they
Part 314
came to the goddesses.
Part 315
Sif appears in the Eddic poems mostly as Thor's
Part 316
wife, the woman waiting in Bilskírnir when he
Part 317
is away on his long journeys.
Part 318
She is not given speeches of her own in
Part 319
the major poems.
Part 320
She is mentioned, briefly, in genealogies.
Part 321
She is, in the old word, sif.
Part 322
The relation.
Part 323
The tie.
Part 324
But what is consistent, across every surviving reference to
Part 325
her, is the description of her hair.
Part 326
It was gold.
Part 327
Not gold as a color, not blonde
Part 328
not honey, not flax.
Part 329
Gold.
Part 330
The metal.
Part 331
The substance.
Part 332
The hair of Sif was, in the Norse imagination
Part 333
literal gold.
Part 334
It fell from her head the way real hair
Part 335
falls.
Part 336
It was warm.
Part 337
And it grew.
Part 338
And it moved in the wind.
Part 339
But it was, by every account, made of gold.
Part 340
This is the kind of detail that the Norse
Part 341
poets allowed to stand without explanation.
Part 342
They did not feel the need to tell us
Part 343
how such a thing was possible.
Part 344
They simply told us it was so.
Part 345
The wife of Thor had hair of gold.
Part 346
It is the principal thing the surviving texts want
Part 347
us to know about her.
Part 348
Why does this matter?
Part 349
In the Norse cultural imagination, hair was not
Part 350
as it sometimes is in our own age
Part 351
a casual or decorative thing.
Part 352
Hair was a marker of identity.
Part 353
A marker of social standing.
Part 354
A marker, in particular, of the relationship between a
Part 355
woman and her household.
Part 356
A wife's hair, in the old Norse world
Part 357
was bound up tightly during the workday and let
Part 358
down only in private, only with her husband.
Part 359
To touch a married woman's hair was
Part 360
in the legal codes that survive from the Icelandic
Part 361
settlement, an offense that could be punished.
Part 362
To cut a woman's hair against her will was
Part 363
an offense graver still, close, in the old
Part 364
legal language, to the offense of cutting off a
Part 365
part of her body.
Part 366
And the wife of Thor had hair that was
Part 367
itself, a treasure.
Part 368
Gold.
Part 369
The most precious substance the Norse imagination knew.
Part 370
The hair on her head was, in literal weight
Part 371
and value, the wealth of a kingdom.
Part 372
Hair, in the old Norse world, was not a
Part 373
small thing.
Part 374
It was not, as it sometimes is in
Part 375
our world, simply a matter of style.
Part 376
A woman's hair, in particular, carried meaning.
Part 377
It was, in the surviving texts, a sign of
Part 378
her honor, of her standing in the household
Part 379
of her unbroken connection to the family line.
Part 380
A married woman bound her hair, often
Part 381
beneath a cloth headcovering, a symbol of her
Part 382
vows.
Part 383
An unmarried woman wore her hair loose.
Part 384
To cut a woman's hair without her consent
Part 385
in the old Scandinavian law codes that have survived
Part 386
from later centuries, was an act of grievous insult
Part 387
a crime that carried a fine roughly equal
Part 388
to the wounding of her father, or her husband
Part 389
or her brother.
Part 390
To cut a goddess's hair was something the old
Part 391
poets had no measure for at all.
Part 392
And Sif's hair, in the surviving accounts
Part 393
was not only hers.
Part 394
It was, the poets tell us, gold.
Part 395
Real gold.
Part 396
Or something the eye could not tell from gold.
Part 397
When she stood in the firelight of her hall
Part 398
with her hair loose around her shoulders
Part 399
the light moved through it the way light moves
Part 400
through a fall of wheat at evening
Part 401
before the harvest.
Part 402
Some of the old commentators have suggested that her
Part 403
hair was the wheat, that Sif was
Part 404
in the old farmer's understanding, the field itself
Part 405
ripening.
Part 406
And Thor was the rain that came down upon
Part 407
her.
Part 408
I want you to hold this image
Part 409
for a moment, before we move on.
Part 410
A woman sleeping.
Part 411
The wife of the strongest god in the pantheon.
Part 412
In her own hall.
Part 413
Her hair, spread on the pillow around her
Part 414
glinting in the low light of the banked hearth fire.
Part 415
Gold.
Part 416
The whole of it.
Part 417
The Norse poets do not tell us
Part 418
in the surviving texts, much about her inner life.
Part 419
They do not tell us what she thought
Part 420
or what she did during the days when Thor
Part 421
was away.
Part 422
They do not give her a voice in the
Part 423
major poems.
Part 424
She is named, Sif .
Part 425
And she is described, gold haired
Part 426
and that is, for the most part
Part 427
what the texts give us.
Part 428
What they do tell us, in clear and lingering
Part 429
detail, is what happened to her one night.
Part 430
While she slept, in the deep middle of the
Part 431
night, in her own hall, in the long quiet
Part 432
of Asgard, someone came to her.
Part 433
The someone, a figure we will meet properly
Part 434
in the next chapter, moved very quietly.
Part 435
The figure approached the bed where she lay.
Part 436
The figure leaned over her, in the dark
Part 437
while she went on breathing in the rhythm of
Part 438
sleep.
Part 439
And the figure cut.
Part 440
He cut her hair.
Part 441
All of it.
Part 442
The Old Norse verb the surviving sources use
Part 443
skera, means to cut or to shave.
Part 444
And the texts say he shaved off all of
Part 445
it.
Part 446
The gold fell in long heavy strands
Part 447
in the dark, onto the floor of the hall.
Part 448
What is consistent across every surviving telling is the
Part 449
central act.
Part 450
Sif, the wife of Thor, woke in the morning
Part 451
to find her hair gone.
Part 452
The Norse poets do not, in the surviving texts
Part 453
give us her reaction in dialogue.
Part 454
They do not let her speak the words anyone
Part 455
in such a moment might speak.
Part 456
They simply tell us, in the careful, restrained
Part 457
almost formal language the Norse used for the most
Part 458
painful moments, that she woke.
Part 459
And she found.
Part 460
And she was, in their phrase, unconsoled.
Part 461
She was a goddess.
Part 462
She was the wife of the strongest god in
Part 463
the pantheon.
Part 464
She was, by the standards of the old Norse
Part 465
world, untouchable.
Part 466
And someone had, in the night, come to her
Part 467
and taken from her the one thing the texts
Part 468
repeatedly tell us defined her.
Part 469
She did not speak, in the surviving texts.
Part 470
She wept.
Part 471
And when Thor came home, which he did
Part 472
eventually, as the texts always have him do
Part 473
returning from one of his long journeys
Part 474
and found his wife in her hall
Part 475
with her head bare, weeping, the response of the
Part 476
strongest god in the Norse pantheon was
Part 477
in its own way, exactly what one would expect.
Part 478
He went to find the figure who had done
Part 479
it.
Part 480
He had, the texts tell us, a fairly good
Part 481
idea of who that figure was.
Part 482
Because in the surviving Norse imagination, this kind of
Part 483
cruelty, this kind of small inexplicable malice
Part 484
this kind of cutting in the dark while someone
Part 485
slept, this was the work of one specific
Part 486
god.
Part 487
And every other god in Asgard knew it.
Part 488
In the next chapter, we meet him.
Part 489
We meet Loki.
Part 490
Chapter Three.
Part 491
Loki, the Trickster.
Part 492
I want to spend some time, in this chapter
Part 493
sitting with the figure of Loki
Part 494
because Loki is, more than almost any other figure
Part 495
in Norse mythology, a being who resists the simple
Part 496
descriptions one might want to apply to him.
Part 497
The modern English word for what Loki is is
Part 498
trickster.
Part 499
This is a useful word.
Part 500
And a true one, as far as it goes.
Part 501
Loki is a trickster.
Part 502
He plays tricks.
Part 503
He moves things around.
Part 504
He hides things.
Part 505
He pretends to be other than what he is.
Part 506
He lies, when lying serves him.
Part 507
He shape shifts.
Part 508
He laughs when no one else is laughing.
Part 509
He upends, again and again, what the gods of
Part 510
Asgard would have otherwise been able to settle into.
Part 511
But trickster is, in the modern English ear
Part 512
often a softer word than the Norse texts mean.
Part 513
The trickster of the modern imagination
Part 514
the figure in fables, the prankster, the funny uncle
Part 515
of a pantheon, is a figure of mostly
Part 516
harmless mischief.
Part 517
The trickster in the modern sense is someone you
Part 518
can, in the end, laugh along with.
Part 519
Loki is, sometimes, that figure.
Part 520
The Norse texts certainly let him be that figure
Part 521
when they want him to be.
Part 522
There are stories in the corpus in which Loki's
Part 523
tricks save the gods, or at least save them
Part 524
money, or rescue them from situations they could not
Part 525
have escaped on their own.
Part 526
In one of the more famous of these stories
Part 527
which we will arrive at, in its own
Part 528
time, in a later season, Loki turns himself
Part 529
into a mare in order to distract the great
Part 530
work horse of a giant builder.
Part 531
And the gods escape the giant's bargain because of
Part 532
it.
Part 533
The trick costs Asgard nothing.
Part 534
The trick produces, as a side effect
Part 535
the eight legged horse Sleipnir, which we met last episode.
Part 536
The trick, in the end, was good for the
Part 537
gods.
Part 538
But Loki is also, sometimes, something else.
Part 539
He is the figure who, in the surviving end of the world
Part 540
poetry of the Norse, the Vǫluspá
Part 541
leads the army of the dead against Asgard
Part 542
on the last day.
Part 543
He is the figure who, by the end of
Part 544
the surviving cycle of stories, has been chained to
Part 545
a stone in a cave, with a venomous serpent
Part 546
dripping poison onto his face, in punishment for crimes
Part 547
the gods could no longer overlook.
Part 548
He is the figure whose children, in the surviving
Part 549
genealogies, are the wolf that swallows Odin
Part 550
the serpent that fights Thor.
Part 551
And the half rotted woman who keeps the underworld of
Part 552
the dead.
Part 553
Loki is not, in the long view
Part 554
a harmless prankster.
Part 555
Loki is, in the long view, the agent of
Part 556
the gods' ending.
Part 557
This is the problem of Loki.
Part 558
He is both at once.
Part 559
He is the helpful trickster and the eventual enemy.
Part 560
The same being.
Part 561
The Norse texts do not, I think
Part 562
fully resolve this.
Part 563
They simply allow both to be true.
Part 564
Loki is one of the strangest figures in any
Part 565
mythology that has ever survived.
Part 566
The other gods of the north, Odin, Thor
Part 567
Freyr, Freyja, Týr, sit, more or less
Part 568
in the seats that mythologies usually have.
Part 569
The wise one.
Part 570
The strong one.
Part 571
The fertile one.
Part 572
The brave one.
Part 573
Loki sits in none of them.
Part 574
He is, in the surviving sources, not a god
Part 575
of anything in particular.
Part 576
He has no temples that we know of.
Part 577
He has no day of the week.
Part 578
He has no festival, no ritual, no farmer's prayer
Part 579
raised to him at the turning of the season.
Part 580
And yet he is everywhere in the stories.
Part 581
Every great story of the Norse gods
Part 582
the building of Asgard's walls, the death of Baldur
Part 583
the binding of Fenrir, the recovery of Thor's hammer
Part 584
when it was later stolen, the very ending of
Part 585
the world at Ragnarǫk, has Loki at its
Part 586
center.
Part 587
He is the figure, the old commentators have suggested
Part 588
who makes the stories move.
Part 589
Without him, the gods would sit in their halls
Part 590
and feast forever.
Part 591
Nothing would happen.
Part 592
With him, every door is opened that the gods
Part 593
did not mean to open.
Part 594
Every wager is offered that the gods did not
Part 595
mean to take.
Part 596
Every crime is committed that the gods did not
Part 597
until then, know was possible.
Part 598
And he was, in the old sources
Part 599
blood brother to Odin.
Part 600
A blood brother.
Part 601
Sworn.
Part 602
Bound by oath.
Part 603
Who is he, in his nature?
Part 604
The surviving sources give us several pieces.
Part 605
They tell us he is not, properly speaking
Part 606
a god of the Æsir.
Part 607
He was born among the giants.
Part 608
His father was Fárbauti, Cruel Striker
Part 609
and his mother was Laufey, sometimes called Nál
Part 610
who may or may not have been a goddess.
Part 611
He was brought into Asgard, the texts tell us
Part 612
through a blood brotherhood with Odin.
Part 613
The two gods, in a moment not preserved in
Part 614
detail in the surviving sources, swore brotherhood by mingling
Part 615
their blood.
Part 616
From that moment, Loki was of the Æsir
Part 617
in the legal sense of the old Norse world.
Part 618
He could not be expelled.
Part 619
He could not be killed by the gods.
Part 620
He had the same standing among them as any
Part 621
born god.
Part 622
But he was not, ever, quite one of them.
Part 623
The texts return to this, again and again.
Part 624
Loki is in Asgard but not of it.
Part 625
Loki sits at the gods' tables but is not
Part 626
in some deeper sense, at the gods' table.
Part 627
Loki is a guest who never quite leaves.
Part 628
And he is.
Part 629
The texts are clear, a being of changing shape.
Part 630
This is one of the most consistent features of
Part 631
his character.
Part 632
He becomes a mare, as we mentioned.
Part 633
He becomes, in another story, a falcon
Part 634
borrowing the feather cloak of the goddess Freyja
Part 635
to fly between the worlds.
Part 636
He becomes, in still another story, a salmon
Part 637
trying to hide from the gods in a river
Part 638
after a particularly bad piece of work.
Part 639
He becomes, the texts tell us, a fly
Part 640
when he needs to be small enough to get
Part 641
into places he could not otherwise reach.
Part 642
He becomes an old woman, when he needs to
Part 643
weep beside a goddess's coffin and refuse to grant
Part 644
the tear that would release her from the underworld.
Part 645
The shapes are many.
Part 646
There is no surviving source that tells us
Part 647
in clear language, what Loki is in his most
Part 648
basic form.
Part 649
The texts do not give us a definitive description.
Part 650
He is described, when he is described at all
Part 651
as fair faced.
Part 652
Quick.
Part 653
Slim.
Part 654
With a slightly cruel mouth.
Part 655
Beyond that, the sources let his appearance shift with
Part 656
his moods.
Part 657
And he is, and this is the part
Part 658
of his character that matters most for tonight's episode
Part 659
moved, often, by a kind of malice that
Part 660
does not have an obvious source.
Part 661
The Norse texts are honest about this
Part 662
in a way the surviving Greek and Roman texts
Part 663
about their own gods sometimes are not.
Part 664
The Greek gods, when they are cruel
Part 665
are cruel for reasons.
Part 666
They want something.
Part 667
They are punishing someone.
Part 668
They are settling a score.
Part 669
Loki is not always like that.
Part 670
Loki, sometimes, does cruel things for no reason the
Part 671
text can fully explain.
Part 672
He does them, the surviving phrase often suggests.
Part 673
Because the chance presented itself.
Part 674
Because he saw a way to disturb something that
Part 675
was otherwise still.
Part 676
Because the cruelty was, in the moment, available.
Part 677
This is the Loki who, the surviving texts tell
Part 678
us, came to Sif's bed in the middle of
Part 679
the night.
Part 680
The texts do not give him a motive.
Part 681
The texts do not tell us he was angry
Part 682
at Sif.
Part 683
The texts do not tell us he had quarreled
Part 684
with Thor.
Part 685
The texts do not tell us he was acting
Part 686
on behalf of anyone else.
Part 687
The surviving phrase in Snorri's Prose Edda is
Part 688
in its bare Old Norse: Loki Laufeyjarson hafði þat
Part 689
gjört til lævísi at skera hár alt af Sif.
Part 690
In Anthony Faulkes's standard modern translation: Loki Laufey's son
Part 691
had done this out of mischief
Part 692
had cut off all of Sif's hair.
Part 693
Out of mischief.
Part 694
Til lævísi.
Part 695
Out of cunning malice.
Part 696
The Norse word lævísi carries a darker weight than
Part 697
the modern English mischief.
Part 698
It is closer to intentional harm done because one
Part 699
is the kind of being who does intentional harm.
Part 700
It is the malice of a creature who recognizes
Part 701
that another creature is sleeping safely, and who chooses
Part 702
in that moment, to do something to break the
Part 703
safety.
Part 704
This is the Loki we are dealing with tonight.
Part 705
He is not, in this story, the trickster who
Part 706
saves Asgard from a costly bargain.
Part 707
He is the trickster who, for no reason the
Part 708
surviving texts can fully explain, came in the night
Part 709
to the wife of his blood brother's son
Part 710
and cut from her head the gold hair she
Part 711
had been known by for as long as anyone
Part 712
in Asgard could remember.
Part 713
And then, when he was caught
Part 714
he had to set right what he had done.
Part 715
We turn now to the cutting itself.
Part 716
And to what followed.
Part 717
Chapter Four.
Part 718
The Cutting.
Part 719
I want to begin this chapter by telling you
Part 720
what the surviving sources do not give us.
Part 721
They do not give us, in any version of
Part 722
the story I have been able to find
Part 723
the scene of the cutting itself.
Part 724
Snorri Sturluson, who is by far our most detailed
Part 725
source for this story, gives us only the bare
Part 726
fact.
Part 727
Loki had done this out of malice
Part 728
had cut off all of Sif's hair.
Part 729
The act is named.
Part 730
And the chapter moves on.
Part 731
This is, in the way of Norse literature
Part 732
the customary restraint.
Part 733
The Norse poets did not, by and large
Part 734
linger in their most painful moments.
Part 735
They told you what had been done.
Part 736
And they trusted you, the listener, to do the
Part 737
rest of the imagining.
Part 738
The work of the imagination was understood to be
Part 739
the work of the audience.
Part 740
The poet's job was to give the bone.
Part 741
The audience's job was to put the flesh on
Part 742
it.
Part 743
So I will not, tonight, give you an invented
Part 744
scene of the cutting.
Part 745
I will not give you Loki's face in the
Part 746
dark, or Sif's breathing in the bed
Part 747
or the weight of the gold strands in his
Part 748
hand.
Part 749
The sources do not give them to me.
Part 750
And to invent them feels like a betrayal of
Part 751
the texts' chosen restraint.
Part 752
The story does not tell us why he did
Part 753
it.
Part 754
This is, we should pause here for a
Part 755
moment, one of the marks of these old
Part 756
stories that the modern reader sometimes finds difficult.
Part 757
We are used, in our novels and our films
Part 758
to motivation being supplied.
Part 759
A character does a thing.
Part 760
And the writer tells us why.
Part 761
The Norse poets did not work that way.
Part 762
They told us, often, what was done.
Part 763
They told us, often, what the consequences were.
Part 764
They very rarely told us what the person inside
Part 765
the act was thinking.
Part 766
The story is the act and the consequence.
Part 767
The interior is for the listener to fill in
Part 768
or to leave empty, as they prefer.
Part 769
So we are not told whether Loki cut Sif's
Part 770
hair out of envy, or out of malice
Part 771
or out of some quarrel with Thor that has
Part 772
not survived in the texts.
Part 773
Some of the old commentators have read it as
Part 774
a grudge against Thor specifically, Thor being the
Part 775
god most directly opposed to Loki's tricksterism
Part 776
the one most likely to threaten violence when Loki
Part 777
crossed a line.
Part 778
Others have read it as something more shapeless
Part 779
as the sort of small cruelty that some figures
Part 780
in some old stories, simply perform because the performing
Part 781
of it is its own kind of pleasure.
Part 782
We are not told.
Part 783
We may rest in that.
Part 784
What the sources do give us
Part 785
and what we can sit with
Part 786
is what happened next.
Part 787
Thor came home.
Part 788
He had been away.
Part 789
The surviving accounts do not specify where he had
Part 790
been, in this particular story.
Part 791
Thor was often away.
Part 792
The work of being Thor was, in large part
Part 793
the work of going out, of taking the
Part 794
chariot of goats and the hammer not yet his and crossing the
Part 795
long roads between the worlds, dealing with whatever needed
Part 796
to be dealt with along the way.
Part 797
The defense of Asgard, in the old Norse imagination
Part 798
was not a passive thing.
Part 799
It was the work of the strongest god to
Part 800
go, again and again, out into the dark places.
Part 801
And to come back.
Part 802
He came back, the surviving sources tell us.
Part 803
And he found his wife in her hall.
Part 804
Her hair was gone.
Part 805
She was, in the Norse phrase, unconsoled.
Part 806
The word in the original is something close to
Part 807
that, óhuggat, uncomforted, not yet able to be
Part 808
settled.
Part 809
She was, in her own hall, in her own
Part 810
life, in a state from which the ordinary rhythms
Part 811
of being her had been broken.
Part 812
The wife of the strongest god in the pantheon
Part 813
sitting in her own hall, with her head bare
Part 814
was a sight that, the surviving texts make
Part 815
very clear, none of the gods of Asgard
Part 816
had seen before.
Part 817
Thor asked her what had happened.
Part 818
She told him.
Part 819
The sources are spare on her dialogue.
Part 820
We do not have her exact words preserved.
Part 821
What we have, in the structure of the narrative
Part 822
is the shape of her telling.
Part 823
She told him what she could tell him.
Part 824
She told him that someone had come to her
Part 825
in the night.
Part 826
She told him what they had done.
Part 827
She named, by all surviving indications, the figure she
Part 828
suspected.
Part 829
She would not have had to look hard.
Part 830
Every god in Asgard.
Part 831
By every surviving account, would have known.
Part 832
It was Loki.
Part 833
And Thor, the texts tell us in plain
Part 834
and unguarded language, went to find him.
Part 835
This is the moment in the story I want
Part 836
to slow down on, because it is one of
Part 837
the more affecting moments in all of Norse mythology.
Part 838
And the surviving Norse sources do something with it
Part 839
that I find, even at a thousand years' distance
Part 840
very moving.
Part 841
Thor caught Loki.
Part 842
The catching itself is not described in detail.
Part 843
The texts give us the bare fact.
Part 844
Thor went, Thor found him, Thor caught him.
Part 845
The implication, in the way the sources tell it
Part 846
is that Loki did not run very hard.
Part 847
He may have tried to talk his way out
Part 848
in his customary fashion.
Part 849
He may have offered explanations.
Part 850
He may have laughed, the way he often did
Part 851
when caught doing what he had done.
Part 852
The surviving phrase suggests that whatever Loki tried
Part 853
it did not work for very long.
Part 854
Thor, and here I will paraphrase Snorri carefully
Part 855
because the passage matters, Thor would have broken
Part 856
every bone in Loki's body, then and there
Part 857
if Loki had not been very quick about offering
Part 858
an alternative.
Part 859
The phrase Snorri uses is, in Faulkes's standard translation:
Part 860
Thor caught Loki.
Part 861
And he would have broken every bone in his
Part 862
body, except that he swore an oath.
Part 863
Read the sentence again.
Part 864
He would have broken every bone in his body
Part 865
except that he swore an oath.
Part 866
This is, in the Norse imagination, the very edge
Part 867
of what Thor was capable of.
Part 868
The strongest god, in the moment of finding the
Part 869
figure who had cut his wife's hair, was
Part 870
by the sources' explicit testimony, about to dismember
Part 871
him, in his own body, slowly and completely.
Part 872
Not kill him.
Part 873
Killing would have been easier.
Part 874
Thor was, in this moment, in the kind of
Part 875
fury that would have made him take Loki apart
Part 876
bone by bone, while Loki was still alive to
Part 877
feel it.
Part 878
The oath stopped him.
Part 879
Loki swore, quickly, urgently, in the way one
Part 880
swears when one is about to be unmade
Part 881
that he would set right what he had done.
Part 882
He would not, by any of his own arts
Part 883
be able to give Sif her hair back;
Part 884
the hair was gone.
Part 885
And the gold of it lay on the floor
Part 886
of her hall.
Part 887
And even Loki could not make a goddess's own
Part 888
hair grow back overnight.
Part 889
But he swore, and this is the central
Part 890
pivot of the story, that he would get
Part 891
the dwarves, the great metal workers of Svartalfheim
Part 892
the most skilled smiths in the nine worlds
Part 893
to make her a new head of hair
Part 894
of true gold, that would grow on her head
Part 895
as if it had always been there.
Part 896
Thor accepted the oath.
Part 897
He did not, the sources tell us
Part 898
let Loki out of his sight until the work
Part 899
was done.
Part 900
He did not break his bones.
Part 901
He did not unmake him.
Part 902
He stood, the surviving accounts suggest, and watched Loki
Part 903
gather himself, and watched him prepare to descend to
Part 904
the underground country where the dwarves worked.
Part 905
And let him go on the condition that he
Part 906
would return with what he had promised.
Part 907
This is the cutting, and what came after.
Part 908
A small cruelty.
Part 909
A great wrath.
Part 910
An oath.
Part 911
And the beginning of a long journey down
Part 912
into the dark places of the world
Part 913
where the substances that became the great treasures of
Part 914
Asgard were waiting to be made.
Part 915
We follow Loki, now, down into Svartalfheim.
Part 916
Chapter Five.
Part 917
Down to Svartalfheim.
Part 918
The dwarves, in the Norse imagination, lived underground.
Part 919
This is, on first encounter, a familiar enough idea.
Part 920
Most cultures that knew metal working knew that the substances
Part 921
metal workers worked with came from underground.
Part 922
Iron from the iron mines.
Part 923
Copper from the copper mines.
Part 924
Gold, often, from the deep beds of rivers or
Part 925
from the seams of certain mountains.
Part 926
To work metal was.
Part 927
In some sense, to bring up what had been
Part 928
buried.
Part 929
The Norse, like many of their neighbors
Part 930
put this into mythological form.
Part 931
They imagined a people whose entire life took place
Part 932
underground.
Part 933
A people who had been born in the dark
Part 934
who lived in the dark, who worked in the
Part 935
dark.
Part 936
A people who had become, by long habit and
Part 937
by the patience of generations, the greatest metal workers any
Part 938
of the worlds knew.
Part 939
These were the dwarves.
Part 940
The name in Old Norse is dvergar.
Part 941
Singular dvergr.
Part 942
The word is related, distantly, to the modern English
Part 943
dwarf, and carries roughly the same meaning.
Part 944
The dwarves were, in the Norse imagination
Part 945
short of stature, broad of shoulder, long of beard
Part 946
and, most consistently, very
Part 947
very skilled.
Part 948
Their realm was called Svartalfheim.
Part 949
We mentioned it briefly, in the first episode of
Part 950
this season.
Part 951
Svart alf heim.
Part 952
Black elf home.
Part 953
The home of the dark elves.
Part 954
The Norse, in some of their sources
Part 955
conflated dwarves with the dark elves
Part 956
a related group of underground beings, often referred to
Part 957
in the same breath, sometimes as if they were
Part 958
the same people.
Part 959
The scholarly consensus, today, is that the Norse themselves
Part 960
were not always clear on the distinction.
Part 961
Sometimes dwarves and dark elves were two different peoples.
Part 962
Sometimes they were one.
Part 963
The sources are, on this point, comfortable with the
Part 964
ambiguity.
Part 965
What is consistent is the geography.
Part 966
Svartalfheim was beneath the worlds of the surface.
Part 967
To go there, one descended.
Part 968
Svartalfheim, sometimes called Niðavellir in the older Eddic
Part 969
poems, sometimes called simply "the dwarf realm"
Part 970
sits in the Norse cosmology beneath Midgard.
Part 971
Below the world of men.
Part 972
Beneath the roots of the world tree.
Part 973
It is one of the nine worlds.
Part 974
Though the old sources do not always agree on
Part 975
its exact placement among them.
Part 976
Some texts treat it as part of the same
Part 977
vast underground that contains Helheim, the realm of the
Part 978
dead.
Part 979
Some treat it as a separate underground entirely.
Part 980
The poets did not, in this matter
Part 981
take great pains to be consistent.
Part 982
The image they meant to convey was simpler than
Part 983
a map.
Part 984
Down.
Part 985
Beneath the surface.
Part 986
In the dark.
Part 987
Where the things that the gods used were made.
Part 988
The dwarves themselves, in the surviving accounts
Part 989
are an old people.
Part 990
The Prose Edda, in Snorri Sturluson's telling
Part 991
says they were born, or, in some readings
Part 992
that they grew, from the body of Ymir
Part 993
the first giant, after the gods slew him at
Part 994
the beginning of the world.
Part 995
From his flesh, the maggots.
Part 996
And from those maggots, the dwarves.
Part 997
The texts give the impression of a people who
Part 998
had been in the world from very nearly its
Part 999
beginning.
Part 1000
Older than the gods, perhaps, in a certain sense
Part 1001
or at least as old.
Part 1002
Old, in any case, in the way that very
Part 1003
old craftsmen are old.
Part 1004
They had been making things, in their underground halls
Part 1005
for as long as anyone could remember.
Part 1006
And what they made, no one else could make.
Part 1007
Loki, the surviving sources tell us, went to Svartalfheim.
Part 1008
The journey is not described in detail.
Part 1009
The Norse poets, again, gave us the bare structure.
Part 1010
Loki went down.
Part 1011
He went to the dwarves.
Part 1012
He found, in particular, a group of dwarves called
Part 1013
the Sons of Ivaldi, Ívalda synir in the
Part 1014
Old Norse.
Part 1015
They were.
Part 1016
By every surviving account, among the finest of the
Part 1017
dwarven smiths.
Part 1018
Their forge was old.
Part 1019
Their craft was the kind that had been passed
Part 1020
from father to son and son to son for
Part 1021
as long as any of them could remember.
Part 1022
To go to them was to go to the
Part 1023
experts.
Part 1024
I want to spend a moment, before we follow
Part 1025
Loki into their forge, sitting with the picture of
Part 1026
Svartalfheim as the Norse imagined it.
Part 1027
Because the picture is, in its way
Part 1028
one of the most affecting in all of Norse
Part 1029
cosmology.
Part 1030
Imagine a vast underground country.
Part 1031
There is no sky.
Part 1032
Where the sky should be, there is rock.
Part 1033
The rock is dark.
Part 1034
And it is high.
Part 1035
And it forms the ceiling of the world.
Part 1036
In some places the rock is broken
Part 1037
and small openings let in, far above
Part 1038
the faintest glimpse of starlight from the world above.
Part 1039
But these are rare.
Part 1040
For the most part, the country is lit by
Part 1041
its own light, by the amber glow of
Part 1042
forges, by the orange flicker of furnaces
Part 1043
by the patient steady light of metal being worked.
Part 1044
The country is full of sound.
Part 1045
Hammering.
Part 1046
The slow steady wheeze of bellows.
Part 1047
The hiss of metal being quenched in water.
Part 1048
The voices of dwarves, calling to each other across
Part 1049
the great halls, in a language the surface peoples
Part 1050
did not always understand.
Part 1051
The country has a rhythm.
Part 1052
It works.
Part 1053
There are no women in the surviving accounts.
Part 1054
The dwarves of Svartalfheim are described, in every Norse
Part 1055
source I have been able to find
Part 1056
as men.
Part 1057
The texts do not tell us how this is
Part 1058
possible.
Part 1059
They do not tell us how the dwarves reproduce.
Part 1060
They simply tell us that the dwarves are who
Part 1061
they are.
Part 1062
And that they are very many.
Part 1063
And that they have been working their craft for
Part 1064
as long as anyone in the worlds above has
Part 1065
been able to remember.
Part 1066
It is a country, in some ways
Part 1067
of nothing but work.
Part 1068
This is the world Loki entered.
Part 1069
He came, the surviving sources tell us
Part 1070
with a request.
Part 1071
He came with the memory of his blood brother's son
Part 1072
standing over him, ready to take him apart.
Part 1073
He came with the gold of Sif's hair, perhaps
Part 1074
gathered in some fold of his cloak .
Part 1075
Though the sources do not specify whether he brought
Part 1076
the original hair or simply came with the need.
Part 1077
He came with what he had to offer the
Part 1078
dwarves in exchange.
Part 1079
He came, in particular, with his own cunning.
Part 1080
Because Loki, by the time he reached the Sons
Part 1081
of Ivaldi, had already had time to think.
Part 1082
Whatever bargain he struck with them
Part 1083
whatever the dwarves asked for, whatever Loki gave them
Part 1084
or promised them, the surviving sources do not
Part 1085
specify.
Part 1086
Snorri does not tell us what Loki paid.
Part 1087
The Sons of Ivaldi, the texts simply say
Part 1088
made the things Loki asked for.
Part 1089
They made them well.
Part 1090
They made, in particular, three things.
Part 1091
They made a head of hair for Sif.
Part 1092
Real gold, fine as silk, that would attach itself
Part 1093
to her head and grow there as if it
Part 1094
had always been there.
Part 1095
It would, the dwarves said, look like ordinary hair.
Part 1096
It would behave like ordinary hair.
Part 1097
The only thing about it that would be unordinary
Part 1098
was that it would be, in its substance
Part 1099
gold.
Part 1100
They made a ship.
Part 1101
Not an ordinary ship, a ship called Skíðblaðnir.
Part 1102
We will come to it in the next chapter.
Part 1103
And they made a spear.
Part 1104
The spear was called Gungnir.
Part 1105
We met it, in passing, last episode.
Part 1106
We will come to it too.
Part 1107
But before we look at the three gifts of
Part 1108
the Sons of Ivaldi, we should look at what
Part 1109
happened next.
Part 1110
Because Loki, having gotten what he came for
Part 1111
did not simply leave Svartalfheim and go home.
Part 1112
Loki, having gotten what he came for
Part 1113
did something else.
Part 1114
He decided to make a bet.
Part 1115
Chapter Six.
Part 1116
The Sons of Ivaldi.
Part 1117
Before we follow Loki into his bet
Part 1118
we should sit, for the length of this chapter
Part 1119
with the three gifts the Sons of Ivaldi made.
Part 1120
Because they are, individually, among the great treasures of
Part 1121
Norse mythology.
Part 1122
And they will each return, in this episode
Part 1123
in later episodes.
Part 1124
And in the long arc of the season
Part 1125
in ways that matter.
Part 1126
The first gift was the hair for Sif.
Part 1127
I have already described it, briefly, in the last
Part 1128
chapter.
Part 1129
It was made of true gold.
Part 1130
It was fine as silk, finer, perhaps
Part 1131
than any actual hair could be.
Part 1132
It was the kind of object that
Part 1133
in the Norse imagination, could only have come from
Part 1134
the patient skill of beings who had spent generations
Part 1135
learning to draw metal into impossibly thin strands.
Part 1136
The Sons of Ivaldi.
Part 1137
By every surviving account, knew how to do this.
Part 1138
But the hair had a quality beyond its substance.
Part 1139
When it was placed on Sif's head
Part 1140
the surviving sources tell us, it took root.
Part 1141
It attached itself to her scalp the way real
Part 1142
hair did.
Part 1143
It grew.
Part 1144
It moved in the wind.
Part 1145
It would, the dwarves promised, behave in every way
Part 1146
as her own hair had behaved
Part 1147
except that it would be, by its substance
Part 1148
gold.
Part 1149
She would, in time, be unable to tell the
Part 1150
difference.
Part 1151
The people who loved her would be unable to
Part 1152
tell the difference.
Part 1153
The hair would, by the time it was settled
Part 1154
on her head and had grown for a season
Part 1155
simply be her hair.
Part 1156
This is, I think, the most quietly remarkable of
Part 1157
the gifts.
Part 1158
The dwarves had not made a wig.
Part 1159
They had not made an ornament.
Part 1160
They had made a kind of replacement that
Part 1161
by some craft the Norse imagination did not fully
Part 1162
explain, had become indistinguishable from the original.
Part 1163
The cruelty Loki had done to Sif could not
Part 1164
in the strict sense, be undone
Part 1165
what is done in time cannot be unmade.
Part 1166
But the cruelty could be, in a way the
Part 1167
texts allow themselves to believe in
Part 1168
covered over.
Part 1169
The gold hair would grow.
Part 1170
Sif would have her hair again.
Part 1171
The wound, while it would always have happened
Part 1172
would not, after this, be a visible wound.
Part 1173
The second gift was a ship.
Part 1174
The ship was called Skíðblaðnir.
Part 1175
The name, in Old Norse, means roughly board bladed or
Part 1176
thin planked.
Part 1177
It comes from skíð, meaning a thin board or
Part 1178
wooden strip.
Part 1179
And from blað, meaning a blade or a leaf.
Part 1180
The name is descriptive: the ship was
Part 1181
the sources tell us, made of many thin pieces
Part 1182
of wood, fitted together with a skill so precise
Part 1183
that the seams were nearly invisible.
Part 1184
The ship had three remarkable qualities, all of which
Part 1185
the surviving sources preserve in some detail.
Part 1186
The first was its size.
Part 1187
Skíðblaðnir was, when fully extended, the largest ship in
Part 1188
the worlds.
Part 1189
It could carry, the sources say, all the gods
Part 1190
of Asgard, with all their gear, all their weapons
Part 1191
all their horses, all at once.
Part 1192
There was room for everyone.
Part 1193
The second was its winds.
Part 1194
Skíðblaðnir, the sources tell us, sailed always with a
Part 1195
favorable wind.
Part 1196
Whenever the ship's sails were raised, a wind would
Part 1197
come to fill them, from the right direction
Part 1198
at the right strength.
Part 1199
The ship did not, in the ordinary sense
Part 1200
need to wait for weather.
Part 1201
The weather came when the ship needed it.
Part 1202
The third was its most remarkable quality.
Part 1203
Skíðblaðnir could be folded.
Part 1204
Not folded as in collapsed.
Part 1205
Folded as in taken apart, into its many thin
Part 1206
pieces of wood, and folded together, as one might
Part 1207
fold a cloth, into a small bundle that could
Part 1208
be carried in a pouch.
Part 1209
The Sons of Ivaldi.
Part 1210
By every surviving account, had made a ship the
Part 1211
size of a great hall that, when not needed
Part 1212
could be carried in a man's hand.
Part 1213
This is the kind of detail at which modern
Part 1214
readers sometimes pause.
Part 1215
Snorri Sturluson did not.
Part 1216
He simply told us what the dwarves had made.
Part 1217
And let the audience marvel at it as they
Part 1218
would.
Part 1219
The ship was given, in the eventual distribution of
Part 1220
these gifts, to the god Freyr.
Part 1221
We will not meet Freyr in detail until later
Part 1222
in the season, he is the god of
Part 1223
the Vanir, the older order.
Part 1224
And he deserves his own episode.
Part 1225
Tonight it is enough to know that Skíðblaðnir went
Part 1226
to him.
Part 1227
And that he was, in the surviving accounts
Part 1228
much pleased.
Part 1229
The third gift was a spear.
Part 1230
The spear was called Gungnir.
Part 1231
We met Gungnir in the last episode.
Part 1232
It is Odin's spear.
Part 1233
The spear that never misses.
Part 1234
We will not repeat the description here in full
Part 1235
you can return to the last episode if
Part 1236
you'd like to sit with that gift again.
Part 1237
What is worth noting, in the context of tonight's
Part 1238
episode, is that all three of these things
Part 1239
the hair, the ship, the spear
Part 1240
were made by the same dwarves, in the same
Part 1241
forge, in what the surviving sources suggest was a
Part 1242
single visit.
Part 1243
The Sons of Ivaldi had, in the time Loki
Part 1244
was there, made three things of such craft that
Part 1245
any one of them would have been the achievement
Part 1246
of a lifetime.
Part 1247
They had made them, by all surviving indications, easily.
Part 1248
The forge was old.
Part 1249
The skill was deep.
Part 1250
The work, when it was their work
Part 1251
came out fine.
Part 1252
The first gift, the new hair of Sif
Part 1253
was, by some readings of the old text
Part 1254
not exactly hair at all.
Part 1255
The Prose Edda, in Snorri's account, calls it gold
Part 1256
drawn into threads so fine that they would grow
Part 1257
upon a head the way hair grew
Part 1258
and would settle when the head moved
Part 1259
and could not be told from real hair by
Part 1260
anyone who looked.
Part 1261
This is one of the small details that the
Part 1262
old sources tend to slip past quickly.
Part 1263
But that rewards a listener's attention.
Part 1264
Gold that grows.
Part 1265
Living gold.
Part 1266
The dwarves' work was not merely metal
Part 1267
it was metal that had been given, somehow
Part 1268
in their underground forges, a small portion of life.
Part 1269
The dwarves' three works, the hair, the ship
Part 1270
the spear, would each, in time
Part 1271
be given to a different god, and each god
Part 1272
would find that the gift suited him so precisely
Part 1273
it could only have been made for him alone.
Part 1274
The hair to Sif, by way of Thor.
Part 1275
The ship to Freyr, the god of fruitfulness
Part 1276
who needed the largest of all vessels and yet
Part 1277
could fold it like a cloth into a pocket.
Part 1278
The spear to Odin, of which there are stranger
Part 1279
things still to say.
Part 1280
The Sons of Ivaldi, in their underground country
Part 1281
had done in one sitting what most smiths of
Part 1282
any kind would not do in a lifetime.
Part 1283
Loki took the three gifts.
Part 1284
He thanked the dwarves, presumably, in whatever way Loki
Part 1285
thanked anyone.
Part 1286
He prepared, presumably, to leave Svartalfheim and return to
Part 1287
the upper world, where his blood brother's son was waiting
Part 1288
to see what he had brought.
Part 1289
But Loki, and this is the moment that
Part 1290
turns the whole story, did not
Part 1291
after receiving the three gifts
Part 1292
simply leave.
Part 1293
He went, instead, to another forge.
Part 1294
There were, in Svartalfheim, many dwarves.
Part 1295
The Sons of Ivaldi were not, by any means
Part 1296
the only smiths in the underground country.
Part 1297
There were others.
Part 1298
There were, in particular, two dwarves who were brothers
Part 1299
who had their own forge, who were known
Part 1300
among the dwarves who knew the trade
Part 1301
as smiths whose work was, by some accounts
Part 1302
the rival of the Sons of Ivaldi's.
Part 1303
Their names were Sindri, sometimes called Eitri.
Part 1304
And Brokkr.
Part 1305
Loki, with the three gifts of the Sons of
Part 1306
Ivaldi already in his keeping, went to find them.
Part 1307
The reason he went is the substance of the
Part 1308
next chapter.
Part 1309
The reason he went is, though Loki himself
Part 1310
may not have known it at the time
Part 1311
the reason this entire episode exists.
Part 1312
We meet the brothers now.
Part 1313
Chapter Seven.
Part 1314
The Wager, Loki Bets His Head.
Part 1315
Sindri and Brokkr.
Part 1316
These are the two names that, by the end
Part 1317
of the Norse mythological corpus, are bound up forever
Part 1318
with the hammer of Thor.
Part 1319
Without them, without the strange brothers
Part 1320
working in their forge somewhere in the deep underground
Part 1321
of Svartalfheim, there would be no Mjǫllnir.
Part 1322
The hammer that defended Asgard against the giants
Part 1323
that called down lightning in the surviving stories
Part 1324
that returned to the thrower's hand, that was the
Part 1325
great weapon of the Norse cosmos, would not
Part 1326
in the Norse imagination
Part 1327
exist.
Part 1328
Sindri and Brokkr are the reason it does.
Part 1329
A brief note on the names, before we go
Part 1330
further.
Part 1331
Snorri Sturluson, in chapter 35 of his Skáldskaparmál
Part 1332
the chapter that is our principal source for this
Part 1333
whole story, gives the brother's name as Eitri.
Part 1334
Eit ri.
Part 1335
The word in Old Norse means, roughly
Part 1336
poison worker or the venomous one.
Part 1337
Though the meaning is debated.
Part 1338
Other sources in the surviving Norse corpus
Part 1339
including the Eddic poem Hyndluljóð and certain references in
Part 1340
the Vǫluspá, give the same figure as Sindri.
Part 1341
Sin dri.
Part 1342
A name that may relate to cinder or spark.
Part 1343
The scholarly consensus today is that Sindri and Eitri
Part 1344
are two names for the same dwarf.
Part 1345
And that the Norse tradition itself did not always
Part 1346
settle which name was canonical.
Part 1347
I will, for clarity, use Sindri in tonight's narration
Part 1348
but you should know, if you read the
Part 1349
original sources, that Eitri is the same dwarf
Part 1350
working at the same forge, on the same gifts.
Part 1351
Brokkr, by all surviving accounts, is the second brother.
Part 1352
The bellows man.
Part 1353
The one who does, in the story to come
Part 1354
most of the physical work.
Part 1355
The name in Old Norse means, roughly, badger.
Part 1356
Whether this is meant as a description of his
Part 1357
appearance, or his temperament, or his way of moving
Part 1358
the sources do not specify.
Part 1359
Loki came to their forge.
Part 1360
The surviving accounts do not describe the forge in
Part 1361
detail.
Part 1362
We are left to imagine it.
Part 1363
A stone room, probably.
Part 1364
A hearth at one end, glowing amber.
Part 1365
A long iron anvil.
Part 1366
Bellows worked by hand.
Part 1367
Heaps of raw metal, gold, iron, silver
Part 1368
stacked along the walls.
Part 1369
The two brothers, working in the close concentration that
Part 1370
all skilled craft requires, in the long low light.
Part 1371
Loki entered, the texts tell us.
Part 1372
He praised, in passing, the things the Sons of
Part 1373
Ivaldi had just made for him.
Part 1374
He may have shown the brothers the gifts.
Part 1375
The accounts are not specific.
Part 1376
What is consistent is the central act.
Part 1377
Loki, having received three treasures from one group of
Part 1378
dwarves, came to a second group of dwarves
Part 1379
and proposed a contest.
Part 1380
He said, and I am paraphrasing
Part 1381
because Snorri does not give us the exact dialogue
Part 1382
I do not believe you brothers can make
Part 1383
three gifts as fine as the gifts I have
Part 1384
just received from the Sons of Ivaldi.
Part 1385
He said this knowing, perhaps, that the brothers had
Part 1386
a reputation.
Part 1387
He said this, perhaps, because he wanted to see
Part 1388
what would happen.
Part 1389
He said this, perhaps, because Loki was Loki.
Part 1390
And the chance to set one set of dwarves
Part 1391
against another set of dwarves was the kind of
Part 1392
thing he found, in his nature
Part 1393
irresistible.
Part 1394
The brothers, as Loki may or may not have
Part 1395
predicted, took the bait.
Part 1396
Brokkr, the surviving sources tell us, replied immediately.
Part 1397
He said, in essence, We can do better.
Part 1398
My brother can do better.
Part 1399
We can make three gifts that will make the
Part 1400
Sons of Ivaldi look like apprentices.
Part 1401
Loki said, Very well.
Part 1402
I will bet you that you cannot.
Part 1403
Brokkr asked what he was willing to wager.
Part 1404
This is the moment that, more than any other
Part 1405
in the story, marks Loki as the figure he
Part 1406
is.
Part 1407
Because a more cautious being, and almost every
Part 1408
being in the Norse mythological corpus was a more
Part 1409
cautious being than Loki, would have wagered something
Part 1410
small.
Part 1411
Something concrete.
Part 1412
Some piece of gold he could afford to lose.
Part 1413
Some object whose loss would not, by any reasonable
Part 1414
measure, be ruinous.
Part 1415
Loki, instead, wagered his head.
Part 1416
The surviving phrase, in Old Norse, is unambiguous.
Part 1417
Loki veðjaði höfði sínu.
Part 1418
Loki wagered his head.
Part 1419
If the brothers could not make three gifts finer
Part 1420
than the gifts of the Sons of Ivaldi
Part 1421
Loki said, he would keep his head.
Part 1422
If they could, if the brothers' work was
Part 1423
judged by the gods of Asgard to be greater
Part 1424
than the Sons of Ivaldi's, then the brothers
Part 1425
could have Loki's head, to do with as they
Part 1426
pleased.
Part 1427
We should sit, here, for a moment
Part 1428
with the strangeness of what Loki has just done.
Part 1429
He has wagered his head.
Part 1430
Not, as we sometimes hear the phrase used
Part 1431
today, as a manner of speaking.
Part 1432
He has actually, in the literal terms of the
Part 1433
surviving story, said: if these brothers make a better
Part 1434
thing than the sons of Ivaldi, you may take
Part 1435
my head from my shoulders.
Part 1436
And the brothers have accepted.
Part 1437
The work will be done.
Part 1438
And at the end of it, three gifts will
Part 1439
be judged against three gifts, and one wager will
Part 1440
be lost, and one head will be taken.
Part 1441
This is the kind of thing that
Part 1442
in the Norse stories, happens often enough that we
Part 1443
should pay attention to it.
Part 1444
The wager that is too high.
Part 1445
The bet that should not have been offered.
Part 1446
The oath that, once spoken, cannot be unspoken.
Part 1447
The Norse gods, in the surviving sources
Part 1448
are again and again caught by these
Part 1449
by promises they regret, by terms they did not
Part 1450
think through, by a single careless word that locks
Part 1451
the world into a path it cannot leave.
Part 1452
The old poets seem to have felt
Part 1453
on this matter, that the world ran on these
Part 1454
moments.
Part 1455
That every great story turned on a single ill considered
Part 1456
yes.
Part 1457
Why?
Part 1458
The surviving sources do not give us a clear
Part 1459
answer.
Part 1460
Loki had no obvious need to make such an
Part 1461
extreme bet.
Part 1462
He could have wagered a piece of gold
Part 1463
or a season's worth of work, or any one
Part 1464
of a thousand smaller things.
Part 1465
He wagered his head.
Part 1466
Some scholars have read this as evidence of Loki's
Part 1467
deep confidence in the Sons of Ivaldi.
Part 1468
He had just seen their work.
Part 1469
He had carried their three gifts in his arms.
Part 1470
He could not, in his own assessment
Part 1471
imagine that any other dwarves could surpass them.
Part 1472
The wager, in this reading, was the wager of
Part 1473
a man who believed he could not lose.
Part 1474
Others have read it differently.
Part 1475
Some have suggested that Loki, in his nature
Part 1476
was simply drawn to extremity.
Part 1477
That the chance to wager nothing of importance would
Part 1478
have bored him.
Part 1479
That only by wagering his head could he make
Part 1480
the contest feel real.
Part 1481
Still others, and this is the reading I
Part 1482
find most affecting, have suggested that Loki
Part 1483
on some level, was always a being who wanted
Part 1484
to be punished.
Part 1485
That across the long arc of the surviving Norse
Part 1486
stories, Loki kept doing things that would, eventually
Part 1487
lead to his own undoing.
Part 1488
That the wager of his head was
Part 1489
in some submerged way, an early instance of the
Part 1490
pattern.
Part 1491
Loki was, in this reading, always heading toward the
Part 1492
cave.
Part 1493
The cave was.
Part 1494
In some sense, what he was for.
Part 1495
The wagers, the cruelties, the descents
Part 1496
they were the steps along the road.
Part 1497
You may choose whichever reading you prefer.
Part 1498
The Norse texts, as ever, let several be true
Part 1499
at once.
Part 1500
What the texts do agree on, in full clarity
Part 1501
is what the brothers did.
Part 1502
Brokkr accepted the wager.
Part 1503
The brothers.
Part 1504
By every surviving account, began to work immediately.
Part 1505
They piled fuel into the forge.
Part 1506
They worked the bellows.
Part 1507
They drew out the raw metal they would be
Part 1508
using for the first of their three gifts.
Part 1509
They moved, in the practiced rhythm of long craft
Part 1510
to their stations.
Part 1511
And Loki, having staked his head on what
Part 1512
was about to be made, settled down to
Part 1513
watch.
Part 1514
Or so he pretended.
Part 1515
In the next chapter, we will see what Loki
Part 1516
actually did.
Part 1517
Chapter Eight.
Part 1518
The Fly at the Bellows.
Part 1519
I want to read you, slowly, the central passage
Part 1520
of the story.
Part 1521
Because what happens in this chapter is
Part 1522
in some ways, the heart of the whole Norse
Part 1523
tradition's account of how Mjǫllnir was made .
Part 1524
And the surviving Old Norse text is unusually direct
Part 1525
in its telling.
Part 1526
Loki, having wagered his head, sat down in the
Part 1527
brothers' forge.
Part 1528
Sindri began the work.
Part 1529
He placed, on the fire, a pigskin
Part 1530
the source material for the first of his three gifts.
Part 1531
He turned to his brother Brokkr and said
Part 1532
in the surviving paraphrase, Pump the bellows.
Part 1533
Do not stop pumping the bellows.
Part 1534
Whatever happens, do not stop.
Part 1535
If you stop, all the work is lost.
Part 1536
Brokkr began to pump.
Part 1537
Sindri left the forge briefly, to fetch something.
Part 1538
Whether he was gone for long, the texts do
Part 1539
not specify.
Part 1540
While he was away, the work continued.
Part 1541
Brokkr at the bellows, in the rhythm of long
Part 1542
craft.
Part 1543
The pigskin in the fire.
Part 1544
The amber heat building.
Part 1545
And then, and here Snorri's text is
Part 1546
in the surviving original, unusually direct
Part 1547
Then a fly flew onto Brokkr's hand and stung
Part 1548
him.
Part 1549
The fly was Loki.
Part 1550
That is the text.
Part 1551
Sú var Loki.
Part 1552
The fly was Loki.
Part 1553
Snorri does not allow the reader any ambiguity.
Part 1554
He does not write some say the fly was
Part 1555
Loki or it was rumored that Loki had taken
Part 1556
the form of a fly.
Part 1557
He simply tells us, in the bare voice of
Part 1558
his prose, that this was what Loki had done.
Part 1559
Loki, who had wagered his own head on
Part 1560
the contest, had taken the form of a
Part 1561
fly, and entered the forge.
Part 1562
And was now actively trying to sabotage the work.
Part 1563
This is, I think, one of the strangest moments
Part 1564
in all of Norse mythology.
Part 1565
The figure who has bet his own head is
Part 1566
the same figure who is trying to make sure
Part 1567
he loses the bet.
Part 1568
The being who, by every rational calculus
Part 1569
should be wanting the brothers to fail
Part 1570
should be doing nothing, should be sitting on his
Part 1571
hands, should be hoping that the brothers' work crack
Part 1572
apart in the flames, is the one taking
Part 1573
active measures to ensure the brothers cannot succeed.
Part 1574
The texts do not explain this contradiction directly.
Part 1575
They simply let it stand.
Part 1576
Loki is Loki.
Part 1577
And Loki, in his nature, does not always act
Part 1578
in the way his interests would dictate.
Part 1579
Loki, sometimes, simply acts in the way that produces
Part 1580
the most interesting story.
Part 1581
The Prose Edda's telling of this moment is one
Part 1582
of the small comic masterpieces in the whole of
Part 1583
Norse literature.
Part 1584
The trickster, with his head wagered, with his life
Part 1585
literally on the line, with the work going against
Part 1586
him, and his only weapon, in the underground
Part 1587
forge of the dwarves, is to become an insect.
Part 1588
To become small enough that Brokkr cannot easily kill
Part 1589
him.
Part 1590
To bite, and bite, and bite again
Part 1591
in the hope that one of the bites will
Part 1592
land in the wrong place at the wrong moment.
Part 1593
And the work will go wrong.
Part 1594
The image, Loki as a fly
Part 1595
circling the head of a sweating dwarf at the
Part 1596
bellows of a fire that is making the most
Part 1597
powerful object ever to exist in the Norse cosmos
Part 1598
is the sort of image that the modern
Part 1599
reader sometimes laughs at.
Part 1600
And the laughter is, I think, intended.
Part 1601
The Norse poets had a sense of humor about
Part 1602
their own gods that the modern reader sometimes underestimates.
Part 1603
The trickster, brought low.
Part 1604
The cosmic stakes, balanced on the head of an
Part 1605
insect.
Part 1606
The dwarf, who has been forging for hours
Part 1607
finally pausing for one moment to wave away the
Part 1608
irritation .
Part 1609
And in that single pause, in that single moment
Part 1610
of distraction, the hammer's handle came out shorter than
Part 1611
it should have.
Part 1612
The whole long history of Mjǫllnir's short handle begins
Part 1613
with that fly bite.
Part 1614
The fly stung Brokkr's hand.
Part 1615
Brokkr did not, the texts tell us, stop pumping.
Part 1616
The sting was painful.
Part 1617
The pain went through his hand, up his arm
Part 1618
into the muscle of his shoulder.
Part 1619
But he had been told, by his brother
Part 1620
that whatever happened, he should not stop.
Part 1621
So he did not stop.
Part 1622
Sindri returned to the forge.
Part 1623
He looked at the work.
Part 1624
He took, from the fire, the first of the
Part 1625
three gifts.
Part 1626
It was, the texts tell us, a boar.
Part 1627
A boar made entirely of gold.
Part 1628
Bristles, hide, tusks, eyes, every part of it
Part 1629
gold.
Part 1630
The boar was called Gullinbursti.
Part 1631
Gold Bristled.
Part 1632
Gull in burst i.
Part 1633
We will come to it, in detail
Part 1634
in the next chapter.
Part 1635
Sindri then turned to his brother again.
Part 1636
Now we make the second gift, he said.
Part 1637
He placed, on the fire, gold itself.
Part 1638
Raw gold.
Part 1639
He told Brokkr again, in the same words:
Part 1640
Pump the bellows.
Part 1641
Do not stop, whatever happens.
Part 1642
If you stop, all the work is lost.
Part 1643
Brokkr began again.
Part 1644
The fly came back.
Part 1645
This time the fly stung Brokkr's neck.
Part 1646
The sting was, by Snorri's own phrase
Part 1647
half again as hard as the first
Part 1648
hálfu fastari in the Old Norse, the kind of
Part 1649
careful comparative ratio the Norse texts liked to put
Part 1650
on physical pain.
Part 1651
The pain went down into Brokkr's shoulder
Part 1652
into his back, into the muscle between his shoulder blades.
Part 1653
But Brokkr did not stop pumping.
Part 1654
He had been told.
Part 1655
He kept the rhythm.
Part 1656
Sindri returned.
Part 1657
He looked at the work.
Part 1658
He took, from the fire, the second of the
Part 1659
three gifts.
Part 1660
It was a ring.
Part 1661
A great gold arm ring, with, though Brokkr did
Part 1662
not know it yet, a quality that would
Part 1663
make it one of the most coveted objects in
Part 1664
Asgard.
Part 1665
The ring was called Draupnir.
Part 1666
The Dripper.
Part 1667
We met it last episode.
Part 1668
We will come back to it in the next
Part 1669
chapter.
Part 1670
Sindri then turned to his brother for the third
Part 1671
time.
Part 1672
The third gift would be the most demanding
Part 1673
he said.
Part 1674
The third gift would be the one that
Part 1675
if completed, would win them the wager.
Part 1676
He placed, on the fire, iron.
Part 1677
A great mass of iron.
Part 1678
He told Brokkr, this time more urgently than before:
Part 1679
Pump the bellows.
Part 1680
Do not stop.
Part 1681
Above all, on this one, do not stop.
Part 1682
If you stop, even for an instant
Part 1683
the gift will be ruined.
Part 1684
Brokkr began.
Part 1685
The fly came back.
Part 1686
This time the fly stung Brokkr's eyelid.
Part 1687
The bite, the surviving texts tell us
Part 1688
was the hardest of all.
Part 1689
The blood came immediately.
Part 1690
It ran down from Brokkr's eyelid, into his eye
Part 1691
blinding it.
Part 1692
He could not see.
Part 1693
Blood was pouring into his vision.
Part 1694
The fly was still on his eyelid, biting again.
Part 1695
Brokkr, who had been told, again and again
Part 1696
that he must not stop, let go of
Part 1697
the bellows for an instant.
Part 1698
Only an instant.
Part 1699
Long enough to lift his hand to his face
Part 1700
and wipe the blood from his eye.
Part 1701
Then he returned to the bellows.
Part 1702
He kept pumping.
Part 1703
But Sindri, when he came back to take the
Part 1704
third gift from the fire, looked at it and
Part 1705
frowned.
Part 1706
The third gift was a hammer.
Part 1707
The head of the hammer was.
Part 1708
By every surviving account, perfect.
Part 1709
The metal was the finest dark iron the dwarves
Part 1710
knew how to work.
Part 1711
The shape was the perfect shape for what the
Part 1712
hammer would need to do.
Part 1713
The weight was the correct weight.
Part 1714
The balance was the correct balance.
Part 1715
But the handle of the hammer was short.
Part 1716
Shorter than Sindri had intended.
Part 1717
Shorter, the surviving accounts tell us, than any normal
Part 1718
hammer's handle would have been.
Part 1719
The handle was short.
Part 1720
The sources are explicit about why, because of that
Part 1721
one brief moment when Brokkr had stopped pumping the
Part 1722
bellows.
Part 1723
The instant when the metal had cooled, just slightly.
Part 1724
The instant when, in the patient long heat of
Part 1725
forging, the metal had not been quite hot enough
Part 1726
to take the full length of the handle.
Part 1727
The handle was short.
Part 1728
Sindri was, the surviving accounts tell us
Part 1729
deeply unhappy about this.
Part 1730
He looked at his brother.
Part 1731
He saw the blood.
Part 1732
He understood, in the way two long working craftsmen come
Part 1733
to understand each other without speaking, that something had
Part 1734
happened.
Part 1735
He did not, in the surviving texts
Part 1736
blame Brokkr directly.
Part 1737
He simply observed that the hammer's handle was shorter
Part 1738
than he had wanted.
Part 1739
And .
Part 1740
Though he could not have known it then
Part 1741
that the imperfection would, in the end
Part 1742
become part of the legend.
Part 1743
The hammer was called Mjǫllnir.
Part 1744
We will come to it, in detail
Part 1745
in the next chapter.
Part 1746
We will come to its qualities, its weight
Part 1747
its return, its small concealability, in the chapter
Part 1748
after that.
Part 1749
But for now, let me leave you with the
Part 1750
image.
Part 1751
The forge in the deep.
Part 1752
The amber light.
Part 1753
The brothers, one with blood on his cheek
Part 1754
the other looking down at the three gifts laid
Part 1755
on the cooling stone.
Part 1756
And, somewhere, perhaps still in the forge
Part 1757
perhaps already gone, a fly, on whose head
Part 1758
in some way the dwarves did not yet know
Part 1759
the entire wager would now turn.
Part 1760
Loki, who had bet his head
Part 1761
and who had spent the bet itself trying to
Part 1762
lose it, slipped back to his own form
Part 1763
somewhere in the dark.
Part 1764
He gathered his things.
Part 1765
He prepared to go up.
Part 1766
He took the three gifts of the Sons of
Part 1767
Ivaldi.
Part 1768
He took the three gifts of Sindri and Brokkr.
Part 1769
And he made his way, the surviving accounts suggest
Part 1770
back up the long roads of Svartalfheim
Part 1771
toward the surface, toward Asgard, toward the judgment that
Part 1772
he knew was waiting.
Part 1773
He had, by his own assessment, won the bet.
Part 1774
The brothers' work was good, but the hammer
Part 1775
had a short handle.
Part 1776
The hair, the ship, the spear of the Sons
Part 1777
of Ivaldi were each perfect in their own way.
Part 1778
The brothers' work, while striking, had a visible flaw.
Part 1779
He may have been smiling as he climbed.
Part 1780
He did not yet know what the gods would
Part 1781
decide.
Part 1782
Chapter Nine.
Part 1783
Gullinbursti and Draupnir.
Part 1784
I want to slow down, in this chapter
Part 1785
and sit with the first two of the brothers'
Part 1786
three gifts.
Part 1787
Because they are, in their own right
Part 1788
two of the more remarkable objects in Norse mythology
Part 1789
.
Part 1790
And they have, in the surviving stories
Part 1791
lives of their own that extend far past the
Part 1792
moment of their making.
Part 1793
The first is the golden boar.
Part 1794
Gullinbursti.
Part 1795
The name in Old Norse means, literally, gold bristled.
Part 1796
Gull, gold.
Part 1797
Bursti, bristle.
Part 1798
The boar's distinguishing feature is that every bristle of
Part 1799
its coat, every hair on its body
Part 1800
is made of true gold.
Part 1801
The whole animal, in the surviving accounts, shines.
Part 1802
This shining is not, in the Norse imagination, ornamental.
Part 1803
The shining is functional.
Part 1804
The boar, the surviving sources tell us
Part 1805
gives off its own light.
Part 1806
Wherever it goes, the gold of its bristles glows
Part 1807
the way burning coals glow.
Part 1808
And the darkness around it lifts.
Part 1809
The boar can run through the deepest of nights
Part 1810
and create, around itself, a small moving zone of
Part 1811
illumination.
Part 1812
A traveler riding the boar would never
Part 1813
in the surviving Norse imagination, lack for light.
Part 1814
The boar has other qualities.
Part 1815
It can run, the texts tell us
Part 1816
faster than any horse.
Part 1817
It can run through air.
Part 1818
It can run on water, the surface
Part 1819
not under.
Part 1820
It is, in the long view, a creature whose
Part 1821
nature is to move at speed, in any element
Part 1822
in any condition, with its own light.
Part 1823
Gullinbursti was given, in the eventual distribution of the
Part 1824
gifts, to the god Freyr.
Part 1825
We mentioned him briefly in the last chapter;
Part 1826
he is the god of the Vanir
Part 1827
the other order of gods.
Part 1828
And we will meet him in proper detail later
Part 1829
in this season.
Part 1830
For now it is enough to know that the
Part 1831
boar went to Freyr.
Part 1832
And that Freyr, who was, in the surviving
Part 1833
accounts, much pleased, kept it as one of
Part 1834
his principal companions.
Part 1835
Whenever Freyr traveled, the boar traveled with him.
Part 1836
Whenever Freyr needed light, the boar gave it.
Part 1837
The boar appears, in the surviving Norse poems
Part 1838
in scenes you may not yet have read
Part 1839
but if you continue with this season
Part 1840
you will encounter it again.
Part 1841
There is a famous funeral scene, late in the
Part 1842
season's arc, in which Freyr arrives at the pyre
Part 1843
of a fallen god in a wagon drawn by
Part 1844
Gullinbursti, the boar's own light moving across the
Part 1845
dark gathering of mourners.
Part 1846
The boar is, in the surviving corpus
Part 1847
one of the small recurring figures whose presence the
Part 1848
poets liked to note.
Part 1849
Gullinbursti was there.
Part 1850
The light moved with him.
Part 1851
The second gift is the ring.
Part 1852
Draupnir.
Part 1853
We met it last episode.
Part 1854
I will not, here, repeat the description in full.
Part 1855
What is worth noting, in the context of tonight's
Part 1856
episode, is the surrounding circumstance.
Part 1857
The ring was made by Sindri and Brokkr
Part 1858
in the same forge, in the same single sitting
Part 1859
in which they made the boar and the hammer.
Part 1860
The ring was the second of the three.
Part 1861
The fly, Loki, stung Brokkr's neck during
Part 1862
the working of it.
Part 1863
And Brokkr did not stop pumping the bellows.
Part 1864
The ring came out, the surviving sources tell us
Part 1865
perfect.
Part 1866
Draupnir, you may recall, was a great gold arm ring
Part 1867
of the kind a chieftain would wear on his
Part 1868
upper arm.
Part 1869
Its distinguishing quality was that, every ninth night
Part 1870
eight identical gold arm rings dripped from it.
Part 1871
The wealth of the ring was, in principle, inexhaustible.
Part 1872
A king who wore Draupnir could give and give
Part 1873
and never empty his hoard.
Part 1874
The ring was given, in the eventual distribution of
Part 1875
the gifts, to Odin.
Part 1876
The Allfather.
Part 1877
The wanderer.
Part 1878
The figure who, in the surviving stories
Part 1879
was the principal ring giver of the gods
Part 1880
the patron of every chieftain in the human world
Part 1881
who held an open hand.
Part 1882
Draupnir, in Odin's keeping, became a kind of emblem
Part 1883
of the office of leadership itself.
Part 1884
To be a true leader, in the old Norse
Part 1885
imagination, was to be the kind of being from
Part 1886
whom gold could be expected to flow.
Part 1887
Odin kept Draupnir.
Part 1888
The ring appears, in the surviving stories
Part 1889
on several occasions, including, with particular weight
Part 1890
in a funeral scene we will arrive at much
Part 1891
later in the season, in which Odin lays the
Part 1892
ring on a fallen god's pyre.
Part 1893
And the ring is sent down with the body
Part 1894
and is, the texts tell us, given back to
Part 1895
Odin some time later by means I will not
Part 1896
spoil here.
Part 1897
The ring is a recurring object.
Part 1898
It has a life.
Part 1899
I want to note something about the pattern of
Part 1900
the gifts, before we move on to the hammer
Part 1901
in the next chapter.
Part 1902
The two gifts we have just discussed
Part 1903
Gullinbursti and Draupnir, were given, eventually
Part 1904
to two different gods.
Part 1905
The boar went to Freyr.
Part 1906
The ring went to Odin.
Part 1907
The third gift, the hammer, would go to Thor.
Part 1908
Three gifts.
Part 1909
Three gods.
Part 1910
One for each of the three principal male powers
Part 1911
of the surviving Norse pantheon, the god of
Part 1912
fertility, the god of wisdom, the god of thunder.
Part 1913
This is, scholars have long noted, not an accident.
Part 1914
The surviving sources, in their structure, were arranging the
Part 1915
gifts in such a way that the three great
Part 1916
male gods of Asgard each received an object suited
Part 1917
to their particular nature.
Part 1918
Freyr, the god of harvest, of fertility
Part 1919
of golden things growing in fields
Part 1920
received the golden boar that ran through the air
Part 1921
and gave its own light.
Part 1922
Odin, the god of wisdom, of long roads
Part 1923
of the open hand, received the ring that
Part 1924
gave and gave.
Part 1925
Thor, the god of thunder, of direct force
Part 1926
of the defense of Asgard, received
Part 1927
in due time, the hammer.
Part 1928
Each god got the object he was best suited
Part 1929
to wield.
Part 1930
Draupnir, the ring, is worth pausing on
Part 1931
for a moment longer.
Part 1932
The name, in the old Norse, means "the dripper."
Part 1933
Or, in a slightly different reading, "that which drips."
Part 1934
It is one of the rare objects in Norse
Part 1935
mythology whose name is, itself, a description of what
Part 1936
the object does.
Part 1937
Every ninth night, the Prose Edda tells us
Part 1938
eight rings of equal weight and equal beauty dropped
Part 1939
from it.
Part 1940
Every ninth night.
Part 1941
Without ceasing.
Part 1942
The ring was, in effect, a self replicating source of
Part 1943
wealth, a perpetual fountain of gold
Part 1944
in the form of more rings.
Part 1945
The reader of the modern world may find this
Part 1946
absurd.
Part 1947
The reader of the medieval north, who lived in
Part 1948
a world where wealth was a thing you could
Part 1949
weigh and where rings were one of the standard
Part 1950
forms in which it was carried, would have understood
Part 1951
it as a deeply serious image.
Part 1952
A king with Draupnir on his finger could
Part 1953
in nine months, become richer than any other king
Part 1954
who had ever lived.
Part 1955
The ring, in the surviving sources, was buried with
Part 1956
the god Baldur at his funeral
Part 1957
placed on his pyre as the boat burned.
Part 1958
The story, later, of Hermód's ride to the underworld
Part 1959
to retrieve it, is one of the saddest in
Part 1960
the whole of the Norse corpus.
Part 1961
But that story, tonight, is not ours.
Part 1962
Tonight we have one more gift left to forge.
Part 1963
In the next chapter, we come to the hammer
Part 1964
itself.
Part 1965
We come to Mjǫllnir.
Part 1966
Chapter Ten.
Part 1967
The Making of Mjǫllnir.
Part 1968
The hammer was made, as we said in the
Part 1969
previous chapter, in the same forge, in the same
Part 1970
single sitting in which the brothers made the boar
Part 1971
and the ring.
Part 1972
The hammer was the third and final gift.
Part 1973
It was the one Brokkr had been told
Part 1974
most urgently of all, that he must not stop
Part 1975
pumping for.
Part 1976
It was the one the fly bit Brokkr's eyelid
Part 1977
during.
Part 1978
And the blood ran into his eye.
Part 1979
And he stopped, for just an instant
Part 1980
to wipe his face.
Part 1981
The hammer came out of the fire with a
Part 1982
short handle.
Part 1983
I want to spend most of this chapter sitting
Part 1984
with the hammer itself, with its properties
Part 1985
with its qualities, with what it meant to the
Part 1986
Norse imagination.
Part 1987
Because Mjǫllnir is, by some distance, the most famous
Part 1988
of all the objects in Norse mythology.
Part 1989
It is the object that, more than any other
Part 1990
has survived into the modern world.
Part 1991
You can buy a small replica of it, today
Part 1992
in any airport shop in Reykjavík.
Part 1993
And from many shops in the world far from
Part 1994
there.
Part 1995
The hammer of Thor has, in its way
Part 1996
outlived even the religion that produced it.
Part 1997
What did the dwarves make?
Part 1998
They made a tool of dark iron.
Part 1999
The head of the hammer was, the surviving sources
Part 2000
tell us, square, though some accounts describe it
Part 2001
as more rounded, like a maul.
Part 2002
The metal was, by every account, the finest dark
Part 2003
iron the dwarves knew.
Part 2004
The weight of the head was such that no
Part 2005
being in Asgard but Thor could lift it
Part 2006
Thor's strength, in the surviving descriptions, was specifically the
Part 2007
strength required to swing the hammer.
Part 2008
The hammer demanded a god of his particular kind
Part 2009
to be useful at all.
Part 2010
The hammer had a name.
Part 2011
Mjǫllnir.
Part 2012
The etymology of the name is, even today, contested.
Part 2013
Some scholars derive it from a verb meaning to
Part 2014
crush or to grind, mala in some forms
Part 2015
and so read the name as Crusher or
Part 2016
Grinder.
Part 2017
Others derive it from a root meaning lightning or
Part 2018
flash, related to words for sudden white light in
Part 2019
some of the older Indo European languages.
Part 2020
Still others have proposed that the name is older
Part 2021
than any of these readings, that it comes
Part 2022
from a time before the Old Norse language existed
Part 2023
in its surviving form.
Part 2024
And that we can only guess what it once
Part 2025
meant.
Part 2026
What is consistent is that, in the surviving Norse
Part 2027
use of the word, Mjǫllnir is the hammer's proper
Part 2028
name.
Part 2029
It is treated, in the texts, the way the
Part 2030
name of a person is treated.
Part 2031
The hammer is referred to, again and again
Part 2032
as if it had a personality of its own.
Part 2033
The hammer had three principal qualities.
Part 2034
The surviving sources are clear about all three.
Part 2035
The first was its strike.
Part 2036
Mjǫllnir, the texts tell us, could strike as hard
Part 2037
as Thor wished it to strike
Part 2038
against any substance, any creature, any obstacle .
Part 2039
And the hammer would not break.
Part 2040
Not on the bones of the largest giant.
Part 2041
Not on the stones of the deepest mountain.
Part 2042
Not on the shell of the great serpent that
Part 2043
lived under the world's sea.
Part 2044
Mjǫllnir was, in this sense, indestructible.
Part 2045
Whatever Thor swung the hammer at, the hammer would
Part 2046
either pass through, or the hammer would shatter .
Part 2047
And the hammer never shattered.
Part 2048
Therefore the thing struck always gave way.
Part 2049
This was the simple math of the weapon.
Part 2050
The second was its return.
Part 2051
Mjǫllnir, the surviving sources tell us, could be thrown.
Part 2052
The hammer, when thrown, would strike whatever Thor had
Part 2053
aimed it at, striking with the same impossible
Part 2054
force, breaking whatever needed to be broken
Part 2055
and then, after striking, the hammer would return to
Part 2056
Thor's hand.
Part 2057
There was no need to retrieve it.
Part 2058
There was no need to walk over to the
Part 2059
corpse of the giant and pull the hammer out.
Part 2060
The hammer simply came back, as if it knew
Part 2061
the way home.
Part 2062
This is a more remarkable quality than it sometimes
Part 2063
seems.
Part 2064
In the long history of mythological weapons across the
Part 2065
world's traditions, the returning weapon is rare.
Part 2066
Most weapons in mythology, once thrown, must be retrieved.
Part 2067
The Norse, in giving Thor a hammer that returned
Part 2068
of its own accord, were giving him a weapon
Part 2069
that could be used again and again
Part 2070
in rapid succession, against multiple enemies.
Part 2071
The hammer was, in this respect, the perfect weapon
Part 2072
for a god who would be fighting alone
Part 2073
in distant places, against many.
Part 2074
The third quality was the most surprising.
Part 2075
Mjǫllnir, the surviving sources tell us, could be made
Part 2076
small.
Part 2077
Small enough that Thor could tuck it inside his
Part 2078
tunic, under his cloak, against his chest.
Part 2079
The hammer could become, in this concealed form
Part 2080
the size of a pendant.
Part 2081
It could be hidden completely.
Part 2082
Thor could walk through any hall, any settlement
Part 2083
any human village, with the hammer on him
Part 2084
and no one would know.
Part 2085
This too is a more remarkable quality than it
Part 2086
sometimes seems.
Part 2087
The hammer, in the modern imagination
Part 2088
in the comic books, in the films
Part 2089
is a great visible object, a thing always present
Part 2090
in Thor's grip.
Part 2091
The Norse imagination, by contrast, gave Thor a hammer
Part 2092
that could disappear.
Part 2093
The god, in the surviving stories, could move through
Part 2094
the world without the weight of the weapon being
Part 2095
apparent.
Part 2096
He could arrive in a hall as a stranger.
Part 2097
He could sit by a peasant's fire as a
Part 2098
guest.
Part 2099
He could pass through a giant's gate as a
Part 2100
merchant.
Part 2101
And only when the situation required it
Part 2102
only when the moment came for the hammer to
Part 2103
be drawn, would the hammer appear, full sized
Part 2104
in his hand.
Part 2105
This quality, scholars have noted, is one of the
Part 2106
reasons Thor figures so often, in the Eddic poems
Part 2107
in stories of disguise and infiltration.
Part 2108
The hammer being concealable made the god.
Part 2109
In some sense, mobile.
Part 2110
He could go where he wanted to go
Part 2111
in any form, and still be
Part 2112
at any moment, what he was.
Part 2113
And then there was the imperfection.
Part 2114
The handle was short.
Part 2115
The surviving sources are explicit about why this mattered.
Part 2116
Mjǫllnir's short handle meant, in the texts' language
Part 2117
that Thor could not, when swinging it
Part 2118
get the full leverage that a longer handle would
Part 2119
have given him.
Part 2120
He had to grip the hammer close to his
Part 2121
body.
Part 2122
He had to swing it with the strength of
Part 2123
his arm, rather than the leverage of a long
Part 2124
shaft.
Part 2125
The short handle made the hammer, in this respect
Part 2126
slightly less than what it could have been.
Part 2127
But here is the strange thing.
Part 2128
It did not, in any surviving account
Part 2129
prevent Thor from doing what he needed to do.
Part 2130
The hammer's short handle is referenced, throughout the Norse
Part 2131
corpus, mainly as a curiosity.
Part 2132
The dwarves regret it.
Part 2133
Sindri, when the gift is presented in Asgard
Part 2134
mentions it.
Part 2135
Brokkr is, in some surviving accounts, blamed for it.
Part 2136
But Thor, in the surviving texts, does not seem
Part 2137
to mind.
Part 2138
He takes the hammer.
Part 2139
He grips it where the handle is.
Part 2140
He swings it.
Part 2141
It strikes what he wants it to strike.
Part 2142
It returns to his hand.
Part 2143
It becomes small when he asks it to become
Part 2144
small.
Part 2145
The flaw, in the end, is more of a
Part 2146
story than a problem.
Part 2147
This is, I think, one of the quietly affecting
Part 2148
things about the whole story of Mjǫllnir's making.
Part 2149
The hammer is, by every objective measure
Part 2150
one of the great achievements of the Norse mythological
Part 2151
imagination.
Part 2152
It is the weapon that defends the world.
Part 2153
It is the tool by which the gods hold
Part 2154
the giants at bay.
Part 2155
It is the object whose presence, in the long
Part 2156
arc of the surviving stories, is the difference between
Part 2157
continued existence and the early arrival of Ragnarǫk.
Part 2158
And it has a short handle.
Part 2159
The flaw is part of the gift.
Part 2160
The gift is not less for having a flaw.
Part 2161
The flaw.
Part 2162
In some sense, is what makes the gift the
Part 2163
gift it became, a hammer that
Part 2164
by the texts' own account, was both perfect and
Part 2165
imperfect at the same time.
Part 2166
And that was, in any case, the greatest weapon
Part 2167
any of the gods had ever held.
Part 2168
A note on the name.
Part 2169
The most likely origin of Mjǫllnir, by the most
Part 2170
thorough modern philological work, is from an old Indo European
Part 2171
root meaning "to grind" or "to crush"
Part 2172
the same root that gives us the modern English
Part 2173
word "mill," and the German Mehl for flour.
Part 2174
And the Latin malleus for "hammer." Mjǫllnir
Part 2175
in this reading, is "the crusher." The thing that
Part 2176
grinds.
Part 2177
The instrument of the great mill that turns the
Part 2178
seasons, that breaks open the storm cloud, that strikes down
Part 2179
whatever stands across its path.
Part 2180
The connection between the hammer and the agricultural mill
Part 2181
is older, perhaps, than any of the stories we
Part 2182
are telling tonight.
Part 2183
Thor was, in the original old farmer's worship
Part 2184
the god of the field as much as he
Part 2185
was the god of the storm.
Part 2186
The same hammer that broke the giants' skulls was
Part 2187
the hammer that blessed the bride at a wedding
Part 2188
that blessed the field at sowing, that blessed the
Part 2189
harvest at the year's turn.
Part 2190
The hammer was, for the old Scandinavian farmer
Part 2191
who carved a small Mjǫllnir shape on a pendant and
Part 2192
hung it on a leather cord around his neck
Part 2193
of which the archaeological record has preserved over a
Part 2194
thousand examples across Scandinavia and the British Isles
Part 2195
not a weapon.
Part 2196
It was a protector.
Part 2197
A small piece of the storm god, carried at the
Part 2198
throat, against whatever the night might bring.
Part 2199
We turn now to the moment when the gifts
Part 2200
are brought back to Asgard.
Part 2201
And the gods sit down to judge them.
Part 2202
Chapter Eleven.
Part 2203
The Judgment of the Gods.
Part 2204
The surviving sources tell us that the brothers Sindri
Part 2205
and Brokkr followed Loki up out of Svartalfheim.
Part 2206
They brought their three gifts with them.
Part 2207
Loki brought the three gifts of the Sons of
Part 2208
Ivaldi.
Part 2209
The whole party, by the time it reached Asgard
Part 2210
was a procession, a trickster, two dwarves
Part 2211
six treasures.
Part 2212
They came to the gods.
Part 2213
The judgment, the surviving sources tell us
Part 2214
was to be made by three specific gods.
Part 2215
Odin, the Allfather.
Part 2216
Thor, the strongest.
Part 2217
Freyr, the god of the Vanir, who had joined
Part 2218
the Æsir's company after the war between the two
Part 2219
divine families.
Part 2220
These three sat in their high judgment seats
Part 2221
the texts tell us.
Part 2222
And the gifts were laid out before them.
Part 2223
And the dwarves and the trickster waited to hear
Part 2224
how the gods would decide.
Part 2225
The first set of gifts was the work of
Part 2226
the Sons of Ivaldi.
Part 2227
Sif's hair was presented.
Part 2228
Skíðblaðnir was presented, folded, perhaps, into a small
Part 2229
bundle of wood the size of a piece of
Part 2230
cloth, and unfolded, for the gods, to its full
Part 2231
size.
Part 2232
Gungnir was presented.
Part 2233
The gods looked at the three.
Part 2234
They were pleased.
Part 2235
Each gift, in its own way, was a wonder.
Part 2236
The hair, when laid on Sif's head
Part 2237
immediately took root and began to grow as ordinary
Part 2238
hair grew.
Part 2239
She wept again, the texts suggest.
Part 2240
But the weeping this time was different
Part 2241
the weeping of a being who has had a
Part 2242
wrong made right, rather than of a being who
Part 2243
has had a wrong inflicted.
Part 2244
The ship, when unfolded, was as large as the
Part 2245
texts had promised.
Part 2246
And the gods could see that it would carry
Part 2247
all of them with their gear.
Part 2248
The spear, when balanced in Odin's hand
Part 2249
felt to him, the texts suggest.
Part 2250
Though they do not give us Odin's exact words
Part 2251
like a continuation of his own arm.
Part 2252
The Sons of Ivaldi had made fine things.
Part 2253
Then the brothers Sindri and Brokkr presented their three
Part 2254
gifts.
Part 2255
Gullinbursti was led out.
Part 2256
The boar, the surviving accounts tell us
Part 2257
was put on its feet on the floor of
Part 2258
the hall.
Part 2259
And the light from its gold bristles immediately filled
Part 2260
the space around it.
Part 2261
The gods marveled.
Part 2262
Freyr, who would receive it, was particularly pleased.
Part 2263
The boar, the dwarves said, would run faster than
Part 2264
any horse, through air or over water
Part 2265
and would always give its own light.
Part 2266
Draupnir was placed in Odin's other hand.
Part 2267
The gods watched it.
Part 2268
The dwarves explained its property, that every ninth
Part 2269
night, eight identical rings would drip from it.
Part 2270
Odin, the texts tell us, ran his thumb along
Part 2271
the edge of the ring, and felt the weight
Part 2272
of it.
Part 2273
And was, the texts suggest, in the careful
Part 2274
way they had of suggesting Odin's feelings without naming
Part 2275
them, moved.
Part 2276
And then Mjǫllnir.
Part 2277
The brothers brought the hammer forward.
Part 2278
They laid it on the long table at which
Part 2279
the gods sat.
Part 2280
They told the gods what the hammer was.
Part 2281
They told the gods, with some embarrassment
Part 2282
that the handle was shorter than they had intended.
Part 2283
They explained, in the surviving accounts, why this had
Part 2284
happened, a fly had stung Brokkr's eyelid during
Part 2285
the forging.
Part 2286
And Brokkr had stopped pumping the bellows for an
Part 2287
instant to wipe the blood from his eye.
Part 2288
And the handle had emerged shorter than the design
Part 2289
had called for.
Part 2290
The gods looked at the hammer.
Part 2291
Thor, for whom the gift was intended
Part 2292
picked it up.
Part 2293
He felt the weight of it.
Part 2294
He felt the balance.
Part 2295
He gripped it where the dwarves had made the
Part 2296
grip, close to the head.
Part 2297
He swung it, gently, in the air of the
Part 2298
hall .
Part 2299
And the hall, the surviving accounts tell us
Part 2300
vibrated faintly with each swing, the way the air
Part 2301
vibrates when a great bell is rung but the
Part 2302
sound has not yet escaped.
Part 2303
The three judges conferred.
Part 2304
The conversation, in detail, is not preserved.
Part 2305
But the outcome is.
Part 2306
The three gods, Odin, Thor, Freyr, declared
Part 2307
unanimously, that the hammer was the greatest of the
Part 2308
six gifts.
Part 2309
Not because it was the most beautiful.
Part 2310
Not because it was the most ingenious.
Part 2311
But because, in their judgment, it was the gift
Part 2312
that would matter most in the long defense of
Part 2313
Asgard.
Part 2314
Their reasoning, the surviving texts give us, was simple.
Part 2315
The world of the gods was surrounded
Part 2316
on all sides, by the world of the giants.
Part 2317
The giants would, at some unknown future moment
Part 2318
come against Asgard in numbers no other god's weapon
Part 2319
could resist.
Part 2320
The hammer, the indestructible, returning, concealable hammer
Part 2321
was the only object among the six that could
Part 2322
in the long view, hold the giants back.
Part 2323
The ship was beautiful.
Part 2324
The hair was a wonder.
Part 2325
The boar gave its light.
Part 2326
The ring gave its gold.
Part 2327
The spear, in Odin's hand, was a marker of
Part 2328
fate.
Part 2329
But the hammer was, in the gods' assessment
Part 2330
the difference between Asgard's continued existence and its end.
Part 2331
The hammer was the greatest gift.
Part 2332
Therefore the brothers Sindri and Brokkr had
Part 2333
by the gods' unanimous verdict, won the wager.
Part 2334
Loki had lost.
Part 2335
Brokkr, the surviving texts tell us, immediately stepped forward.
Part 2336
He was, by every account, a dwarf of strong
Part 2337
feeling.
Part 2338
The fly had stung him three times.
Part 2339
He had pumped the bellows through pain and blood.
Part 2340
He had been told, by his brother
Part 2341
that the work demanded everything of him.
Part 2342
And he had given everything.
Part 2343
And now Loki had lost the bet
Part 2344
the bet Loki himself had proposed
Part 2345
and Brokkr had come to collect what he had
Part 2346
been promised.
Part 2347
He had come, the surviving texts tell us
Part 2348
for Loki's head.
Part 2349
We come, in the final chapter before goodnight
Part 2350
to what Loki did then.
Part 2351
Chapter Twelve.
Part 2352
Goodnight.
Part 2353
And the Hammer at Rest.
Part 2354
Loki, when he saw the verdict, did what Loki
Part 2355
always did.
Part 2356
He looked for a way out.
Part 2357
He did not, in the surviving accounts
Part 2358
try to deny the verdict.
Part 2359
The judgment had been unanimous.
Part 2360
The three gods had spoken.
Part 2361
The brothers had won.
Part 2362
By the terms of the bet
Part 2363
the terms Loki himself had set
Part 2364
Loki's head was now forfeit.
Part 2365
Brokkr was entitled, in the harsh law of the
Part 2366
old Norse wager, to take it.
Part 2367
But Loki, and this is the moment that
Part 2368
more than any other, defines his cunning, found
Part 2369
in the wording of the bet, a small crack.
Part 2370
He turned to the gods, the surviving sources tell
Part 2371
us.
Part 2372
And he said: I wagered my head.
Part 2373
I did not wager my neck.
Part 2374
The brothers may have my head.
Part 2375
But they may not have my neck.
Part 2376
The gods looked at him.
Part 2377
The cunning of the argument is, in its old
Part 2378
Norse form, sharper than it sometimes seems in modern
Part 2379
paraphrase.
Part 2380
Loki was pointing out that one cannot remove a
Part 2381
head without cutting the neck.
Part 2382
The two are joined.
Part 2383
The head, in any literal sense, includes the upper
Part 2384
portion of the neck.
Part 2385
To take the head is, necessarily, to take part
Part 2386
of the neck.
Part 2387
But Loki had only wagered the head.
Part 2388
The neck, even the small portion of neck
Part 2389
through which a beheading must pass, was not
Part 2390
by the strict terms, his to give.
Part 2391
If Brokkr cut into the neck, Brokkr would be
Part 2392
taking something he had not won.
Part 2393
The gods, the surviving texts tell us, considered this.
Part 2394
The argument was, in the old Norse legal sense
Part 2395
sound.
Part 2396
Loki had identified a real ambiguity in the terms.
Part 2397
The wager, as it had been stated
Part 2398
did not give Brokkr the right to cut into
Part 2399
the neck, and there was, in the strict
Part 2400
logic, no way to take the head without doing
Part 2401
so.
Part 2402
Therefore Brokkr could not, by the gods' judgment
Part 2403
have what he had won.
Part 2404
The gods sided with Loki.
Part 2405
I want you to sit with this for a
Part 2406
moment, because it is one of the more affecting
Part 2407
passages in the Norse corpus.
Part 2408
Loki had done a real wrong.
Part 2409
He had cut Sif's hair.
Part 2410
He had taunted the brothers.
Part 2411
He had wagered his head, and lost.
Part 2412
And now, in the moment the consequence was
Part 2413
meant to come down on him, he found
Part 2414
in the precise language of his own wager
Part 2415
a wriggle.
Part 2416
And the gods let him have it.
Part 2417
Why?
Part 2418
The surviving sources do not, I think
Part 2419
fully answer this.
Part 2420
Several readings have been offered.
Part 2421
Some scholars have suggested that the gods
Part 2422
in this moment, were not yet ready to let
Part 2423
one of their own be put to death over
Part 2424
a craft contest, that the relation between the
Part 2425
Æsir and Loki, complicated and ambiguous as it was
Part 2426
was not something they wished to dissolve over the
Part 2427
technicality of a bet.
Part 2428
Others have suggested that the gods admired the cunning
Part 2429
of the argument itself, that the Norse old law
Part 2430
tradition placed a real value on the kind of
Part 2431
sharp parsing Loki had just done.
Part 2432
And that to deny him his wriggle would have
Part 2433
been to deny the rules of their own legal
Part 2434
system.
Part 2435
Still others have suggested, more darkly, that the gods
Part 2436
knew Loki would, eventually, do worse
Part 2437
and that letting him off this once
Part 2438
in this small way, was the cost of keeping
Part 2439
him close enough to watch.
Part 2440
Whatever the reason, the gods sided with Loki.
Part 2441
Brokkr could not take the head.
Part 2442
We should sit with this for a moment.
Part 2443
This is, exactly, the sort of argument
Part 2444
that the trickster, in nearly every mythology in the
Part 2445
world, makes.
Part 2446
The letter of the agreement, held up against the
Part 2447
spirit of the agreement.
Part 2448
The literal word, used against the meaning.
Part 2449
The Norse poets, in their old way
Part 2450
seem to have admired this kind of legal cunning
Part 2451
even when it offended them.
Part 2452
They preserved many such moments, figures wriggling out
Part 2453
of impossible bargains by finding the small unsaid clause
Part 2454
the loophole, the technicality.
Part 2455
Loki was, in this single way, the patron of
Part 2456
every clever lawyer who has ever stood in any
Part 2457
court, anywhere, since the world began.
Part 2458
The Norse legal imagination, even outside of the mythological
Part 2459
texts, took these wrigglings seriously.
Part 2460
The Icelandic Grágás law codes, written down in the
Part 2461
centuries after the conversion to Christianity, are full of
Part 2462
careful parsings of exactly this kind.
Part 2463
What was promised, in the exact words.
Part 2464
What was withheld, by silence.
Part 2465
Where the boundary of an oath ran
Part 2466
when the oath had been spoken in a hurry.
Part 2467
The Norse, in their long Atlantic settlement
Part 2468
lived in a world where the precise word of
Part 2469
an agreement could mean the difference between life and
Part 2470
exile.
Part 2471
Loki's argument, in the story, would have been read
Part 2472
by a Norse audience not as cheating but as
Part 2473
a particularly fine specimen of the art they all
Part 2474
practiced.
Part 2475
He had read the contract.
Part 2476
He had found the gap.
Part 2477
He had walked through it.
Part 2478
And the gods, who lived by the same law
Part 2479
could not, in justice, refuse him the walk.
Part 2480
Brokkr was.
Part 2481
By every surviving account, angry.
Part 2482
He had been promised something.
Part 2483
And the something was being withheld.
Part 2484
And the withholding was, by the strict logic
Part 2485
of the law
Part 2486
sound.
Part 2487
He could not protest the verdict.
Part 2488
But he could do something else.
Part 2489
He could not take Loki's head.
Part 2490
But he could, the surviving accounts tell us
Part 2491
sew Loki's lips shut.
Part 2492
This is the strange compromise the story records.
Part 2493
Brokkr drew out, the surviving texts mention it
Part 2494
by name, an awl.
Part 2495
The awl was called Vartari.
Part 2496
The Old Norse word may relate to vörð
Part 2497
meaning watch or guard; the etymology is debated.
Part 2498
But the awl itself is named, in the texts
Part 2499
as if it were a person.
Part 2500
Brokkr took Vartari, the surviving sources tell us.
Part 2501
And he punched holes through Loki's lips.
Part 2502
He drew through the holes a strong leather thread.
Part 2503
He sewed Loki's lips shut, one stitch after another
Part 2504
while Loki, who could not, in the moment
Part 2505
refuse, since the alternative was the loss of his
Part 2506
head, stood and let it be done.
Part 2507
When the work was finished, Brokkr took the dwarf brother's
Part 2508
farewell of Asgard and went back down to Svartalfheim.
Part 2509
Loki, the surviving texts tell us, eventually tore the
Part 2510
thread out of his lips.
Part 2511
He was, of course, capable of doing so
Part 2512
the thread was leather.
Part 2513
And the lips of a god are not so
Part 2514
different from the lips of a man.
Part 2515
He was, after the tearing, free to speak again.
Part 2516
But the surviving Norse imagination, for the rest of
Part 2517
the corpus, treated this as a marking.
Part 2518
Loki had been silenced, once, for the work he
Part 2519
had done.
Part 2520
The silencing did not last.
Part 2521
But it had happened.
Part 2522
The trickster who had cut a goddess's hair had
Part 2523
had, in turn, his own mouth sealed.
Part 2524
The Norse, in their long view, kept this in
Part 2525
mind.
Part 2526
The hammer, Mjǫllnir, appears in many later Norse stories
Part 2527
beyond this one.
Part 2528
It is the hammer Thor used, again and again
Part 2529
to defend Asgard from the giants who threatened it.
Part 2530
It is the hammer he raised, in one of
Part 2531
the surviving Eddic poems, Þrymskviða, the Lay of
Part 2532
Thrym, to retrieve it from the giant Thrym
Part 2533
who had stolen it, in a story that ends
Part 2534
hilariously, with Thor in a bride's dress.
Part 2535
It is the hammer that, in the prophecy of
Part 2536
Ragnarǫk, he will use to kill the great serpent
Part 2537
Jǫrmungandr at the world's end, and after which
Part 2538
he will himself, the prophecy tells us
Part 2539
walk nine steps and fall.
Part 2540
But all of those stories are for other nights.
Part 2541
Tonight, the hammer is new.
Part 2542
The forge has gone cold.
Part 2543
The dwarves have been paid and have returned to
Part 2544
their underground halls.
Part 2545
Sif has her hair back.
Part 2546
Loki has his mouth back, sometime later
Part 2547
when the threads loosened and he could speak again
Part 2548
.
Part 2549
Though the poets do not record exactly when.
Part 2550
The gods of Asgard have their treasures.
Part 2551
And Thor, the red bearded one, the strongest of the
Part 2552
gods, the one who stood between the world of
Part 2553
men and whatever lay beyond it, has
Part 2554
at his belt, a hammer with a slightly short
Part 2555
handle and a power that no being in any
Part 2556
of the nine worlds could match.
Part 2557
It is enough.
Part 2558
It will do.
Part 2559
In the long arc of the surviving stories
Part 2560
across the rest of this season, and across every
Part 2561
Norse story we have not yet told
Part 2562
Loki's cruelty would grow.
Part 2563
He would do worse things than cutting Sif's hair.
Part 2564
He would do worse things than betting his head.
Part 2565
And the gods, who had let him wriggle out
Part 2566
of his head bet once, would not, in the end
Part 2567
let him wriggle out of the consequences forever.
Part 2568
But that is the long arc of the stories.
Part 2569
Tonight is not the night for it.
Part 2570
Tonight, the hammer is in Thor's hand.
Part 2571
Sif's hair has grown back, gold and fine
Part 2572
on her head.
Part 2573
And she is, by the surviving texts' account
Part 2574
consoled.
Part 2575
The gods of Asgard have, by the strange accident
Part 2576
of Loki's cruelty and Loki's wriggle, gained five great
Part 2577
treasures and one weapon.
Part 2578
The world is, for the moment, safer than it
Part 2579
was the day before.
Part 2580
The dwarves are back in their forge.
Part 2581
Loki is back among the gods
Part 2582
silent for a time, then speaking again.
Part 2583
And the hammer, the short handled hammer
Part 2584
the hammer the fly almost ruined, the hammer that
Part 2585
would, in the long view, hold off the end
Part 2586
of the world, is at rest by Thor's
Part 2587
side.
Part 2588
You may, sometime in the coming nights
Part 2589
want to come back.
Part 2590
The almanac will be here.
Part 2591
Episode four is coming next.
Part 2592
It is the story of a wolf.
Part 2593
A wolf the gods could not defeat by force.
Part 2594
A wolf they had to bind through cunning.
Part 2595
And a god, not Thor, not Loki
Part 2596
not Odin, who paid in his own body
Part 2597
to make the binding hold.
Part 2598
That story comes next.
Part 2599
It will be here, on the same schedule.
Part 2600
New episodes Wednesdays and Sundays, at 8pm Eastern.
Part 2601
For tonight, you have done enough.
Part 2602
The wind in the trees is doing what the
Part 2603
wind has always done.
Part 2604
The night is doing what the night does.
Part 2605
The almanac is moving slowly.
Part 2606
The hammer is at rest.
Part 2607
Thor is in his hall.
Part 2608
Sif is in her hall.
Part 2609
Loki, well, Loki is somewhere, doing what Loki
Part 2610
does.
Part 2611
Let the breath slow.
Part 2612
Let the shoulders drop.
Part 2613
Let what remains of the day go to the
Part 2614
same long darkness in which the dwarves' work is
Part 2615
even now, being carried on, in forges we cannot
Part 2616
see, by hands we will not meet.
Part 2617
The almanac will continue.
Part 2618
The next chapter of the season will arrive in
Part 2619
its time.
Part 2620
For tonight, the work of the day is finished.
Part 2621
Goodnight.
Part 2622
Sleep well.
Part 2623
The Sleeping Almanac will be here when you come
Part 2624
back.
Idunn's Apples
Welcome to The Sleeping Almanac. Tonight we follow a story about apples. About three gods on a road, and the eagle who would not let them eat. About a goddess who tended an orchard of gold, and the giant who carried her away in his wings. About what happens to the gods of the north, even to the gods, when the fruit that holds the years at bay is no longer in their hands.
This is the story of Iðunn, who kept the apples of youth in a small wooden chest she carried at her hip. And of Loki, who promised her to a giant, and then was made to bring her home. And of Þjazi, who wore an eagle's shape and lifted a goddess into the sky. And of Skaði, his daughter, who came down from her mountain in skis and a coat of mail, looking for a debt to be paid. It is the story of the first gray hair to appear in the beard of a god.
The story of the falcon cloak that Freyja kept on a peg beside her door. The story of a pole that stuck to an eagle's back and would not let go. And the story of two pale eyes thrown up into the cold winter sky, where they remain to this night as two small stars. Episode 5 of a complete twelve part season. New episodes every Wednesday and Sunday at 8pm ET.
If you fall asleep before the end, leave a 💤 in the comments. I read every one in the morning. Settle in. Lower the lights. Let your shoulders drop.
We begin in a forest a long way from Asgard, where three travelers have made a fire and a fourth has come to perch in a tree above them.
Part 2626
Chapter One. The Hunger of Three Wanderers. There is a kind of restlessness that takes the Æsir sometimes. It is not a need, exactly. They are not in want.
Their halls hold mead enough for a thousand winters, and the apples of Iðunn keep their years from coming. But still, sometimes, a god will leave the gates of Asgard and walk out into the broader worlds, into Miðgarðr, into the wild lands, into the great forests where men do not go. Óðinn was such a wanderer. He took the road often. He left Hliðskjálf, the high seat from which he could see all the worlds, and he took to his feet, and walked. Why he did this the sources do not say.
Perhaps it was the seeing itself. Perhaps a god who looks down at all things from a high place sometimes wishes to walk among them, to feel the wind on his face the way a mortal does, to be small for a while. On this journey, and the sources do not tell us exactly which journey, only that it was one of his many, Óðinn was not alone. He walked with two others. The first was Hœnir, a quiet god whom the Eddas describe only sparingly.
Hœnir was tall, the texts suggest, and given to long silences. He had stood beside Óðinn at the making of the first humans, at the moment two trees on the shore became Ask and Embla, the first man and the first woman. What he gave them, in that older story, is described in the poem Vǫluspá by a single word: óðr. The word is debated. Some readers take it to mean sense.
Some take it to mean spirit. Some take it to mean the breath of mind itself. We will not settle it tonight. The point, for our purposes, is that Hœnir had walked beside Óðinn a long time, and he had been there at the beginning, and he was on the road again now. On the road he said very little.
He walked beside Óðinn and watched the trees. There is a way that an old companion can be a presence in your life without needing to speak, and Hœnir was that for Óðinn. The third traveler was Loki. And Loki, by now, you know. Loki was Óðinn's foster brother, the son of a giant taken into Asgard long ago, in a story we have not yet told.
He was clever. He was beautiful, when he wished to be. He could change his shape into anything that ran or flew or swam. He had brought the gods their greatest treasures. He had also brought them many of their greatest troubles.
The gods could not be free of him, because he had sworn brotherhood with the Allfather, and that bond could not be undone. So they kept him close. And they watched him. These three were walking together through the wide world. The road they followed went through mountains.
It crossed two rivers that had no name. It went past a small lake where no birds were singing. It descended at last into a deep forest, and the trees stood close on either side, and the moss was thick on the floor of the wood. They had been walking for many days. The road, in their walking, had taken them slowly from the long bright country of summer into the slower country of autumn, the leaves above them had begun to turn, and the air at night had begun to bite at the edges of their cloaks, and the smell of pine and the smell of woodsmoke from distant farmsteads had begun to mix in the lower air.
They were tired in a way that gods do not often allow themselves to be tired. They were hungry. In the wide silence of those woods, hunger does something to the gods that it does not always do in Asgard. It makes them ordinary. The Æsir, on their high seats, do not feel the cold the way a mortal feels it, and they do not feel hunger the way a mortal feels it.
But on the road, in the deep forest, the body of a god remembers that it is a body. Their boots had begun to wear thin. Their cloaks had taken the smell of pine smoke and wet earth. They were three figures in the woods, like any three figures, walking with the slow gait of those who have walked too long without eating. Then they came to a clearing, and in the clearing was a herd.
There were cattle moving among the trees, slow, dark coated cattle, half wild, the kind that wander the edges of the deep wood and belong to no man. They were grazing the moss and the low ferns. Their breath went up in little clouds in the cool air. The three gods watched the herd from the edge of the trees for a long moment. They did not speak.
Then Loki gestured with his chin, and the three of them moved. They chose a single ox. A great gray brown bull, slow and heavy with the autumn weight. The kill was easy. The Æsir are strong, and the bull did not see them until the spear was already in him.
He went down on the moss without a sound, and his breath went out in a long sigh, and he was still. The three of them set about the work of preparing it. Hœnir gathered wood for a fire and built it carefully, in a small ring of stones at the center of the clearing. Loki cut the meat. Óðinn watched the trees, the way Óðinn always watches. The fire took quickly.
The smell of pine sap rose into the cold air. The blue gray smoke went up through the branches and up into the higher sky. They put the meat on a spit of green wood and turned it over the fire. And they waited. They were very hungry.
The smell of the roasting meat should have driven them mad with anticipation, the way it does a hungry man. But something, and they did not at first know what, was wrong. The fire was hot. The smoke went up. The flames licked the meat.
But the meat did not cook. The outside of it stayed pink. The fat did not render. The juices did not rise. The fire would burn the wood of the spit until the green wood began to char, and they would have to cut a new spit, and still the meat would not be done.
Hours passed. The sun began to drop behind the trees. The gold of late afternoon turned to the slate blue of evening. The cold began to come down from the high places. The smell of pine smoke became sharper as the air around the fire cooled.
Loki turned the meat. The meat did not cook. Hœnir laid another piece of wood on the embers. The fire took the wood but did not seem to grow any hotter. Óðinn sat on a stone with his cloak pulled around him and his hood up, and he said nothing, but his eyes were moving across the clearing in a slow careful way that the other two recognized. He was looking at the edges of the trees.
He was looking up into the higher branches. He was checking each part of the clearing in turn, the way an old man checks the rooms of a familiar house when he is sure he has misplaced something. Loki cursed. Hœnir said nothing. Óðinn looked up.
Part 2627
Chapter Two. The Ox That Would Not Cook. There is a moment, on a long journey, when the world stops behaving the way the world behaves. A fire that should warm does not warm. A path that should lead home does not lead home.
A meal that should fill the belly does not fill the belly. When this happens, an ordinary man might blame himself. He might blame the wood. He might blame the meat. But the gods know.
The gods have lived long enough to recognize the signs. When the world stops behaving like the world, it means something other than the world is interfering. It means a power has come into the clearing that was not there before. It means there is a watcher in the trees. Óðinn looked up. In the highest branches of an old oak, a tree that had stood at the edge of the clearing the whole time and that none of them had remarked on, because it was just another tree, there was sitting an eagle.
He was enormous. He was the size of a small house. His feathers were the dark brown of old bronze, and they caught the failing light along their edges so that he looked almost to be made of metal. His talons were as long as a man's hand. His beak was sharp and curved.
His eyes were yellow, with the small black pupils that all hunting birds have, and the eyes were looking down at the three travelers and at the fire and at the ox. Óðinn drew breath. He did not speak. He nudged Loki with his elbow and tilted his head upward, and Loki followed his gaze. When Loki saw the eagle his face went hard. He had grown up in Asgard, and he had spent his whole long life learning the difference between a thing and a thing that wore the shape of a thing.
He knew at once that what he was looking at was not an eagle. It was someone in the form of an eagle. Someone large and old and powerful, who had come down out of the sky to keep their meat from cooking, and who was now perched in the tree above them, watching, waiting. The eagle spoke. His voice was deep and rasping, the way one might imagine a hunting bird would speak if a hunting bird had a voice.
He said: "Your meat will not cook because I have willed it not to cook. I am hungry. I have not eaten in a long time. If you will give me a share of the ox, I will let it cook for you. Otherwise we shall all go hungry." The three of them looked at one another.
There was no real choice. Hœnir said nothing, as Hœnir always said nothing. Óðinn drew breath again and gave a small nod that meant agreement. Loki shrugged and held up his hands as if to say: very well. The eagle came down from the tree. He did not land softly.
He came down with the full weight of his huge body, and the branches above the clearing shook and dropped their needles into the fire as he passed. He landed on the moss not far from the spit, and his shadow covered the three travelers and the meat and the fire all at once. He was tall. Standing on the moss with his wings half folded, he was taller than any of the three Æsir. The light from the fire ran along the edges of his feathers and made him look enormous and strange.
There is a moment, when a great wild creature comes very close to you, when you understand in a way your mind had not understood before how much larger than you the world can be. The three gods sat very still. None of them reached for a weapon. None of them spoke. The eagle's smell was on the air, the smell of cold feathers and old meat and the long sky he had come down from.
It was not an unpleasant smell. It was simply the smell of a thing that did not belong in a clearing in a forest on a cool autumn evening, but was here anyway. He bent his head down to the spit. He took the meat in his curved black beak. He pulled.
He pulled, and the spit came apart in his beak, and he took half the ox, half the entire ox, including both of the hindquarters and most of the loin, and lifted it back into the air with him, and stepped a few paces away, and began to eat. The Æsir watched. There was nothing left for them but the head and the foreshoulders, and even that was unfair, but they had no choice. They began to roast what was left over the fire. The flames now caught.
The meat now cooked. The smell of it rose into the trees properly, the way the smell of cooking meat rises in the right kind of world. The eagle had done what he promised. He had let the fire work. But Loki, watching the eagle eat, watching that enormous bird tearing through the hindquarters of the ox with the easy speed of a thing that had not eaten in many days, Loki felt something go up in him.
He felt the heat of having been taken from. He felt the slow burn of having been made small by someone larger. He looked around the clearing. He saw a long pole, the kind of stout pole that a traveler carries to walk with, that doubles as a tent pole and a fire poker and a fighting staff. It was leaning against a stump.
It was almost a fighting length. It was Loki's. He picked it up. He walked, very quietly, in the long shadows that the firelight cast across the moss. He came around behind the eagle.
The eagle was bent low over the meat, tearing at it, paying no attention to the small figure that had risen from beside the fire and was now circling behind him with a pole in his hand. Loki raised the pole high above his head, and brought it down with all of his strength, across the eagle's broad bronze back.
Part 2628
Chapter Three. The Pole That Stuck. What happened in the next moment is, in the surviving sources, described very briefly. Snorri Sturluson tells it in a few short sentences. But it is worth dwelling on, because in those few sentences is a small terror that the long form of myth so often hides.
The pole struck the eagle's back. The eagle did not cry out. The eagle did not fall. The pole, when it landed, did not bounce. The pole stuck.
Loki tried to pull it back. He could not. The pole was caught in the feathers of the eagle the way a needle is caught in cloth. It was held there. It would not come free.
And Loki found, then, that the other end of the pole, the end he was still gripping, would not let him go either. His hand was stuck to the wood. He could not open his fingers. He could not drop it. He had become attached to the eagle, through the length of the pole, like a fish on a hook attached to the line.
The eagle, who had been bending over the meat, straightened slowly. He folded his wings. He turned his great head on its long neck and looked back at Loki. He did not say anything. He spread his wings.
Loki later would tell the story this way: that the eagle moved at first in small hops, low along the ground, dragging Loki behind him through the moss. That his arm was nearly pulled from its socket. That his feet caught on every root and rock and old fallen branch. That he cried out for help, but neither Óðinn nor Hœnir moved, they sat by the fire and watched, because the speed of the thing was such that even if they had risen there was nothing they could have done, and besides, Loki had struck the bird first. Then the eagle rose into the air.
He rose slowly at first. He took a single hop and then he beat his wings, and Loki was lifted off the ground. The eagle climbed past the tops of the trees. Loki hung from the pole below him, swinging. The eagle climbed higher.
The cold air took Loki's face. The forest fell away below. The clearing where the fire was and where Óðinn and Hœnir sat became a small bright dot, and then was lost beneath the canopy. The eagle climbed. He flew, then.
He flew above the trees. He flew at the height where the lower clouds hang, and Loki swung below him in the cold and the wet. The eagle made no particular hurry. He flew toward no obvious destination. He flew low enough that Loki's feet kept striking the upper branches of the tallest trees and the sharp tops of the hilltops.
Loki's body was beaten by the branches. His face was cut. His ribs were bruised against the rocks. He felt, and this is in Snorri's account, although Snorri does not say it with this much feeling, he felt that the eagle was punishing him. That the eagle could have flown higher, easily.
But he was choosing to fly low, so that Loki would be hit. So that Loki would be reminded. Loki was a great speaker. He could talk almost anyone into almost anything. And now he began to talk.
He shouted up at the eagle, over the rush of the wind. He told the eagle that he had been hasty to strike him. He told the eagle that he was a god, a great god, of the Æsir, foster brother to Óðinn himself. He told the eagle that he had treasures to give. He told the eagle that the gods of Asgard had wealth beyond his understanding, beyond what any eagle could carry away.
He told the eagle that whatever the eagle wanted, gold, silver, mead, weapons forged by the dwarves, Loki could give it to him. He need only set Loki down. The eagle flew on. The eagle did not answer. The branches struck Loki's face again.
The cold air filled his mouth and stopped his words. He gathered himself and spoke again. This time he spoke not of treasure but of mercy. He pleaded. He said that he had been a fool.
He said that he had grown up among gods and had grown careless. He said he had not understood that an eagle who could keep a fire from cooking a piece of meat was not a creature to strike with a pole. He said he saw, now, that the eagle was greater than he had understood. He said he repented. He asked, only, to be set down.
The eagle slowed. He still flew, but his speed dropped. The land below was now an open country, brown and gray under low clouds. There were no trees here, no soft places to land. There were only sharp rocks and a cold gray sky and the wind.
The eagle hung in the wind for a moment, and then he turned his great head down toward Loki, and he spoke. He said: "There is one thing I want. There is only one thing. If you will swear it to me, I will set you down where the moss is soft and the wind is gentle. If you will not swear it, I will fly higher, and I will fly faster, and I will not stop.
Choose." Loki said: "Name it."
Part 2629
Chapter Four. The Oath Sworn in the Sky. The eagle's terms were simple. The eagle was, in fact, a giant. His name was Þjazi, and he lived in a mountain hall in the high north, in a place called Þrymheim.
He was old. He was old in the way the giants of the north are old, old in stone time, in mountain time. He was strong. But he was not eternal. Like all giants, like all things in the world that are not the Æsir, he aged.
He had felt the years gather on him as time goes. He had heard, in his long life, that there were apples in the orchards of Asgard that the gods ate to keep their years from coming. That there was a goddess who tended these apples, who kept them in a small chest, who walked among the high halls of the Æsir distributing them to those who needed them. Her name was Iðunn. The eagle said: "Bring her to me.
Bring her with her chest. Bring her outside the walls of Asgard, where I can take her up in my own claws. Swear that you will do this, and I will set you down. Refuse, and I will fly higher, and you will die." The wind was very cold. Loki's body was numb where it had been struck against the trees.
His shoulder felt as if it would come apart. He could feel the strength leaving his arm where it held the pole. He could not feel his fingers anymore. He could feel that if the eagle climbed any higher, his arm would give, and he would fall. The fall, from this height, would kill him.
Even a god, falling that far, would not survive intact. He would be broken on the rocks. He might not die outright, Loki had a difficult time dying, but he would be unable to move for many seasons. He would lie there in the cold country until someone found him, and that someone might never come. He could not refuse.
He spoke the oath. He swore, by the name of the All Father, and by his foster brotherhood with Óðinn, and by the blood that bound him to Asgard, that he would bring Iðunn out from the walls of the city with her chest of apples, and deliver her into a place where the eagle could come and take her. By the time he was done speaking the oath, his voice was small, because the cold and the fear and the pain had taken most of his strength. The eagle heard. The eagle nodded his great head.
He flew, then, in a slow arc down toward the earth. He flew gently this time, no longer beating his wings hard to keep Loki swinging in the rough air. He set Loki down on a hillside of soft moss, very near to the clearing where Óðinn and Hœnir were still sitting beside their fire. The pole came loose from his back at the moment of landing. Loki's fingers opened.
He fell to the moss in a heap. The eagle, without speaking, rose again into the sky. His wings beat once, twice, and then he was a small dark shape against the cloud, and then he was gone. Loki lay on the moss for a long time. His face was bleeding.
His ribs hurt. His arm would not move. He stared up at the sky where the eagle had disappeared, and he felt his oath on him like a yoke around his neck. He had sworn to deliver a goddess. He had sworn to deliver Iðunn, Iðunn, who was loved by every god in Asgard, who was the wife of Bragi the skald, who walked the halls of the Æsir with her wooden chest at her hip and her apples in her hand.
He had sworn to deliver her to a giant. He thought, briefly, of refusing. He thought of going back to Asgard and saying nothing. He thought of letting the oath stand unfulfilled and seeing what would happen. He thought, perhaps, that he could find some way to keep Iðunn safe inside the walls and let the eagle come and find that the bargain had not been kept.
But he understood, even as he thought it, that this was not how oaths worked. An oath sworn between an Aesir and a giant was a kind of debt the world itself enforced. If he did not pay it, the world would find a way to extract the payment from him, or from Asgard, or from someone he loved. There was no escape from the oath. There was only the question of how to honor it, and at what cost.
He thought, then, of confessing. He thought of walking into the council hall at Asgard and telling the gods what he had done. He thought of asking for their help. He thought of the long silence that would follow such a confession, and of the way Óðinn's one eye would look at him, and of what Frigg would say, and of what would be done. He could not face it.
He had been many things, a fool, a thief, a charmer, a liar, but he had not yet been the kind of god who walks into a council hall and admits to having sold the keeper of the apples for the price of his own skin. So he told them nothing. He buried the oath inside himself, in the deep cold place where he kept the things he could not face, and he carried it back to Asgard the way another man would carry a small heavy stone in his pocket, not so heavy that he could not walk, but heavy enough that he was aware of it always. He could not refuse the oath. Oaths sworn between Æsir and giants are binding things.
They are not the sort of oath that a clever god can talk his way out of. They are sworn on names that cannot be unsworn. If Loki broke this oath, the eagle would have the right to come for him, and to come for every god in Asgard, and the Æsir would have to give him over, because an oath broken is a worse thing than an oath honored. He lay on the moss and considered. He considered, in the slow and deliberate way that Loki considered everything, what he had just done.
After a long time, he rose. He brushed the moss from his cloak. He walked back to the clearing where the fire was and where Óðinn and Hœnir were still sitting. He did not tell them what he had sworn. He did not tell them what the eagle had asked.
He told them only that he had been carried far, that he had bargained with the giant, that he was very tired, and that they should eat what was left of the meat and rest. They ate. They rested. They slept beside the fire. In the morning they turned south, back toward Asgard.
Loki walked behind. He walked silently. He walked with his eyes on the road. He did not speak for many miles.
Part 2630
Chapter Five. The Goddess of Apples. The orchard of Iðunn was small. It was not at the heart of Asgard. It was not in the great hall of Glaðsheimr where Óðinn sat his high seat, or in Valhǫll where the slain warriors feasted.
It was in a quieter quarter of the city, off the main avenues, in a small walled grove between two streams. The streams came down off the great tree Yggdrasill, somewhere far above, and ran through Asgard as cold and quick as mountain water. The orchard sat between them like an island. There was only one door into the orchard, and it was a wooden door, low and narrow, with a small bronze ring at its center. The walls around the orchard were stone, weathered, gray, covered with a kind of soft moss that grew between the stones.
The walls were not high. A tall man could see over them. But Iðunn kept the door, and the door opened only when she opened it. The door, when Iðunn was inside, opened from the inside only. She could come and go.
No one else could enter unless she chose to let them in. That was, as far as we can tell from the surviving sources, the arrangement. The exact mechanism of the lock, whether it was a key, or a word, or simply the willingness of the door itself, is not described, and we will not press the question. Inside the walls, in the small grove between the two streams, was a single tree. The sources are not entirely consistent on this.
Some passages of Snorri suggest that Iðunn had an orchard, many trees, many apples. Some passages suggest there was only one tree, and that all the apples came from it. In one reading of the Eddas, it is a single tree, very old, with bark the color of dark wax and leaves that did not fall in winter. In another reading, it is a small grove. The story does not depend on the count.
Either way, the apples grew on a tree that grew nowhere else, and the tree belonged to Iðunn, and Iðunn belonged to the tree. The apples were not red. They were not, in any of the surviving sources, given a clear color. We have inferred them as a kind of golden, the color of dawn light on still water, or of new poured honey, and we will keep that picture for the rest of the story. The apples were small.
They fit in the hollow of a hand. They had the smell of cold sweet sap, the smell that you find on the air after a frost in an orchard at the very end of autumn. There is, in some surviving translations of Snorri's text, a suggestion that the apples were of a kind that had no equivalent in the orchards of men, a fruit unique to that one tree in that one walled grove. They could not be propagated. The seed of an apple from Iðunn's tree, if planted, would not grow another tree of the same kind.
Whatever the apples were, they were only there, and only in that small chest, and only from Iðunn's hand. Iðunn would walk out into the orchard each morning and gather what apples had ripened that day. There were never very many, perhaps a dozen, perhaps fewer. She would put them, carefully, into a small wooden chest. The chest was the size of a child's lunch box.
It was painted with bronze fittings at its corners. It had a small leather strap that went over Iðunn's shoulder. She carried it with her always, the way a healer carries a satchel. The apples never spoiled in the chest. They could be kept there for many days, if needed, and they would still be cold and sweet when taken out.
Iðunn would walk from the orchard, through the streets of Asgard, with her chest at her hip. She walked the same route, more or less, each morning. She would pass the long hall where Bragi composed. She would pass the council square. She would walk along the avenue of statues, the figures of older gods, gods from before the Æsir, gods whose names had been lost, and she would touch the cold stone foot of one or two of them as she passed, almost without thinking, the way one touches a familiar doorpost without remembering why.
The gods would come to her. They came in ones and twos. Some of them would be working at something, Þórr at a forge, or Týr at the sharpening of a blade, and would lift their hands, dusty from their work, and call her name. She would stop. She would open the chest.
She would take out one of the apples, with care, holding it lightly so as not to bruise it, and offer it. Each god would take an apple from her hand, and eat it where they stood. The bite of the apple was, and again, here we are reaching past what the sources state directly, the bite was the bite of fresh fruit, but more so. It was the bite of fruit at the moment of its perfection. The sweetness of it was deep but not cloying.
The flesh was firm. The juice was cold. The gods would close their eyes when they bit. They would stand a moment, on the street of Asgard, with their eyes closed and the small apple in their hand, and the years that had begun to gather on them would loosen and let go. They would open their eyes.
They would thank her. They would go back to their work. The whole exchange would take perhaps a minute. Iðunn would close the chest and continue down the street, looking for whoever she had not yet visited that day. By the late afternoon, the chest would be empty.
She would walk home with the empty chest at her hip, and she would put it down beside the door of her orchard, and she would go inside the small walled grove with the door closing softly behind her. That was what the apples did. They held the years back. They did not make the gods immortal, the gods could still be killed, and would be killed, in the appointed time, at the appointed twilight. But the gods could not age.
They could not grow gray. They could not weaken from the slow erosion of years that takes a mortal man in his prime and turns him, by the time he is old, into a man who walks slowly and breathes carefully and remembers his youth from a great distance. The apples did not bring the gods their youth. They held the gods at the moment of their youth, at the moment when they were most themselves, and would not let them slide. This is what Iðunn did.
She did this every day. She woke. She walked into her orchard. She gathered. She walked the streets of Asgard.
She gave. She was the wife of Bragi, the god of poetry. Bragi was the great skald of the gods, the keeper and singer of long poems, the speaker of finely formed words at the long feasts in the hall of the Æsir. Snorri Sturluson describes him as wise and eloquent above all others in skaldcraft. We will allow ourselves a small picture of him: a careful man, given to speaking slowly, with the deep voice of one who has chosen each word before letting it out.
He had been Iðunn's husband for as long as anyone remembered. They lived together in a small hall near her orchard. He composed his poems in the mornings. She tended her tree in the evenings. In the late hours they sat together by a small fire, and sometimes he tried out lines on her, and sometimes she said nothing in reply, and sometimes she said only a single word, and he would nod and adjust the line, and they were happy in the quiet way that two people who have been happy for a long time are happy.
She was not, in any of the surviving sources, given a great deal of personality. The texts describe her chiefly through her work, the keeper of the apples, and through the affection in which the other gods hold her. We may infer kindness from this. We may infer gentleness from it. The sources themselves are quieter on the matter.
She is not given the sharp wit of Freyja, or the golden splendor of Sif, or the deep council wisdom of Frigg. She is simply the keeper of the apples. She walks the streets. She gives. She returns to her orchard.
She is loved by all the gods, because all the gods depend on her. There is a way that a person who tends a single great gift can become, in time, almost invisible, not in the sense of being overlooked, but in the sense of being so much a part of the fabric of the place that no one remembers there was ever a time without her. The smith at his forge. The harper in the hall. The miller at his stones.
After enough years of doing the work, these become not so much people as fixtures of the world. The work is the person and the person is the work. Iðunn had been this for the Æsir for a very long time. The apples ripened and she gathered them and they ate them and they did not age, and that was the order of things, and they had stopped, most of them, even noticing it. This is the woman to whom Loki was now coming.
This is the woman he had sworn to deliver to a giant.
Part 2631
Chapter Six. The Story Loki Told. Loki came back to Asgard with Óðinn and Hœnir. The three travelers passed through the great gates. They were greeted by the watchman.
They were welcomed home. They went each to their own halls and washed off the dust of the long road, and ate, and slept, and recovered. But Loki did not rest. In the days that followed, he walked the streets of Asgard with a strange slow purpose. He went to the markets.
He listened in the alleys. He sat at the back of the council hall when the gods met to speak of matters of state. He did not say much. But he was thinking. He was thinking about Iðunn.
He had sworn the oath. He could not unswear it. He had to deliver her out of the walls. The question was only how. He could not take her by force.
The walls of Asgard were watched, and the gates were guarded by Heimdallr, whose hearing was so fine that he could hear grass grow, and whose eyes could see across the worlds. Loki could not pass with a struggling goddess thrown over his shoulder. The watchman would know in an instant. The alarm would be raised. The gods would come.
He would be killed. He could not trick her with sleep, or with drink, or with any spell of binding, at least not without drawing the kind of attention from the rest of the gods that he could not afford to draw. She was the keeper of the apples. She was watched, in the loose careful way that the gods watch what they cannot live without. A spell against her would have been a kind of small declaration of war.
He could not threaten her. There was nothing to threaten her with. She wanted nothing. She loved her husband. She loved her tree.
She had no fear that another could exploit. He thought, then, of a different approach. Not force, not spells, not threats. Something more like a story. A story is, after a fashion, the kind of thing that can persuade a person who cannot be otherwise persuaded, because a story does not ask anything of them.
A story only asks that they listen, and that they wonder. She had only one weakness, Loki thought. She loved her apples. Iðunn loved the apples of her orchard the way a craftsman loves his own work. She knew each one.
She knew which would ripen tomorrow, which the day after. She had thought about them and tended them and turned them over in her hand for so many centuries that the apples were a kind of language she spoke. And if a man came to her and told her of apples she had not seen, apples elsewhere, apples better, apples she might want to know about, She would want to see them. This is what Loki understood. This is what Loki built his lie on.
He went to her on a quiet morning. He found her at the door of her orchard, just stepping out, with her chest at her hip. She was carrying her morning gather. The wooden lid of the chest was just open at the top, and Loki could see three small apples nestled inside, gold against the pale wood. She looked up at him.
She smiled. She had no reason not to. She was kind to all the gods. He bowed. He greeted her.
He asked after Bragi her husband. He spoke for a little while of small things, of the weather, of the festival that was coming, of a song Bragi had sung at the last feast. She answered him politely. They walked together a little way down the street. Then Loki said: "Iðunn.
I was on the road, recently, with the Allfather and Hœnir. We traveled far. We went deep into the forests outside the worlds you know." She looked at him with mild interest. "Yes," she said. "I heard you had been on a journey.
Bragi told me. I am glad you have come back safely." He waited a moment. He let her finish. He said: "In a forest there, very far away, I saw a tree." She stopped walking. She turned to him fully now.
Her hand went to the lid of her chest, almost without her noticing. "A tree," she said. "A tree like yours," Loki said. "Or perhaps not like yours. Different.
Older. The bark was darker. The leaves were a paler green. And the apples on it, " He paused. He let the pause sit.
"I should not say. I do not want to trouble you." She said: "Tell me." "The apples were of a kind I have not seen before. They were small. They were the color of yours. They had the look of yours.
But they were, and I do not know how to say this without giving offense, they were larger. They had a deeper color. And the smell, Iðunn, when I came close to that tree, the smell of those apples was so strong that I felt I could taste them on the air." He stopped. He looked at her. She was looking at him very carefully now.
Her hand had not left the lid of her chest. There was a small color in her cheeks that had not been there before. She said: "Where was this tree?" He told her where. He told her of a clearing in a deep wood. He told her of the path that led there.
He told her of the markers along the way, the cleft rock, the broken stump, the small spring with the iron taste. He told her, with the careful detail of a man who has been there, exactly how to find the tree. He said: "I should not have told you. I am sorry. It is not my place to tell you of other apples." She shook her head.
She said: "No. No. You are right to tell me. I, Loki, I have to see. I have to see this tree.
If there is a tree like mine, anywhere, I must understand it. I must know. Can you take me to it?" He hesitated. He said: "Iðunn, I cannot leave my own work just now. But, if you wish, if you take your chest, so that you can compare your apples to those, if you walk out the eastern gate and follow the path I have told you, it is not so very far.
You can be there and back in a day. You can see the tree. You can compare. And then you will know." She did not answer at once. She looked at her chest.
She looked at the door of her orchard, behind them. She looked, for a long moment, at Loki. Then she said: "Yes. I will go. Today.
I will leave today." He bowed to her. He stepped back. He let her go. That afternoon, Iðunn walked out of the eastern gate of Asgard, with her wooden chest at her hip. She did not tell her husband Bragi where she was going.
She told her serving women only that she had an errand outside the walls and would return by nightfall. She walked alone. She walked east, down the long road that led into the wider worlds, with the chest of apples at her hip and the small bronze fittings of it catching the late afternoon sun. Loki watched her go.
Part 2632
Chapter Seven. The Wings of Þjazi. Iðunn walked for a long time. The path Loki had described to her ran true. The cleft rock was there.
The broken stump was there. The small spring with the iron taste was there. She knelt and drank from it, and the water was cold and sharp on her tongue, and she went on. The path took her into a wood she did not know. The trees here were older than any she had seen in her own orchard.
Their trunks were great and dark. The light that came down through them was a low green light, the color of moss in deep places. She walked. She walked further than she had meant to walk. The sun, which had been on her face when she set out, was now slipping behind the tops of the trees, and the light was changing from gold to amber.
She paused once or twice, and looked back, and considered turning around. But she had come so far. The tree, she thought, must be close. Loki had said it was not far. She would walk a little further.
She would find the tree. She would see it once. Then she would turn around and go home. She did not see the eagle. The eagle had been watching her for a long time.
From the high places. From the tops of the trees. From far above, where Iðunn could not see, the great bronze shape of him had been circling, patient, careful, certain. When she came at last into a clearing, a small clearing in the deep wood, with no tree at its center, with only the moss and the silence, when she stopped and looked around and understood that the tree Loki had described to her did not exist, that she had been deceived, That was the moment Þjazi descended. He came down with the speed of a hawk on a hare.
His shadow passed across the clearing first, and Iðunn had time only to look up, and to see the enormous bronze shape blot out the sky above her, and to draw a single breath. His claws closed around her shoulders. They closed around her chest and her wooden box of apples. They closed around her arms and pinned them at her sides. He lifted her.
He lifted her without slowing. The trees of the clearing fell away below her. The forest fell away. The wide brown land fell away. She rose into the air with the great wings of the eagle beating slowly above her, and she could not move.
She did not cry out. She was not, in the surviving sources, given the kind of voice that cries out. She was a goddess. She had lived a long time. She understood, in the moment Þjazi's claws closed on her, that she had been taken.
She understood that she had been tricked. She understood that the tree Loki had told her of was not a tree at all but a story made to draw her past the walls of Asgard. She understood that she would not be eating dinner with Bragi that night. She closed her eyes. She held the small wooden chest tight against her chest with both hands, so that the apples in it would not fall.
The wind took her hair. Þjazi flew north, and the cold of the high air came down on her, and the world she knew became smaller and smaller below. Þjazi flew for many hours. He flew north, into mountain country. He flew over high snow covered peaks where no man lives. He flew above the deep gray seas. At last, in a high valley between two black cliffs, he came down into his hall.
His hall was called Þrymheim. It was made of stone. It stood at the high edge of the world. The wind came through it constantly. The hall was tall, with a single great hearth at its center, where a fire burned even in summer because the cold of the high places was always reaching in.
He set Iðunn down inside his hall. He did not bind her. He did not need to. He had taken her so far from any road or any house that she could not have walked home in a season. The mountains around Þrymheim were the highest mountains in the world.
The cliffs below it dropped into a sea so cold that a person who fell into it died before they reached the bottom. The doors of the hall opened only onto a narrow ledge of stone. There was nowhere to go. He told her she was his guest. He spoke to her, even, kindly.
He brought her food. He brought her wine. He brought her a chair to sit in beside his fire. He said: "I will not harm you. I want only your apples.
Eat one, each day, and give one to me, each day. We will both stay as we are. The years will not gather on us. We will live together in this hall as long as the apples last." Iðunn said nothing. She did not eat.
She did not drink. She sat in the chair he had given her, beside the great fire, with the wooden box on her knees, and she held the box closed. Þjazi waited. He waited a day. He waited two days. On the third day, he went away.
He had work to do, the work of a giant, which is the work of the deep mountains and the deep sea, the work of stones and storms and old grudges that need to be tended. He went down from his hall through some passage Iðunn could not see. He left her alone in Þrymheim, in the high stone hall, with the fire and the cold wind and the wooden box. He locked her door, and a door locked by a giant is a door that does not open easily. She sat in the chair beside the fire.
She did not cry. She did not, in the surviving sources, give any sign of being overcome. She sat there, very still, with the box of apples on her knees and her hands folded over it. She waited. She did not know who would come for her.
She did not know if anyone would come. She did not know if the gods of Asgard had even noticed her gone. She did not know how long the apples in her box would last, if she did not eat any of them and did not give any of them away. She did not know if the Æsir would begin to age, soon, without her. She did not know what would become of Bragi, of Óðinn, of any of them.
The days in Þrymheim passed strangely. There was a window in the upper part of the hall, a single narrow slit in the stone, no glass in it, open to the wind. Through that window, in the long afternoons, Iðunn could see a wedge of the gray sky outside. She could see, sometimes, a line of dark birds passing in the high distance. She could see, when the clouds parted, the steeper rock face of the next mountain over, and the small white veins of snow that ran down its sides even in summer.
She could not see Asgard. She could not see any country she had ever walked in. She was at the top of the world, and the world from this height looked like nothing she recognized. Þjazi came and went. He would be gone for a day, two days, sometimes three. He would come back with fish, or with the carcass of some animal she did not know the name of, or with nothing at all but cold sea water still beaded on his beard.
He spoke to her sometimes. He did not threaten her, after that first day. He did not even ask her, after that first day, about the apples. He seemed to be waiting. He seemed to think that, in time, she would tire of refusing, and would offer him an apple of her own accord, the way a hungry traveler will eventually accept bread from any hand that offers it.
She did not. She held the box. She held the box on her knees and she waited. And in Asgard, the days began to pass.
Part 2633
Chapter Eight. The First Gray Hair. In Asgard, at first, no one noticed. This is the strange thing, the thing the surviving sources do not dwell on, but which the long shape of the story makes clear. The gods, when their healer is gone, do not at first realize that they need her.
The apples had become so ordinary a part of the daily round of Asgard that a missed apple, or a missed visit from Iðunn, was not the kind of thing a god would think to remark on. They thought, each of them, that they had had an apple recently enough. They thought she would come tomorrow. They thought, more often than not, of nothing about her at all. The first day passed.
Iðunn was thought, by those who saw her serving women, to be in her orchard, or in Bragi's hall, or about some quiet errand of her own. The second day passed. The third. By the fourth, Bragi had begun to ask after his wife. Where was she.
Why had she not returned. What was the errand she had spoken of, when she walked out the eastern gate. He asked her women. He asked the watchman at the gate. The watchman remembered her, only because she was the only one who had walked east that morning with a small wooden box at her hip.
He had thought nothing of it. The goddess of apples sometimes walked out alone. She had always come back. But she did not come back. On the fifth day, a council was called.
It was small at first, only Bragi and Óðinn and Frigg and one or two others. They sat in the council hall and asked one another what could have happened to her. They sent riders out the eastern gate to look for her. The riders found the cleft rock. They found the broken stump.
They found the small spring with the iron taste. They followed the path she had taken until it ran out into a deep wood, and there they lost it. They came back without her. The council met again, a larger council this time. Many of the Æsir came.
They sat in the hall and discussed what had happened. They tried to remember when each of them had last seen her. They went around the room, each in turn, naming the day on which they had last received an apple. This is where, the sources tell us, the gods began to feel something. Snorri's text on this is short and almost reportorial.
It says only that the Æsir began to age and to grow gray. It does not describe the moment of recognition. We will fill in the moment, here, not by inventing facts, but by letting the moment have the weight it must have had, because the weight of it is the heart of this story. Bear with us. We are at a small interpretive expansion.
Frigg was the first to say it. She had been sitting at the council table, listening to the others speak, and as the talk went around the room, she found that she had been twisting a strand of her hair between her fingers, the way she did when she was thinking hard. And when she looked down at the strand of hair in her hand, when she looked at it carefully in the light of the council hall, she saw, at the root of that one strand, a single thread of silver. She held it up. She turned to Óðinn beside her.
She said: "Look." Óðinn looked. He did not speak. He reached up and touched his own beard. He pulled a single hair free and held it before him. The hair, at one end, was gray.
There was a long silence in the council hall. Then, one by one, the gods began to look at themselves. They looked at their hands. They looked at the skin of their hands, which had been smooth and full a week ago, and which now, in the long light of the council hall, showed the first small creases at the knuckles. They looked at one another's faces.
They saw the small new lines at the corners of one another's eyes. They saw, on the foreheads of those who had lived the longest, the first soft shadows of furrow. The gods were aging. It had started slowly. They had not noticed it for the first day or two.
But now, sitting in the hall together, they could not help but see it on each other. A god who had been the very portrait of vigor a week ago now looked tired in some small way that he had not been before. A goddess whose hair had been the bright color of new wheat now had, at one temple, a single fine streak of pale. It was happening. It was happening, slowly, but it was happening.
In the days that followed, the gods began to look at themselves in a way they had not had to look at themselves before. Some of them found small things they had never seen on their own bodies. Þórr, in his own hall, sat by the fire one night and turned his great hand back and forth in the firelight, and saw, at the back of his hand, in a soft fold of the skin, a small old crease that he did not remember being there. Frigg, who had never known what it was like to brush her hair and find a strand come loose at the roots, found one strand and then another. Bragi composed nothing in those days. He sat in his hall with his hands folded over his lap, and looked at the floor.
The mood of Asgard, in that week, was a quiet one. There were no great announcements. There were no proclamations. The gods went about their days, but they went about them slowly, and they spoke a little less, and they looked at each other a little more carefully than they had before. They were measuring.
They were seeing what each had lost. They were preparing themselves, perhaps, for what they did not yet know how to name. The youngest among them, those who had been brought up never knowing the gathering of the years, who had never felt the small daily attrition of time on a body, those were the most disturbed by what they saw. They went to their elders. They asked, quietly, what was happening.
The elders did not have good answers. They had not lived in a world where the apples were not. They knew, in a kind of old far off way, what aging was, they had seen it in mortals, they had seen it in animals, they understood the principle of it, but they had never expected to feel it on their own faces. They told the younger ones to be patient. They told them that Iðunn would come back.
They told them, in the careful tones of older people speaking to younger people about something the older people are themselves not certain of, that it would be all right. The watchman at the eastern gate, Heimdallr, walked his post longer hours than usual in those days. He stood at the highest tower of the gate and looked east, into the country Iðunn had walked out into. He looked for her. He saw birds, and farmers, and the smoke of distant villages, and clouds.
He did not see her. He stood his post anyway. He was not, in those days, a god who slept much. Bragi, in the small hall he had shared with his wife for a thousand years, did not eat. He sat in his chair by the cold fire.
The harp he composed on was on the table beside him. He did not pick it up. The food his servants brought him grew cold and was taken away. He did not sleep well. When he slept, it was in the chair, with his great hands folded in his lap.
The lines at his eyes deepened a little more each day. He did not look in any mirror. And the cause was obvious. The apples had run out. Each god had a small store.
Each had kept perhaps one apple, perhaps two, from their last visit to Iðunn. Those stores would not last long. And there was no orchard now that Iðunn was gone. The tree of Iðunn would still grow apples, perhaps, in her absence, but the door to her orchard was locked by whatever means Iðunn locked it, and only she could open it. They could have broken the door if they wished.
They had not yet wished to. They had not yet wished to think that she would not come back. But now they understood that she was not coming back of her own accord. Now they understood that something had taken her. The council moved, then, to a darker thing.
They began to think about who would have known the way she had walked. Who would have been on the road, in those days. Who would have spoken to her, before she left. The riders had reported only one strange thing. They had spoken, in the village near the gate, to the people of that road.
The villagers remembered seeing the goddess walk past. They remembered her serving women had said she had an errand outside the walls. But the villagers also remembered something else: they remembered that, on the day before, they had seen Loki in their village. Loki had stopped at the well. Loki had spoken to the elder.
Loki had asked, of all things, whether anyone had seen any unusual eagles in the woods to the east, in the recent days. The villagers had remembered this only because it had seemed an odd thing to ask. Why would the foster brother of Óðinn ask after eagles in a particular wood. The villagers had no answer for him. He had thanked them and walked on.
The riders brought this back to the council. The council heard it. The council went very quiet. Then Óðinn turned to the captain of his guard, and he said, very gently, and his gentleness was a worse thing than his anger, the gods knew, he said: "Bring Loki here. Bring him now." They brought him.
He came into the council hall a little out of breath, as if he had been working at something when they came for him, as if he had not expected to be summoned. He looked around at the faces of the gods. He saw the silver in Frigg's hair. He saw the lines at the corners of Óðinn's eyes. He saw Bragi sitting at the far end of the hall, with his great hand laid flat on the table, looking at him.
He understood, then, that they knew. He did not try to lie. He was a clever god, but he was not such a fool as to lie when he had already lost. He sat in the chair they pointed him to. He folded his hands.
He looked at the table. He told them. He told them about the eagle. He told them about the pole. He told them about the long flight, and the cold, and the oath he had sworn so that he would not be flown higher and dropped.
He told them about Iðunn. He told them about the tree he had described to her. He told them about her walking out the eastern gate alone, with her wooden box at her hip. He told them everything. When he was done, no one spoke.
The hall was very quiet. Óðinn looked at him for a long time. Then he said: "You will bring her back." Loki said: "I am only one god. The eagle is large. The mountain hall of Þjazi, if it is Þjazi, and I believe it is, is at the top of the world. I cannot fly there.
I do not have wings." Óðinn turned to Freyja. Freyja sat to his left. She had said nothing the whole council. Her cloak hung on a peg by her own door, the falcon cloak, the great gift she had brought into Asgard from the world of the Vanir, which let the wearer fly as a great hunting bird flies, and see as a hunting bird sees. She had used it sometimes when she traveled the worlds in her own private errands.
She rarely lent it. Óðinn said: "Freyja. Lend him your cloak." Freyja looked at Loki for a long moment. She did not like Loki. No one in the council hall liked Loki, in that moment. But Freyja, like the rest, had a strand of silver in her hair that had not been there a week before.
She understood the math. She said: "Bring her back. Bring her back, Loki, or do not come back yourself." Loki said: "I will bring her back." He rose from the chair. He bowed to the council. He walked out of the hall, and Freyja walked out behind him, and at her own hall she took the falcon cloak down from its peg and put it into his hands.
Part 2634
Chapter Nine. The Falcon Cloak. The falcon cloak was a beautiful thing. The surviving sources call it a *fjaðrhamr*, a feather form, or feather cloak, but they do not describe its appearance. We will imagine it briefly.
We will picture feathers, feathers of a deep red brown, with bands of cream and white along their edges. We will picture a cloak sewn with thread that did not look like ordinary thread, that hung in long folds when not worn, and weighed almost nothing. This is our picture, not the texts'. The texts only tell us that the thing existed, and that it belonged to Freyja, and that the wearer could fly. When a god put on the falcon cloak, when they wrapped it around their shoulders and pulled the hood up over their head, they did not look like a god wearing a cloak.
They looked like a falcon. The shape of the cloak became the body of a bird. The arms became the wings. The hood became the small sharp head. The cloak did not transform the wearer in the way that Loki's own shape shifting transformed him; the wearer was still a god, underneath, and could remove the cloak and return to their own shape.
But while they wore it, they had the body and the eyes and the speed and the high cold knowledge of a falcon. They could fly. Loki had used the falcon cloak once or twice in his life. He had asked Freyja for it on errands of his own. She had given it grudgingly.
But he knew how to wear it. He took it down to the courtyard of Asgard. He put it on. He wrapped it close around his shoulders. He pulled the hood up.
He felt the change come on him, the strange small lightness in his bones, the sudden sharpening of his eyes, the way the world became at once smaller and clearer, the way the sky above him became a place he could move through rather than a place that hung above him. He spread his wings. He pushed off from the stones of the courtyard. He climbed. He climbed past the towers of Asgard.
He climbed past the great tree Yggdrasill. He climbed into the high blue cold of the sky. He turned north. He flew. He flew faster than any eagle.
The falcon cloak made him swift in a way that no eagle could match. He cut through the air the way a sharp knife cuts through water. The wind he made as he passed could be heard from the ground below as a long thin whistle, like the sound of a single high note held in the throat of a singing woman. He flew north over the lands of men. Below him, the small fields of farmsteads passed like brown patches on a long green coat.
Smoke rose from cottages. A few people, here and there, looked up at the strange high call of the falcon's wings, and then went back to their work. None of them suspected that they were watching, in that small dark shape against the cloud, the foster brother of the king of the gods, on an errand to save the world from age. He flew north over the mountains. The mountains here were dark.
Their peaks were sharp. The wind that ran along their tops was the kind of wind that no man could walk in. Loki, in his falcon shape, rode the cold currents and made good time. He flew north over the great gray sea. The sea was vast.
There was no land in sight for hours. Below him, the long swells moved slowly, like the breathing of a great sleeping animal. He saw, in the far distance, the occasional white shape of a whale rising and going down again. He did not stop. He did not slow.
He flew north until he came at last to the country where Þrymheim stood, to the cold place at the top of the world, where the mountains were so high that they cut the clouds, and where Þjazi's stone hall stood at the very edge of the cliff above the gray sea. Loki flew low over the hall. He circled. He looked. The hall was empty.
That is to say, Þjazi was not in it. Loki could see, with the long sharp sight of the falcon, that the door of Þrymheim had been left locked from outside. The fire still burned in the great hearth at the center of the hall. There was movement, inside, a small figure, sitting beside the fire, holding a wooden box on her knees. Iðunn.
Loki dropped down. He landed on the narrow ledge of stone outside the door of the hall. He looked around. He saw, far below, on the cold gray sea, a small dark shape moving on the water. It was Þjazi.
The giant had gone out to fish, or to gather seaweed, or to attend to whatever errands took giants out into the cold seas of their high country. He was far away. He would not be back for some hours. Loki had time. He shrugged off the falcon cloak for a moment.
He stood, in his own shape, on the cold ledge of stone. He went to the door of the hall. He broke the lock, it was a giant's lock, made for a giant's strength, but Loki was a clever god, and he knew how to break locks that were not meant for him. The door swung open. He stepped inside.
Iðunn looked up from her chair. She saw him. She did not, at first, react. Her face was very still. The fire of the great hearth made shadows on her face.
She had not eaten. She had not slept well, Loki could see. Her hair was loose and unbrushed. She held the wooden box on her knees. Loki crossed the hall.
He came to her. He knelt by her chair. He said: "Iðunn. I have come to take you home." She said, slowly: "You are the one who brought me here." He said: "I am. I am the one who brought you here.
I am sorry. I will not make excuses. I will only do what I came to do. We must go. Now.
He is far away but he will not be far always. We must go quickly." She looked at him for a long time. Then she stood. She lifted the wooden box. She held it tightly against her chest.
She nodded. Loki said: "I cannot carry you in this shape. Þjazi would see us. He would catch us. I will turn you small. I will turn you into a nut.
I will carry the nut in my talons. The wind will move me faster than the eagle can fly, but only if you are small. Do you understand?" She said: "Yes." He raised his hand. He spoke a word over her, and the word is not preserved in the sources, and we will not invent it for the listener, but he spoke a word, and Iðunn became a small brown hazelnut, the kind that falls from a tree at the end of summer. She lay in the palm of his hand.
The wooden box, which she had been holding, became small with her. It was a tiny chest now, the size of a thimble, set neatly into the soft side of the nut. He closed his fingers around her. He put on the falcon cloak. He stepped to the ledge.
He spread his wings. He flew.
Part 2635
Chapter Ten. The Nut and the Fire. Loki flew south. He flew fast. The wind sang in the long brown feathers of his wings.
The cold air parted before him. The hazelnut, which was Iðunn, which was the goddess of apples folded small enough to carry, was held tight in the curl of his talons. He kept her safe. He flew low at first, hugging the rocks and the gray water, so that Þjazi would not see him. But he could not hide for long. Þjazi, far out at sea, saw him.
The giant had been sitting in a boat. He had a fishing line down. He had been thinking about the fire in his hall and about the goddess sitting beside it. He had been thinking about whether she had eaten any of the apples yet. He had been thinking, perhaps, about the apples themselves, about taking one for himself, that night, when he returned.
He had been thinking, in the slow way that giants think, about how good it would be to feel the years lift away. He looked up. He saw, against the long pale sky, a small dark shape moving fast. It was moving the wrong way. It was moving south.
It was moving away from Þrymheim. He understood at once. He stood up in the boat. He stretched. He took the form of an eagle.
He spread his wings. He launched himself into the air. He climbed. He climbed fast. He fixed his great yellow eyes on the small shape ahead of him, and he flew.
The two birds raced south. Loki was faster. The falcon cloak was faster than the body of any eagle. But Þjazi was much, much bigger. He was the size of a small house, and the wind he could move with the beating of his enormous wings was greater than any wind a falcon could ride.
He could not match Loki in speed, but he could close the distance through brute force. He flew, behind Loki, faster than any eagle had ever flown. The gap began to close. Loki saw the giant behind him. He saw, in his small sharp falcon eyes, the great bronze shape coming up out of the gray air.
He flew harder. He flew at the very limit of what the falcon cloak could carry him. The miles passed beneath them. The cold seas became the brown lands. The brown lands became the southern forests.
The southern forests became, at last, the green hills outside Asgard. Loki could see, ahead of him, the high walls of his home. He could see the towers. He could see the gate. He could also feel, behind him, the wind from Þjazi's wings.
It came on his back like a cold storm. The giant was very close now. The giant was perhaps a mile behind. Perhaps less. Loki could not turn his head to look without losing speed, and he did not turn.
In Asgard, on the walls, the watchman of the high tower had seen them coming. The watchman called out. He shouted down into the courtyard. The gods of Asgard were already standing at the foot of the walls, ready, because they had been watching the northern sky for Loki for many days now. They saw, then, the small dark shape of the falcon, with Þjazi's great bronze shape behind it.
They understood at once what they were seeing. They understood that the falcon was Loki, and that Þjazi must not be permitted to reach the city. They began to act. The gods of Asgard had prepared for this. They had piled, all along the inner walls, great heaps of wood shavings.
Fine dry shavings, the kind that catch fire fast and burn hot. The piles ran along the entire length of the inside of the walls. The gods had set torches ready beside the piles. They had been waiting. Now, as the small falcon swept low over the wall and dropped into the courtyard, as Loki crossed the walls and Þjazi was perhaps only seconds behind, the gods touched their torches to the wood shavings.
The piles caught. The fire ran along the inside of the walls. It went up. It rose high. It rose so high that, in a moment, there was a wall of flame above the walls of Asgard, a high curtain of burning air all the way around the city. Þjazi, behind Loki, came down at the walls with all the speed he had built up over hundreds of miles of pursuit.
He did not see the fire until he was almost upon it. He could not slow. He could not turn. He hit the wall of flame at the moment his body crossed the line of the stones. His wings, the great bronze feathers of his wings, they caught.
They went up in a great burst of orange. The smell of burning feathers filled the air. The eagle, who was Þjazi, dropped. He fell out of the air on the inside of the walls of Asgard. He landed heavily on the stones of the courtyard.
He thrashed. He tried to rise. He could not. His wings were ruined. His feathers were burning.
He was still, in form, an eagle, but he was an eagle who could not fly and would never fly again. The gods of Asgard came down upon him. They killed him there. They killed him in the courtyard, between the high walls of the city. The exact manner of his killing is not described in detail in the surviving sources, and we will not invent it for the listener.
He was killed. He was a great enemy who had taken a goddess they loved and held her in the cold mountains of the north, and they killed him without ceremony and without long debate. When it was done, Loki landed on the stones of the courtyard. He shrugged off the falcon cloak. He opened his hand.
The small hazelnut lay in his palm. He spoke a word over it, and it grew. The shape of the goddess returned. Iðunn was in the courtyard with them. She had her wooden box in her hand.
She was unharmed. The gods gathered around her. Bragi her husband came running. He took her in his arms. He did not speak.
She did not speak. They stood in the courtyard of Asgard with the body of the eagle smoking on the stones beside them, and they held each other. Iðunn opened her box. She took out an apple. She gave it to Frigg.
Frigg ate it where she stood. The silver strand in her hair, the gods saw, very slowly, very quietly, faded. She turned, and her face was the face she had had before, full and bright and unworn. Iðunn went around the courtyard. She gave each god an apple.
They each ate, where they stood. The lines at their eyes loosened. The gray at their temples faded. The first soft furrows on their foreheads smoothed away. By the time the apples were gone, the gods of Asgard were as they had been a week before.
The years had let go of them. The orchard had come home. Iðunn went into Bragi's hall, then. She closed the door behind her. What was said between them, in the small hall they had shared for a thousand years, is not preserved in any of the surviving sources, and we will not invent it.
We will only say that the door was closed for a long time, and that when it opened again, much later, the two of them came out and walked together back to Iðunn's orchard, and the door of the orchard closed behind them, and the small walled grove was quiet again for the first time in many days. The body of the eagle, by then, had been carried away from the courtyard. The fire on the walls had been put out. The wood shavings had been swept up. The high white smoke that had risen above Asgard during the burning had thinned into a long pale streak across the late afternoon sky, and was, slowly, drifting eastward, and being lost.
Part 2636
Chapter Eleven. The Daughter Who Came for Vengeance. The body of Þjazi did not lie long in the courtyard. The gods, when their joy had cooled a little, considered what to do with it. A dead giant is a difficult thing.
He is too large to bury easily. He is too dangerous, sometimes, to leave above ground. There is a long tradition, in the surviving sources, that the bodies of slain giants are difficult and uncanny, and the gods had reasons of their own for wishing to be careful. In the end, they did what they often did with the bodies of great enemies. They burned what could be burned.
They kept what could be useful. The eyes of Þjazi, in particular, the great pale yellow eyes of the eagle, were not burned. They were taken out and set aside. They were not destroyed. Óðinn kept them. We will return to the eyes shortly.
But before the eyes, In the high mountains, in the cold country, Þjazi had had a daughter. Her name was Skaði. The sources tell us very little about her early life. They tell us that she was a giantess of the high places, a daughter of the great mountains where the snow lies all year. She lived alone, the texts suggest, in a hall not far from her father's.
She hunted on skis. She wore a long coat of mail. She carried a bow. She killed bears in the deep forest the way other women threaded wool. She was not, in the surviving sources, like other women of the giant kind.
She was hard. She was solitary. She did not warm easily. There is a kenning preserved in the old skaldic poetry that calls her ǫndurdís, the ski goddess, or the goddess of snowshoes. The image is of a tall woman in fur and mail and a long bow, moving very fast across a high snowfield, leaving two long shallow tracks behind her, alone, in country where no one else can go.
That is the woman who came down out of the mountains when she heard her father had been killed. She had been close to her father. The texts do not dwell on this, but the demand she came south to make is the demand of someone who has lost a person she loved. Þjazi had been the only family she had. The two of them had lived in their high country together, in the cold places no other beings could endure, and now there was only her. The eagle who had been her father, the great bronze shape that had come and gone from Þrymheim across her whole life, was a small heap of ash on the stones of a far off courtyard.
When word reached her, and the sources do not say exactly how the word reached her, when she understood that her father had not returned from his journey to the south, and that her father had been killed by the gods of Asgard, she did not weep. She put on her coat of mail. She took up her bow. She put her skis under her arm. She walked down out of the mountains.
She came south. She came across the same long country that her father had flown over, only she came on foot, through deep snow and across the wide brown lands. She came to the gates of Asgard. The watchman saw her coming. He sent word ahead.
The gods met her at the gate. They came in some number, Óðinn, Frigg, Bragi, several others. They stood at the gate in the bright morning sun and watched the tall woman in the coat of mail come up the road. They watched her stop at a respectful distance, her skis still under her arm, her bow on her back, her face very still. She did not bow.
She did not speak first. She waited. Óðinn spoke. He said: "Welcome, daughter of Þjazi. We have heard of you. We are sorry for your father's death.
Speak. What do you wish." Skaði said: "Vengeance. Or weregild. I will not leave without one of the two. If you do not give me one, I will come back at the head of an army of the high mountains.
I will tell every frost giant and stone giant and mountain troll in the north of the world that the Æsir have killed my father, and I will lead them down upon your gates." The gods, in the surviving sources, do not laugh at her. They take her seriously. She is a giantess. She is the daughter of a great giant. The threat of an army of frost giants and mountain trolls is the kind of threat that the Æsir, in their long history, have learned not to dismiss.
They consider. They offer her weregild, the payment a killing requires under the old laws, the gold given to a family for the death of one of theirs. Skaði refuses. She says she does not want gold. She has gold of her own.
She says she wants two things. The gods ask her what they are. She says: First, I want a husband, from among the Æsir. I want to take one of you home with me, to my mountains, and live as your wife. The gods look at one another.
There is no easy way to grant this. A god who marries a giantess and goes to live in the high cold mountains will be miserable. None of them want to volunteer. Skaði sees this. She says: I will make it easier.
I will choose my husband from among you, but I will choose only by sight of his feet. You will stand all in a row, with curtains in front of you, so that I can see only your feet. I will pick. Whoever I pick, I marry. The gods agree.
They think, and this is in Snorri, that she will look for the most beautiful feet, and that she will pick Baldr, who is the most beautiful of all the Æsir, and who is also unmarried. They are not unhappy about this. Baldr is young and strong and could endure the cold of the mountains for a time. They set up the curtains. The Æsir stand behind them in a row.
Only the feet of each are visible. Skaði walks along the row. She looks at the feet. She is, the sources say, looking very carefully. She stops at one pair of feet that are smoother and whiter than all the others.
They look very clean. They look very well cared for. She thinks, certainly, these are the feet of the most beautiful god. She points. She says: This one.
I take this one. The curtains are drawn back. The feet do not belong to Baldr. The feet belong to Njǫrðr, the father of Freyr and Freyja, the god of the calm sea, who has spent his whole long life walking on wet sand and in salt water, and whose feet are accordingly the smoothest and whitest of any god in Asgard. He is older than Baldr.
He is not as beautiful in the way Baldr is beautiful. He is a quiet god, a god of small waves and of ships and of harbors. Skaði stands there for a moment, looking at him. She has been tricked, in a sense. She did what she said she would do.
The gods did what they said they would do. But she has not gotten the husband she had hoped for. She has, instead, this older quieter god of the sea, who is now her husband by her own oath, and who must come with her into the mountains. She does not break her word. She nods.
But she says: Now. The second thing. She says: One of you must make me laugh. I have not laughed since my father died. I will not laugh again, I think.
But if one of you can make me laugh, here, in front of all the rest of the Æsir, I will count my second debt paid. The gods look around at one another. None of them is famous for making giantesses laugh. Then Loki steps forward. Loki, of course.
Loki, who had brought all of this on in the first place. Loki, who is responsible for the death of her father in the first place, in the truest and deepest sense. Loki, who has not been entirely forgiven by anyone for any of it. He steps forward. He says: I will make her laugh.
What Loki does next is, in the surviving sources, described in some detail, and we will tell it lightly. Loki gets hold of a goat, a billy goat, with horns, the kind that lives in the high places, and he ties one end of a rope to the goat and the other end of the rope to himself. He ties it in a place that, if the goat pulls, would be very painful for Loki. The goat pulls. Loki pulls.
The goat does not understand and bleats. Loki cries out and grimaces. The two of them do an absurd tugging dance, the goat at one end, Loki at the other, both of them shouting, until at last the rope gives way and Loki falls forward into Skaði's lap. He lands there, at her feet. He looks up at her, helpless and grinning.
Skaði, watching the whole absurd performance, watching the great Loki, the foster brother of Óðinn, who had stood at the high councils, who had taken treasures from dwarves and bound great wolves, reduced to a man tied to a goat by his most private parts, Skaði laughs. She laughs out loud. She cannot stop herself. It is the first time she has laughed since her father's death. The laugh fills the courtyard of Asgard.
It is, in some sense, the strangest sound the gods have heard in many days, the sound of a giantess of the high mountains laughing, surprised by her own laughter, at a fool of a god lying tied to a goat at her feet. When she stops laughing, she nods. She says: That counts. The two debts, husband and laugh, are paid. But Snorri tells us one more thing happened.
After the laugh, after the marriage was sealed, Óðinn did one more thing of his own accord. He did not have to. Skaði had not demanded it. But he understood that a great enemy had been killed, and that this enemy had been a father, and that a father deserves something more than a quiet death in the corner of a courtyard. Óðinn went to the place where the eyes of Þjazi had been kept. He took the two great pale eyes of Þjazi out from where they had been kept.
They were heavy. They were larger than any human eye. He lifted them, one in each hand. He stood in the courtyard. He looked up at the cold winter sky above Asgard.
He spoke to Skaði. He said: Daughter of Þjazi. Look up. She looked up. He threw them.
The eyes rise. They rise higher than the towers. They rise past the walls. They rise into the air, faster and faster, and they do not stop. They go up into the sky and they keep going up, and they pass through the lower clouds, and then the higher clouds, and then up into the deep cold air above the clouds.
They become smaller, and brighter, and at last they become two small steady points of light that hang above the world, and they do not move. The two stars are still there. They have been there since that night. They are the eyes of Þjazi, the giant who carried away the goddess of apples in his wings, and who flew through fire above the walls of Asgard, and who was killed in a courtyard between high walls on a bright autumn day. They look down on the cold winter world from a long way up.
They are pale. They are steady. They do not flicker.
Part 2637
Chapter Twelve. Goodnight. And the Wolf at the Edge of Time. Iðunn returned to her orchard. The door, which had been locked while she was gone, opened to her hand.
The single tree at the center of the small grove, which had not been tended for many days, was still standing, with apples ripening on its branches. Iðunn walked into the orchard. She set the small wooden chest down on the grass at the foot of the tree. She knelt. She put her hand against the bark of the tree.
The tree, in the surviving sources, does not respond to her touch. The sources do not say that the tree knew she was gone. It is, after all, only a tree. But it is also the only tree of its kind, and it is hers, and we will allow ourselves a small interpretation here: in our telling, the tree did know. The tree had been waiting.
The leaves shifted slightly, as if in a wind, although no wind was blowing in the small walled grove. Iðunn rose. She gathered the day's apples. She put them into her chest. She walked back to the door of the orchard.
She passed out into the streets of Asgard with the box at her hip. The gods who saw her in the street, those who had not yet been given an apple, came to her. She gave to each in turn. There were no more lines at the corners of their eyes by the end of that day. No more silver in any hair.
The years that had begun to gather on the Æsir had been turned back. The gods were as they had been. Skaði took Njǫrðr with her into the mountains. The story of what happened next is told by Snorri in a few short lines, and it is worth telling. They agreed, the two of them, to spend nine nights in her country, in Þrymheim, in the high cold mountains, and then nine nights in his country, in Nóatún, at the calm harbor by the sea.
They would alternate. They would try. Snorri preserves the small verses they spoke when they returned from the first nine nights. Njǫrðr, coming down out of the mountains, says that the howling of the wolves in those high cold places was hateful to him compared to the song of the swans by the sea. And Skaði, coming back from her time at Nóatún, says that she could not sleep at the harbor for the noise of the seabirds, which woke her every morning.
Neither could endure the other's country. Eventually, the sources tell us, they parted. He went back to the harbor of Nóatún and the smell of salt. She went back to the high snow of Þrymheim and the smell of pine. They were not, in the end, a marriage that worked.
But that is a story for another evening. Bragi composed a poem about Iðunn's return. He sang it that night in the great hall. The poem is not preserved in the surviving sources. We do not know what it was.
We can imagine that it was a slow poem, a quiet one, suited to the long warm evening at the fire and the relief of a goddess who had been taken and was now home. We can imagine that Iðunn sat near him while he sang it, with her hand on the wooden box, and that when the poem was done, she went to bed. Loki, in the surviving sources, is not punished for this episode. The gods do not put him in chains. They do not banish him from Asgard.
They do not even, in the long way, hold it against him. They simply note that, once again, a great trouble has come into the city because of Loki, and that a great trouble has been resolved because of Loki, and that they are not yet ready to do anything about the question of whether to keep him. That question will be answered in a later story. For tonight, the story closes here. The eyes of Þjazi hang in the winter sky.
Iðunn is back in her orchard. The years, for the moment, are not gathering on the gods of Asgard. There is a long and strange afterthought to this story that I want to share with you before we close. It is not in the sources, not as a stated thing. It is in the shadow the story casts.
It belongs here. It is this: the gods knew, even in their joy at Iðunn's return, that they had been shown something they could not unsee. They had seen the silver in their hair. They had seen the small creases at their knuckles. They had felt the years gather on them.
They had understood, for a week or two, what it was to be mortal, what it was to belong to the great running stream of time that takes a young man and turns him into an old man and at last takes him from the world entirely. The Æsir, when Iðunn was gone, had been mortal. They had not liked it. But, and this is the thing the sources do not say outright, but which is implied by the long arc of the season we are slowly walking together, but they had also understood, in that week, something true about themselves that they had not understood before. They had understood that the apples did not make them gods.
The apples kept the years from them. But the gods were what they were because of who they were, not because of what they ate. And one day, at a day long foretold, at a twilight whose name we have not yet spoken, the apples would not be enough. The wolf at the edge of time would come for them, and not the orchards of Iðunn nor the chest at her hip nor the long memory of Bragi would be enough to keep him away. They knew this.
They did not speak of it, in the courtyard, on the day Iðunn returned. But they knew it. Each of them. That knowledge, the knowledge that even the gods would one day be old, entered them, in the short week of Iðunn's absence, and it did not leave. It is in the long shadow of every story we have told so far, and it will be in the long shadow of every story to come.
You may have felt it yourself, on a quiet morning, looking in a mirror, when you have suddenly seen a small new line that you had not seen the day before. You may have felt it standing at the window, watching a child grow taller than you remember. You may have felt it the first time someone you love said something that suggested they had begun to forget. It is the gathering of the years. It is the slow press of time on the body and the mind.
The Norse gods, the great Æsir of the high cathedral of Asgard, the riders of the storm and the keepers of wisdom and the slayers of giants, they too knew it, just for a week, when the apples ran out. And they did not like it. But they also knew, when Iðunn returned and the lines smoothed away and the silver in their hair faded back to its own dark color, they also knew that it would come for them again. That it would come, in the end, for everyone. That the apples could only buy them time.
And that one night, at a dim twilight that the seers had already seen, the time would run out, and the wolf in the iron wood, whose binding you may remember from a different evening's story, would lift his head, and the long darkness would begin. They sat together that night in the great hall. They ate. They drank. They were as they had been.
But each of them, perhaps, looked once or twice at the door, where Iðunn had returned, and felt, under all the relief, a small cold knowledge that this evening was not as it had been before. That the world had become a little smaller. That the apples were not, after all, the answer to everything. And that was the gift that Þjazi gave to Asgard, in the end. Not the cold mountain hall.
Not the great wings that brought down a wall of fire. Not the eyes in the winter sky. The knowledge. That even the gods are mortal. And now, The fire is low.
The stars of Þjazi are out, somewhere above us, two small steady points among the many others. Iðunn is in her orchard. The apples are ripening on the tree. If you have stayed with me this far, and few do, then you have been very patient. If you have drifted off, somewhere in the long flight north, or in the silent hours when Iðunn sat alone in Þrymheim with the box on her knees, or in the courtyard of Asgard when the eyes rose into the sky, then you are exactly where you should be.
The Almanac will return. Goodnight, dear listener. Goodnight.
The Death of Baldr
Welcome to The Sleeping Almanac. Tonight we follow a story about a death. About the most beautiful of the gods, and the dream he kept having that no one in Asgard could ease. About a mother who walked all of the worlds asking the trees, the stones, the waters, the iron, the metals, the sicknesses, the beasts, the birds, the serpents, the poisons, asking each of them in turn to swear an oath that they would not harm her son. About a small parasitic plant growing on an oak west of Valhǫll that no one thought to ask, because it was too young to take an oath.
About a blind brother who could not see, and a small dart placed in his hand. And about a long ride down into Hel, on the eight legged horse, through valleys so dark and so deep that the rider could not see his own hand for nine nights. This is the story of Baldr. Of his death. And of how, after his death, the world of the gods was no longer the world it had been before.
It is the story of Frigg, who took the oaths. Of Loki, who found the one thing she did not. Of Hǫðr, who threw the dart and did not know what he was throwing. Of Hermóðr the bold, who rode the eight legged horse to the underworld and stood before the goddess Hel herself, and asked for his brother back. Of Hringhorni, the greatest of all ships, which the giantess Hyrrokkin pushed into the sea with such force that the rollers caught fire.
Of Nanna, who died of grief on the shore and was placed beside her husband on the pyre. Of Þǫkk, a name we will speak softly tonight, the giantess in the cave who would not weep. It is the story we have been moving toward, slowly, since the season began. Across the evenings that have come before tonight, we have walked through the cosmos and the wisdom and the binding and the apples. We have heard, in earlier episodes, the prophecies of the seeresses, small distant warnings, given in quiet voices, that the gods would not, in the end, hold all the worlds forever.
We have not, until tonight, watched any of those prophecies come to pass. Tonight we will. Tonight is the night the first prophecy lands in the great hall of Asgard, and the gods understand, for the first time, that the appointed twilight is no longer a thing that lives somewhere far ahead of them. It is a thing that has started moving in their direction. This is the turning point of the entire Norse mythology, and the surviving sources know it.
Snorri Sturluson, in his Prose Edda, gives this story more space than he gives any other. The Poetic Edda preserves a separate poem just about Baldr's dreams, Baldrs draumar, that tells us what the gods knew in the very first hours of the trouble. A skaldic poet named Úlfr Uggason, writing in the tenth century, more than two hundred years before Snorri, set the scenes of Baldr's funeral into a long descriptive poem called Húsdrápa, which we still have in fragments. Three sources, written across three centuries, all reaching back to one story. We are going to tell it carefully tonight.
We will follow Snorri's account where Snorri is clearest. We will follow Baldrs draumar where the poem adds what Snorri did not. We will name Húsdrápa when we describe the funeral, because that is the oldest surviving account of it. And where the sources are silent, we will, in the small careful way of this Almanac, say that we are reaching past them, and we will reach gently. Episode 6 of a complete twelve part season.
New episodes every Wednesday and Sunday at 8pm ET. If you fall asleep before the end, leave a 💤 in the comments. I read every one in the morning. Settle in. Lower the lights.
Let your shoulders drop. We begin in the high hall of Asgard, where a god has not been sleeping well.
Part 2639
Chapter One. The Dream That Baldr Had. There is a kind of dream that is not quite a dream. It is not made of the ordinary stuff a sleeping mind produces, the rooms you have lived in, the voices you have heard, the small unfinished business of the day. It is made of something stranger.
It feels true while it is happening. It leaves the dreamer, on waking, with a heaviness that does not lift through the day, or through the next day, or through any day that follows. It is not a nightmare. A nightmare is a thing the mind makes to frighten itself. This is a thing that comes from somewhere else.
Baldr began to have such dreams. Baldr, and we should pause on his name a moment before we go on, Baldr was the most beautiful of all the gods. Snorri Sturluson, who is our chief source for the story we are about to tell, describes him in Gylfaginning, chapter twenty two, this way. He is the son of Óðinn and of Frigg. He is so fair of face and so bright that light shines from him.
There is a plant so white that it is called Baldrsbrá, Baldr's brow, because it is the whitest thing in the world, and even it is not so white as the brow of the god whose name it bears. He lives, Snorri tells us, in a hall called Breiðablik, broad shining, and Snorri says of that hall that no unclean thing may be in it. He is the wisest of the Æsir. He is the most pleasant spoken. He is the most gracious.
The judgements he gives are the most beautiful, although, and Snorri puts this strangely, Baldr's judgements are so finely spoken that none of his rulings, in fact, ever come to pass. The other gods love him. There is no god in Asgard the other gods love more. This is the god who began to dream his own death. The dreams, Snorri tells us, came to Baldr at night.
He did not at first speak of them. He went about his days in Asgard as he had always gone about them. He sat in his hall. He took counsel with his brothers. He walked the streets of the city and greeted those who greeted him, and his face was as bright as it had always been.
But there was something behind the brightness now that there had not been before. A small fixed look around the eyes. A way of pausing, sometimes, mid sentence, as if he had just remembered something he could not bring himself to say. The first dream came on an evening that had been, by every other measure, an ordinary evening. Baldr had eaten with his wife.
He had walked, before sleeping, on the small enclosed terrace of his hall, the terrace that looked out over the western quarter of Asgard. He had watched the light go down over the rooftops. He had thought of nothing in particular. He had gone in, when the cold began to come, and he had drawn the covers of his bed up to his chest, and he had slept. The dream came to him in the deep part of the night.
Snorri does not describe the content of the dreams in detail. He says only that they were heavy, and that they were dreams of things to come, and that they were not the kind of dreams a god in his hall should have. We will not press further than Snorri presses. We will say only that Baldr woke from that first dream sometime before dawn, and lay in the dark for a long time afterward without moving, and that when the sun finally came up through the eastern windows, he rose with the small fixed look around his eyes that the other gods would, in the days that followed, come to recognize. His wife noticed.
His wife was Nanna, daughter of Nepr, and we will say a little about her in a moment, because she belongs to this story too. She noticed the change in him before anyone else did. She would wake in the deep part of the night and find Baldr awake beside her, lying on his back, his eyes open, looking up at the wooden beams of their hall, his lips slightly parted as if he were waiting to speak but the words had not come. She would ask him what was wrong. He would close his eyes again and say only that he had had a small bad dream.
Go back to sleep, he would say. It is nothing. She would sleep. In the morning he would not speak of it. But the dreams did not stop.
They continued for many nights. And after a time, Baldr could no longer hold them inside himself. He went to the high seat where Óðinn his father sat. He went in the morning, when the light was just beginning to come through the eastern windows of the great hall of Glaðsheimr. He stood before his father and he told him.
Snorri does not give us the exact words Baldr used. We will not invent them either. We can say only that the dreams were dreams of his own death. They were vivid. They came back, with small variations, night after night.
In one form of the dream, and here we are reaching past what the surviving sources directly say, but the long tradition of the story implies it, in one form Baldr saw the gates of a country he did not know. In another, he saw a feast laid out in a hall he had never visited, the benches strewn with gold, the mead cup raised, and the seat at the head of the long table empty, waiting for him. In another, a long road, a cold road, going down between high black walls of rock into a darkness that was not the darkness of any night he had lived through. Whatever the dreams were, Baldr understood them. He knew what they were telling him.
They were telling him that he was going to die. The Æsir, when Baldr told them, did not know what to do. It is the strange thing about gods. The gods of Asgard knew that they would die, in the end, they knew it from the prophecies of the vǫlur, the seeresses, who had said over the centuries that all things end at a twilight whose name we do not need to speak yet. But they had not expected the dying to begin in their own time.
They had not expected it to begin with Baldr, Baldr, who was the most beloved, the brightest, the one no one in Asgard could imagine being without. They called a council. They sat in the great hall and they spoke long. They asked each other what to do. They asked what the dreams meant.
They asked who might be able to interpret them, and what could be done if the interpretation was the worst one. And in the end, Óðinn rose from the high seat and said: I will go and find out. I will ride down and ask one who knows. He went out from the council. He took down his cloak from the peg by the door.
He went to the stables. He saddled his horse, Sleipnir, the great eight legged horse, who could run on any road, who could cross any water, who could pass through any country no other horse could pass. He swung up into the saddle. He turned the horse east, toward the road that goes down. He rode out of Asgard alone.
Part 2640
Chapter Two. The Long Ride to Hel. There is a poem in the Poetic Edda called Baldrs draumar, Baldr's dreams. It is short. It is only a few stanzas long.
It is told in a kind of stripped down, dark Eddic verse, the way you might tell a story to a child in the small hours when you want the child to listen but you do not want to frighten them too much. The poem begins with the gathering of the gods over Baldr's dreams. It ends with Óðinn riding to the underworld to ask a dead seeress what those dreams mean. What we are about to tell is what that poem tells, combined with what Snorri later wrote in his fuller telling. Where the two diverge, we will say so.
Where they agree, we will speak as one. Óðinn rode east. He rode through Niflheim, the country of mist, the country between the worlds, the country whose name means "house of mist." He rode through valleys whose floors were the color of old iron and whose walls were the color of slate. He rode under a sky that was not quite a sky, a sky that was lower than the sky of Miðgarðr, lower than the sky of Asgard, a sky that seemed to press down on the rider as if it could feel his weight and was minding it. He rode for nine nights. That is what Snorri tells us, when he describes a similar journey later.
Nine nights of riding through deep dark valleys, with the rider unable to see anything around him, not the road, not the sides of the valley, not the head of his own horse. Only the deep cold dark, and the soft regular sound of the eight hooves on the unseen path beneath, and the cold breath of the horse on the rider's hands. Sleipnir did not stop. Sleipnir did not need to stop. The eight legged horse, born of the strange mare shape Loki took once long ago, a story for another evening, Sleipnir could run forever if Óðinn asked him to.
Down through the country of mist, down past the lower rivers, down to the gates of the underworld itself. The gates were closed. Snorri does not describe these gates in his account of Hermóðr's later journey, but Baldrs draumar tells us this: Óðinn came to a high hall in the east, and the hall was the hall of Hel, and there was death dew on it, and at the doors a dog was barking. The dog had blood on his breast. He had been gnawing some unseen carcass.
He saw Óðinn coming. He came snarling toward him. Óðinn rode past him. The Allfather did not stop at the front gates of Hel. He rode around. He rode to the eastern side of the hall, and here we are following the poem's strange detail, to the eastern side of the hall, where in old times a vǫlva, a seeress, had been buried.
A great seeress. A woman who had known the futures of the gods. A woman who had, in her own time, walked the world and spoken her prophecies, and whose name had been forgotten by the living. She had been buried long ago in a mound east of Hel's hall. Her bones lay in the mound.
Her bones were the bones of one who could see. Óðinn dismounted. He stood beside the mound. He began to speak.
Part 2641
Chapter Three. The Seeress Who Did Not Want To Speak. The words Óðinn spoke at the mound, in the poem Baldrs draumar, are called valgaldr, speech of the slain, or more literally, charm of the slain. They are the kind of words by which a god could call up the dead, if the god was old enough and strong enough to know how. Óðinn knew how. He had learned, in the story we told some episodes ago, how to wake the dead.
He had paid for the knowledge. He had hung on the tree for nine nights. He had given his eye. He had taken the runes. He used the runes now.
He stood beside the mound, in the deep cold of the country east of Hel, and he spoke the charm. The earth above the mound moved. The seeress, in the old, slow way of the dead waking, rose from her bones. The poem does not describe her face. We will not describe it either.
We will say only that she was, by the time Óðinn finished his speaking, sitting up in her mound, her ancient form half visible in the cold thin air, her voice, when it came, coming from a long way off, the way the voice of the dead always comes from a long way off when the dead are called back to speak. She said: Who is this that has called me up. I have lain long in the dark. Snow fell on me. Rain beat on me.
Dew settled on me. I have been a long time dead. Who is this that has come. She did not know who Óðinn was. He did not, at first, tell her.
He gave a false name. In the poem he calls himself Vegtamr, wanderer, or way tame, and he says he is the son of Valtamr. Battle tame, son of war tame. He gives the names a vǫlva of old would have respected without question, the names of men born to the lineage of warriors. He asks her his question.
He asks: For whom are the benches in Hel decked. For whom is the gold strewn. For whom is the mead brewed. Who is the great one being awaited. The seeress answered.
She said: Here stands the mead, brewed for Baldr. The cup is covered. There is grief in Asgard. I have spoken under duress. Now I am silent.
The phrase "I have spoken under duress" is the formula the dead, in the old Norse tradition, use when they have been called up against their will. They give their answer. They give it true. And then they ask, by speaking the formula, to be allowed to return to the silence of their mound. The convention is that the asker, having heard the answer, lets the seeress sleep. Óðinn did not let her sleep. Óðinn pressed her.
He asked: Who shall be Baldr's killer. She answered: Hǫðr will throw the death bough. Hǫðr will become Baldr's killer. I have spoken under duress. Now I am silent.
He pressed again. He asked who would avenge Baldr. And here the seeress, from her cold mound east of Hel, told Óðinn the strangest small piece of the story we are telling tonight. She said: In the western halls, Rindr bears Váli. He shall fight at one night old.
He shall not wash his hands. He shall not comb his hair. He shall not rest until he has brought Hǫðr to the pyre. I have spoken under duress. Now I am silent.
The not washing and the not combing are, in the old Norse imagination, ritual signs. A man on a vengeance errand did not, by the old custom, wash or comb until his errand was complete. The signs marked him out. They told the people who saw him that he was a man on a mission, that he was not in his ordinary days, that he was to be left alone until what he had to do was done. Váli, the seeress was saying, would be one of these men.
He would be born for the errand. He would do the errand the day he was born. He would not, in his single day of vengeance, be a god to approach. Óðinn took the prophecy in. Rindr. Váli.
Rindr is a giantess. The sources tell us little of her. She lives, the poem implies, in the western halls, that is, in the country beyond the worlds, in some far place. Snorri tells us elsewhere that Óðinn would, in the time after this story, beget a son on her named Váli. Váli would be born for a single purpose: to avenge Baldr.
He would grow with the swiftness of a god born for a single act. At one night old, before he had washed his hands or combed his hair, that is, before he had even done the small things a person does on their first day, he would find Hǫðr and slay him. This is what the seeress told Óðinn. She did not know who she was speaking to. She thought she was speaking to a wanderer.
She told him the truth because the dead, called up by valgaldr, must tell the truth. But then Óðinn asked her one more question. He asked her something so strange, and the poem, in its sparse Eddic way, does not gloss it for us, he asked her: Who are these maidens who weep, and throw the throat cloths to the sky. It is not clear what this question means. Scholars have argued over it for centuries.
We will not solve it tonight. We will say only that it is the kind of question a god might ask a dead seeress to test whether she really is who he thinks she is. It is a question whose answer the wanderer Vegtamr would not need to know. It is a question whose answer only Óðinn would care about. And the seeress, when she heard the question, paused.
She paused, in the cold thin air east of Hel. She said, slowly: You are no wanderer, as I thought. You are Óðinn, the oldest of the gods. Óðinn did not deny it. She said: Go home, Óðinn. Go home, and have your triumph.
No one will call me up again, nor wake me with the wand of speech, until, and here the poem stops mid line, in a way that is mysterious, until Loki bursts his bonds and the wreckers come to the twilight. Then she was silent. The mound settled. The bones, the poem tells us, were bones again. Óðinn turned. He mounted Sleipnir.
He rode back through the country of mist, back up through Niflheim, back up the cold road to Asgard. He rode through nine nights. He rode into the gates of his own city as the sun was rising on the tenth morning. He brought the news to the gods. Their son, their bright son, the most beloved of the Æsir, was going to die.
His brother, the blind one, Hǫðr, was going to kill him.
Part 2642
Chapter Four. Frigg's Long Walking. Frigg, the mother, did not accept it. Frigg is one of the great goddesses of Asgard, and the surviving sources tell us less about her than they tell us about Freyja or about Iðunn or about Sif, but what they do tell us is consistent. She is Óðinn's wife.
She is the keeper of the household, but the household she keeps is not a household of small things, it is the household of all the Æsir. She is the keeper of the threshold, the lintels, the keys. She is, in Snorri's account, the only god other than Óðinn permitted to sit on the high seat Hliðskjálf and look out over all the worlds. She has, in some traditions, the gift of seeing the future, though in others it is said she sees but does not speak of what she sees. She is the mother of Baldr.
And she would not have her son die. Snorri tells us what she did. The chapter in Gylfaginning is fifty. The Æsir, Snorri says, took counsel, and the resolution that came of the counsel was this: Frigg, the goddess, took oaths from all things that they would not harm Baldr. Read that slowly.
She took oaths from all things. We need to understand what that means. She did not write a letter. She did not call a meeting. She did not send messengers.
She went, herself, in person, to every thing in the worlds that had the power to harm her son. She went to fire first. Fire is the oldest harm. Fire was there at the beginning, in the country called Múspell, in the south, where the giant Surtr keeps his flaming sword and waits for the appointed twilight. Fire is what cooks the food and warms the hall and lights the dark, but fire is also what burns the houses and the forests and the bodies of the dead, and Frigg knew that fire, of all the things in the world, was the one most likely, in some carelessness, to take her son.
She went to fire first. She went, the surviving sources do not say where, but we will imagine it. We will imagine her going to the great hearths of Asgard, kneeling beside them as if to warm her hands, and speaking under her breath to the small steady flames. We will imagine her walking south, to the borders of Múspell, where the air grows hot and the rocks themselves seem to shimmer, and speaking to the great flames there, the flames so old they have no memory of having been small. We will imagine her speaking to the small flames of mortal hearths in Miðgarðr, in the dim huts of farmers at night, in the kitchens of kings, in the camp fires of travelers under the stars.
She spoke to every fire she could find. She bound them all. Fire swore. She went to water. Water is the second great harm.
Water in its cold form, water in its deep form, the salt sea and the freshwater rivers and the lakes that hide the sleeping serpents and the rains that fall on the long roads. Water is what slakes the thirst and bears the boats and grows the grain, but water is also what drowns the swimmer, takes the ship, swallows the traveler at the river crossing. Frigg went to the seas first. She walked along the shores of Miðgarðr and spoke to the waves as they came in. She knelt at the water's edge with her cloak gathered up around her ankles, and she spoke into the water as one speaks into an ear.
The waves listened. The waves answered, in the slow rolling way that waves answer. She bound the sea by oath. She went to the rivers and bound them, going from river to river, from the great rivers that cross continents to the smallest brooks that run only after the spring rain. She spoke to each one.
Each one swore. She went to the lakes and bound them. She went, last, to the rain that falls from the sky, and made the rain swear too. There were rains in many countries that year, the sources do not say, but we will imagine that the rain that fell on the cold fields of Frigg's walking was a rain that had taken its oath, and fell knowing it would not harm what it touched. All of water swore that it would not harm her son.
She went to iron. Iron, of all the metals, is the great killer. The swords of men are iron. The axes are iron. The spears, the knives, the small thin needles that pierce.
Frigg went to iron and bound it. Iron swore. She went to all other metals, gold, silver, bronze, copper, lead, tin, the metals dug out of the earth by the dwarves of Svartalfheim. She bound each in turn. They each swore.
She went to stones. Every kind of stone, the round stones of riverbeds, the sharp flint that cuts, the great heavy stones that crush, the small pebbles that turn an ankle. She bound them all. They swore. She went to the trees.
Each kind of tree, in turn. The oak. The ash. The pine. The birch.
The willow. The thorn. The yew. The hazel. The elm.
The fir. The rowan with its red berries. The juniper with its blue ones. The alder. The maple.
The beech. She walked the forests of Miðgarðr and Asgard for many days, going from tree kind to tree kind, taking the oath of each. She stood under their canopies. She put her hand on their bark. She spoke the oath in a quiet voice, for the trees, she had learned in her long walking, listened to a quiet voice better than to a loud one, and she let her hand rest a long moment on the bark of each kind before moving on.
The trees, in turn, gave their word. The oak's word was deep and slow. The pine's word came down through the needles in a hush. The willow's word was given with a small sweep of its long branches. The hazel's word was given quickly, in the bright nervous way of the hazel.
The trees gave their word. She went to the sicknesses. This is the strange one, in Snorri's account. She went to fevers, and bound them. She went to coughs, and bound them.
She went to the small wasting illnesses that take a person slowly over months, and bound them. She went to the sudden sicknesses that take a person in a day. All swore. She went to the beasts. Every kind of four footed thing.
The wolves. The bears. The wild cattle. The deer. The boars.
The lynxes. The hares. The mice. Every animal in turn. She bound them all.
She went to the birds. Every kind of winged thing. She went to the serpents and the lizards and the cold blooded things that move along the ground. She went, finally, to the poisons, the venoms of the serpents, the dark drops in certain berries, the toxic things that grow in the wet places of the world. She bound all the poisons.
How long this took, Snorri does not say. We will allow ourselves a small interpretation here. We will imagine that it took many months. Perhaps a year. Perhaps longer.
We will imagine Frigg walking the world in a long gray cloak, with the dust of many roads on the hem, going from country to country, taking each oath in turn. Stopping in the evenings at the edges of forests, in the small huts of mortal women, in the open fields under the stars. Eating little. Speaking little. The mission steady and slow and patient.
The grief of her son's dreams sitting always at the back of her shoulders. The knowledge that if she failed in even one oath, her son would die. We will imagine the small details of the walking. The way her feet, in their soft leather shoes, came to know the surfaces of many countries, the soft moss of forest floors, the sharp gravel of mountain passes, the cool wet sand of sea shores. The way her hands, by the end, were marked by the texture of so many things she had touched in the binding, the rough bark of trees, the cold scales of serpents, the dry skin of stones in the sun, the wet hide of beasts she had reached out to.
The way her cloak, in the late part of the journey, was a cloak that had been many places, a cloak that smelled, at the same time, of pine and of sea and of smoke from many small fires, of the strange thin air of high places and the heavier air of valleys. We will imagine her sleeping, in those many months, in many beds. The bed of a king who recognized her and gave her his own chamber. The bed of a farmer's wife who did not recognize her but offered the warm corner by the hearth. The open ground of a forest clearing, with her cloak rolled up beneath her head, and the stars wheeling slowly above her through the gaps in the canopy.
The flat ledge of a high pass, where the cold was such that she did not sleep at all, but sat upright through the night, her cloak gathered around her, waiting for the dawn so that she could go on with the next set of oaths. We will imagine that she did not, in those months, speak of her son. She would have known better than to speak of him to those she met. She would have known that to speak of him aloud would have been to draw attention to the very thing she was trying to protect. So she walked silent, and she bound silent, and she went on.
We do not know how long it took. We know only that, in the end, she returned to Asgard. She returned and she stood before the Æsir and she said: It is done. Every thing in the worlds has sworn. Nothing will harm my son.
There was, in Snorri's account, one small exception. But she did not mention it. She did not, in fact, even remember it. It seemed too small to remember.
Part 2643
Chapter Five. The Sport of the Gods. The Æsir, when they heard that Baldr was now safe from all harm, were filled with joy. Joy is a thing the gods of the Norse stories do not feel often. The Norse gods are not, mostly, a joyful pantheon.
They are wary. They are watchful. They are aware of the prophecies and of the slow turning of fate. But on this day, when Frigg returned from her long walking and said: it is done, on this day, the Æsir felt something close to joy. Their bright son, the beloved one, the one whose dreams had been so bad, he was safe.
They began to play. This is the part of the story that is, in some way, the strangest. Snorri tells it without comment. He simply says it happened. The Æsir, knowing that nothing could harm Baldr, made it into a sport.
They would gather in the courtyard of Asgard. They would stand Baldr in the center of the gathering. And they would throw things at him. They threw stones first. The stones bounced off and fell harmlessly to the ground beside him.
The Æsir stood in a loose circle around him and they threw, Þórr threw the heaviest stones, the great round river stones that took two of his hands to lift, and the stones, in their flight, would slow as they came near Baldr, and they would fall at his feet without striking him. Týr threw the throwing stones of the warriors, smaller and sharper, the stones a man threw in a contest. They fell harmless too. Bragi, who was not a warrior but a skald, threw a small smooth stone he picked up from the courtyard at his feet, and the stone went up in a high arc and came down soft as a leaf on Baldr's shoulder, where it rested for a moment and then rolled down his cloak and onto the cobbles. They threw spears.
The spears, in mid flight, would lose their edge as they came near Baldr, they would soften, they would turn aside, they would fall at his feet. Óðinn himself, the Allfather, threw a great spear once, Gungnir, the spear that always strikes its target, and Gungnir, the spear that always strikes its target, did not strike Baldr. The spear arced over the courtyard, came down toward Baldr's chest, and at the very last moment, perhaps an inch from his cloak, turned, in mid air, away. It fell, light, on the cobbles beside him. Óðinn looked at it for a long moment. Then he laughed too. They threw axes.
The axes did the same. They drew their swords and they swung at him, and the swords passed through where Baldr was as if Baldr were not there, and Baldr stood smiling, and no harm came to him. This became, Snorri says, an honor. A game of honor. It became the way the Æsir greeted Baldr in the mornings.
Walking into the courtyard, a god would pick up a stone or draw his sword, and he would throw, and the thing thrown would harmlessly turn aside, and Baldr would laugh, and the god would laugh, and the morning would begin. We need to pause and think about this for a moment. In one reading of the Eddas, and this reading is contested by scholars, who have argued about it for many years, the sport of throwing things at Baldr is a kind of ritual. It is not, in this reading, cruelty. It is the gods affirming, every morning, the great oath their mother and queen had taken.
It is them saying: here is our brother. Here is our most beloved. Here is the proof that he cannot be harmed. Watch the spear turn aside. Watch the stone fall.
In another reading, it is darker. In another reading, the gods of Asgard, having been told that their son is invulnerable, want, at some level beneath the level they would admit to, they want to test it. They want to see what would happen if it failed. They want to push against the oath. Snorri does not tell us which reading is right.
He simply describes the sport. We will, for the rest of tonight, take the gentler reading. We will assume the gods were affirming the oath, not pushing it. We will assume the throwing was joyful. But we will also note that, somewhere in Asgard, one god was watching the sport.
One god was watching, and his face, when no one was looking, his face was not joyful. Loki was watching. Loki, foster brother of Óðinn. Loki, whom you have heard much about in the episodes that have come before this one. Loki, who had brought the gods their greatest treasures and also their greatest troubles.
Loki, who walked the streets of Asgard a free god still, although the gods watched him more carefully every season that passed. Loki was watching the sport. He did not like it. Snorri does not give us his reasons. The sources are silent.
We will allow ourselves to wonder, here, what Loki saw. Perhaps he saw the joy of the other gods and was, in his strange dark heart, jealous. Perhaps he saw the affirmation of Baldr's invulnerability and was, in his other strange capacity, curious. Perhaps he wondered, the way a child wonders at a strong wall: where, somewhere, is the small crack? He thought he would go and find out.
Part 2644
Chapter Six. The Old Woman at Frigg's Door. There is, in the story we are telling, a great deal of shape shifting. Loki, in the Norse stories, is famous for his shapes. He has been a falcon, when he borrowed Freyja's cloak, you may remember this from a recent evening.
He has been a horse. He has been a salmon. He has been a fly. He has been, on at least one occasion, an old woman. Snorri tells us, in Gylfaginning fifty, that Loki on this day took the form of an old woman.
Why an old woman, Snorri does not say. We will allow ourselves a small inference: an old woman is, in the world the story imagines, an unremarkable figure. An old woman walking the streets of Asgard would not draw attention. The watchman would not stop her. The gods who passed her would not look twice.
She would be one of the small slow figures that came and went at the edges of the city, and she could go where she wished, and she could speak to whom she wished, and she would be answered with the small absent courtesy that the great show to those they do not need to take seriously. Loki in the form of the old woman went to the hall of Frigg. We will allow ourselves a small picture of the old woman, since the sources do not give us one. We will imagine her short and bent. We will imagine her hair white under her dark wool wrap, her eyes pale and watery, her hands knotted with the small joint troubles of age.
We will imagine her cloak gray and well worn, with the small mendings of many years visible along its seams. We will imagine her stick, for she would have a stick, leaning on it as she walked, to be a piece of old hazel, smoothed in the middle where her hand had held it for many seasons. She was the kind of woman the guards at any gate would have looked at and looked past. She was the kind of woman who could go anywhere in Asgard without anyone wondering what she was doing. He knocked.
The servants of Frigg opened the door. They let the old woman in. Frigg, who was sitting in her chamber, looked up. She saw the old woman come in. She greeted her kindly.
Frigg was kind, in the surviving sources, to those who came to her door, and especially kind, we may infer, to those who came to her in the small unremarkable shapes that the proud do not bother with. An old woman in a worn cloak was the kind of figure Frigg would have received with the small courtesies of a lady receiving an aging neighbor. She would not have looked closely at the face under the wrap. The old woman bowed. The old woman said: My lady, what a fine sight that is, the gods throwing weapons at your son and no harm coming to him.
Is it true, then, my lady, that all the things in the world have sworn to leave him alone? Frigg, looking at the old woman with affection, for she liked it, in Snorri's account, when those outside her household showed an interest in the great work she had done, Frigg said: Yes. It is true. All things have sworn. The old woman said: All things, my lady.
All. Even the smallest things. Frigg said: All. I have gone to each kind. They have each sworn.
The old woman said: My lady, that is a great wonder. There is nothing, then, in all the world, that could harm your son. Frigg paused. She paused. In the way that a person pauses when she remembers something she had not thought of in a long time.
In the way that a person pauses when she realizes there is one small thing. She said, slowly: Well, there is. There is one thing. But it is too small to matter. There is a small plant that grows on the western side of Valhǫll.
A small parasitic plant on an oak, with white berries. Mistilteinn it is called. It was too young when I made my rounds. I thought it not worth taking the oath of. It is not big enough to harm anyone.
The old woman bowed. The old woman said: My lady, you are wise to have thought as much. Your son is safe. The old woman left the chamber. She left the hall.
She walked, with her old slow steps, out the front door of Frigg's house, down the street of the city, around the corner, into a small alley. In the alley, in the deep shadow against a wall, the old woman shed her shape. Loki stood up, in his own form, in the alley. He brushed off his cloak. He looked at his hands.
He smiled. He turned and walked, quickly now, toward the western edge of Asgard, toward the great hall called Valhǫll, where the slain warriors feasted nightly, and where on the western side of the hall, the cold side, the side away from the rising sun, a small ancient oak grew. He was going to look for the plant.
Part 2645
Chapter Seven. The Plant West of Valhǫll. Mistilteinn, mistletoe, is a strange thing. Snorri, writing in Iceland in the early thirteenth century, knew of it the way a scholar knows of a thing he has read about and not necessarily handled himself. Mistletoe is not common in Iceland.
It is a continental plant, found in the oak forests of the European mainland. Snorri would have known of it from his reading of Latin sources, from the descriptions of older Norse poets, perhaps from travelers who had been to the south. He describes it accurately enough. It is a small parasitic plant that grows on the branches of other trees, most commonly the oak. It has small white berries.
It is, and this is the point of the story, small. Slender. Slight. A thing easily overlooked. Why mistletoe, in Snorri's story, is the one thing Frigg did not bind by oath is not explained.
Snorri's reason, that the plant was too young, is the surface reason. Some scholars have suggested deeper reasons that have to do with the strangeness of mistletoe as a plant. It grows not from the ground but from another plant. It is, in the medieval botanical understanding, not quite a true plant, it does not have roots in the earth. It is parasitic.
It is liminal. It is a thing that exists between categories. And the things that exist between categories, the things that are neither one thing nor another, are, in the old folk wisdom of many peoples, the things that have power. We will not press this point. We will say only that Frigg, when she went out to bind all things by oath, did not bind the mistletoe, and that this small not binding became, in the long shadow of the story, the great catastrophe of Asgard.
Loki found the oak. It stood on the western side of Valhǫll, in a small grove of older trees, in a part of Asgard that the warriors who feasted nightly inside Valhǫll did not often walk. The grove was, in fact, a part of Asgard most of the gods did not walk in either, not because anything was wrong with it, but because the great hall of Valhǫll cast its shadow over the grove most of the day, and the grove was therefore cool, and a little damp, and not the kind of place a god would choose for a morning's stroll. The grass between the trees was a little long. The light that reached the ground was the green filtered light of a place under a high canopy.
There was a small stillness about the grove, as if the noise of the rest of the city did not quite reach there. The oak was old. Its bark was deeply furrowed. Its branches were heavy with the leaves of summer. It was, perhaps, three times the height of a tall man.
Its trunk was broad enough that two gods, standing on either side and reaching, would have just barely been able to clasp hands around it. High on one branch, perhaps fifteen feet above the ground, there grew the small parasitic clump of green leaves and white berries, the mistletoe. Loki stood at the foot of the oak and looked up at the mistletoe for a long moment. He did not, in the surviving sources, hesitate. He did not, in the surviving sources, change his mind.
He had decided, at the moment Frigg told him in her chamber that the one thing she had not bound was the mistletoe west of Valhǫll, what he was going to do. He had not changed his mind on the walk across the city. He did not change it now, standing beneath the oak in the cool green light, looking up at the small clump of leaves and berries that was, on this morning, the only thing in all of the worlds that had not sworn to leave Baldr alone. Loki climbed. He was not, in his ordinary shape, a heavy god.
He was lean. He could climb a tree quickly, when he wished to. He went up the trunk of the oak with the practiced movement of someone who had climbed many trees in many forms. He came to the branch on which the mistletoe grew. He cut it loose.
He cut it with a small knife he had brought with him for the purpose. He cut it carefully, taking the longest single stem, the strongest one, the straightest, and leaving the rest of the clump on the branch. He came back down. He stood at the foot of the oak with the stem of mistletoe in his hand. He turned it slowly in the light.
It was perhaps the length of an arrow. It was light. It was green. The small white berries clung to it at the ends. A dart, he thought.
It is the length of a dart. It is the weight of a dart. It is the shape, almost, of a dart. With a little trimming, with a small sharpening of the cut end, it could be a dart. He took out his knife again.
He worked on the stem. He sharpened the cut end. He smoothed the wood. By the time he was done, he was holding a slender wooden dart with white berries at its base, a dart, but a dart that did not look like a dart. A dart that looked, to anyone who had not been told what it was, like a small green branch a man might carry as a walking stick.
He put the dart inside his cloak. He walked back toward the center of Asgard, toward the courtyard where the gods were even now, in the morning light, beginning their game.
Part 2646
Chapter Eight. The Brother Who Could Not See. The game was in full swing when Loki returned. The Æsir were gathered in the great courtyard of Asgard. Baldr stood, smiling, in the center.
The gods stood in a loose circle around him. They were taking turns throwing. Þórr had just thrown a great stone, which had passed through where Baldr was standing as if Baldr were a column of light, and fallen with a heavy thud on the cobbles beyond. Týr had just struck at him with a sword, which had failed to find anything to cut. Freyja had thrown a slim spear, which had turned aside in mid flight and fallen on the stones at Baldr's feet, where it lay still ringing on the cobbles. Baldr was laughing.
The gods were laughing. One god, however, was not in the circle. He stood at the edge of the courtyard, just inside the great archway that led in from the street. He stood with his hands clasped politely in front of him. He was not throwing.
He was not laughing. He was listening. This was Hǫðr. Hǫðr was Baldr's brother. He was a god of Asgard, a son of Óðinn, although the genealogy of Hǫðr is one of the parts of the Norse mythology that is, in places, contradictory across sources.
Snorri tells us that Hǫðr was the brother of Baldr, and was blind. Blind from birth, Snorri implies. He had never seen anything. He had never seen his brother. He had never seen the face that was so bright that light came from it.
He knew his brother only by voice, by touch, by the way the air seemed to warm when Baldr came near. He knew his brother loved him. He knew he loved his brother. But he had never thrown a stone, in the game in the courtyard, because he could not see where to throw. He stood at the edge of the courtyard, listening.
Loki came up beside him. Loki said, very quietly: Hǫðr. Brother. Why do you not honor your brother as the others do? Hǫðr turned his head toward Loki's voice.
He smiled, a small, sad smile. He said: I have no weapon. And I cannot see where to throw if I had one. Loki said: It is right that you should honor Baldr as the others honor him. Here.
I have a dart. Use mine. I will guide your arm. Hǫðr hesitated. He hesitated, in the way a person hesitates when they have been offered something they had not expected to be offered.
He had assumed, his whole life, that he could not take part in the things the seeing gods did. He had made his peace with this, in the slow way the blind make their peace with the world that does not see them. Now Loki was offering him a way in. He said: Brother, if you will guide me, yes. I will honor him.
Loki put the dart into Hǫðr's right hand. He closed Hǫðr's fingers around it. He turned Hǫðr, gently, the way one turns a child, so that Hǫðr was facing the courtyard. He stood behind Hǫðr. He took Hǫðr's right arm.
He guided it. He aimed. He whispered: There. Throw. Hǫðr threw.
The dart flew across the courtyard. It flew straight. It flew the way an arrow flies when the archer is good. The other gods, turning, the way one turns toward an unexpected motion, saw the green slender thing flying through the air. They had time, perhaps, to think: another spear.
Another sport. Another stone. The dart will turn aside. The dart will not harm him. The dart did not turn aside.
There is a quality, the surviving sources do not directly say but the long shape of the story implies, to the flight of that small green dart through the air of the courtyard. It flew, perhaps, in the slow strange way that things fly when fate has chosen them. It flew in a small clear arc. The morning light caught the white berries at its base. The other gods watched it.
They watched it the way one watches something one is sure will not happen, the moment between when the cup is knocked over and when the wine is on the table, the moment between when the foot catches on the threshold and when the body strikes the ground. The watching feels like a long moment, although it is only a moment. The dart struck Baldr. It struck him in the chest. It went in clean.
It went in deep. It struck him at the heart. Baldr stopped smiling. He looked down at the dart in his chest. He looked at it for a long moment, the way one looks at a thing one cannot quite understand.
He put one hand to the dart. He touched the green wood. He touched the small white berries at the base. He swayed. He fell.
He fell forward, slowly, to his knees. He sat for a moment on his knees on the cobbles of the courtyard, the dart still in his chest, his hand still on it. Then he fell sideways. He fell onto the cobbles. He did not move again.
He was dead.
Part 2647
Chapter Nine. The Throw. The gods of Asgard stood, for a long moment, where they stood. They did not move. They did not speak.
They did not, at first, even fully understand what they had seen. Snorri tells us this directly: that there was, after Baldr fell, a great silence. It was, he says, the worst stroke of fate that had ever struck the gods and men, and at first they could not give it voice. Hǫðr, in the doorway, did not know what had happened. He could not see.
He had thrown the dart. He had heard a small soft sound, the sound of a body falling, but he did not know it was a body. He stood with the empty hand still held out, the dart no longer in it, waiting for the laughter that always came at the end of a throw in this game. The laughter did not come. He turned his head, listening for someone.
He said: What was that? Did I miss? No one answered him. He said: Brother? Brother, did I throw well?
No one answered. The silence went on. It is a strange thing, the silence of a courtyard full of gods who have just seen something they cannot believe. It is not the silence of a held breath. It is the silence of a held believing, a moment in which the gods, all of them at once, are refusing to admit that what they have just seen has actually happened.
They stand. They look at the body of Baldr on the cobbles. They look at the small green dart in his chest. They look at the white berries at its base. And they refuse, for several moments, to believe.
Then the belief comes. It comes to each of them at different speeds. Þórr, Þórr who is, for all his strength, the most quickly emotional of the Æsir, Þórr believed first. His face changed. His great hand went to his beard. He made a small sound deep in his chest.
The others, who had been watching the body, turned at the small sound, and they saw Þórr's face, and they understood too. Loki was no longer behind him. Loki, when the dart had landed and Baldr had fallen, had quietly stepped backward, into the archway, out of the courtyard, and was gone. The other gods, for several long moments, did not even notice that Loki had been there. Then Frigg saw.
Frigg had been at the edge of the courtyard, watching the game. She had seen the dart fly. She had seen, but had not been able, in the moment, to understand, what had happened next. She walked, in a long slow walk, from where she had been standing to where her son lay. She knelt beside him.
She put her hand on his face. She put her hand on the small green dart in his chest. She touched the white berries. She knew, then, what the dart was. She made a sound.
The sound, Snorri does not describe. Some sounds in the surviving sources are not described, because to describe them would be to make small a thing that was not small. Frigg made the sound a mother makes when she understands that the small thing she did not bother to bind by oath is the thing that has killed her son. She made the sound only once. After it she was silent.
She rose. She walked back from the body of her son. She stood with the other gods in the wide courtyard. She did not speak. It was Óðinn who broke the silence. Óðinn the Allfather, the one who had ridden to Hel and back to learn this was coming, the one who had known, since the seeress had spoken to him in her mound, that this was how the story would end, Óðinn stood at the edge of the courtyard.
He stood looking at his son's body. He stood for a long time. Then he spoke, in a voice that was, Snorri implies, quite quiet. He said: It is done. He said: It is the worst thing that has ever come to the Æsir.
He said: We must take him to his ship. The gods moved. They moved in the slow heavy way of people who have just been struck. They moved without speaking. They lifted Baldr's body, carefully, with the dart still in his chest, because no one had the strength yet to draw it out.
They carried him from the courtyard. They carried him through the streets of Asgard, past the watching figures of the warriors and the watching faces of the slain in the windows of Valhǫll, past Heimdallr the watchman who had come down from his post on the walls when he heard the silence, past the figure of Bragi the skald who came running with his hands held to his mouth, past every god and every servant of every god, all the way to the shore. Baldr's ship lay on the shore. Its name was Hringhorni, ring prow. Snorri tells us it was the greatest of all ships.
It was a longship of great length, with a high carved prow that curled inward like the horns of a ram, with shields hung along its sides, with a mast bare of sail. It had been Baldr's ship in his life, but Baldr in his life had not used it for war or for trade. He had used it only sometimes for travel, in calm weather, on calm seas. It was a ship of peace. It would now be a ship for him to lie in.
Part 2648
Chapter Ten. The Greatest Ship in the World. What happened next is told in two places. The first is in Snorri's Gylfaginning fifty, which is our main source for this episode tonight, and which we have been following throughout. The second is in a skaldic poem called Húsdrápa, house drape, or hall tapestry, composed in the tenth century by a poet named Úlfr Uggason.
The poem is named for the hall in which it was first recited. It was, in its own time, a description of the painted scenes carved on the panels of a hall in western Iceland. The painted scenes included, among others, the scene of Baldr's funeral. Úlfr's poem is the earliest surviving account in any source of what we are about to describe. Snorri, writing two and a half centuries later, is drawing on Úlfr, and on older sources we no longer have. So what we describe here is told in the oldest layer of the Norse tradition that survives.
The gods carried Baldr to the shore. They lifted him onto the deck of Hringhorni. They laid him out on the long planks. They straightened his cloak around him. They turned his head so that he looked toward the sea, toward the west, toward the country of mist into which his ship would carry him.
Then they tried to launch the ship. The ship would not move. This is the strange detail. Snorri tells us, and Húsdrápa, in its fragmentary surviving lines, confirms it, that the gods could not, with their combined strength, push Hringhorni into the sea. The ship was too great.
The wood was too heavy. The keel was set too deep in the sand of the shore. They pushed. They pulled. They put their shoulders to the sides of the hull.
The ship did not move. The Æsir, after a time, stopped trying. Þórr, Þórr the strongest, Þórr who held up the cosmic weight when it had to be held, even Þórr had not been able to move the ship. He stood beside it, breathing hard. Someone, the sources do not say who, said: We must send for Hyrrokkin. Hyrrokkin.
The name means, in Old Norse, fire shriveled. She was a giantess. She lived, the sources imply, in a country far to the east of Asgard, a country of high mountains and cold winds where the giantesses of the older races still kept their halls. A messenger was sent. The messenger rode east, fast.
Some time later, Snorri does not say how long, Hyrrokkin came. She came in a way that no other being in the surviving sources comes. She came riding a wolf. A great wolf. Wolves are, in the Norse cosmos, often the mounts of giantesses, or the companions of giant witches.
There is something in the imagination of the old Norse storytellers that pairs the wolf with the giantess, perhaps because both, in the old picture of the world, belonged to the country outside the country, to the cold places past the edge of the settled. The wolf was not, in the Norse imagination, the dog of any house. The wolf was the thing the dog had not been domesticated from. The wolf was the older, wilder thing. Snorri does not give the wolf a name.
He says only that the wolf was great, and that Hyrrokkin rode it sitting astride, the way a man rides a horse. We may imagine the wolf as tall at the shoulder as a horse, tall enough that Hyrrokkin's feet, hanging down on either side, did not touch the ground. Its fur was the color of old iron. Its eyes, yellow, the way a wolf's eyes are yellow, caught the morning light as it moved. It did not pant.
It did not lower its head to sniff the road. It walked, in the long steady stride of a wolf accustomed to traveling, carrying its rider toward Asgard with the patience of something that knew where it was going and was not in a hurry to arrive. She did not have ordinary reins. For reins, Snorri tells us, she had vipers. Two great vipers, twisted together.
She held them by their tails. They writhed, in her hands, as she rode. They hissed. They did not bite her. They did her bidding because she was Hyrrokkin and they were vipers and that was the relationship between them.
She rode up to the shore of Asgard. The gods saw her coming. They saw the wolf. They saw the vipers. They saw the giantess in her dark heavy cloak, her hair iron gray, her face stern.
They were afraid. They were not afraid of her, they had asked her to come, and she had come. They were afraid of the wolf. A wolf the size of Hyrrokkin's mount, walking freely among the gods, was a thing the gods could not allow. Snorri tells us what they did.
They went out, all the strongest of them, and they tried to hold the wolf. Four berserks, strong men of the warrior bands, went out to hold the wolf while Hyrrokkin worked. The wolf did not let itself be held. It threw the four berserks off. They went, the sources say, and got more rope and bound the wolf to the ground, and finally the wolf, bound, lay still.
Hyrrokkin dismounted. She walked, with her long slow stride, to the bow of Hringhorni. She put her hands against the prow. She pushed. She pushed with the strength of a great old giantess, and Hringhorni, which the gods could not move, Hringhorni moved.
It moved with such force that, Snorri tells us, the rollers under the keel, the round logs the gods had placed there to help the ship slide, caught fire from the friction. Sparks flew. The whole shore around the prow was, for a moment, lit with the bright orange of catching wood. The earth shook beneath the ship. The wood of the rollers blazed.
Hringhorni slid forward, slid forward, slid into the water with a great hiss, the great hiss of a heavy hot keel striking cold sea, and was launched. The whole shore, for a moment after the launching, was loud. The sound of the rollers burning. The sound of the seawater meeting the hot hull. The sound of the Æsir, a long collective in breath from those standing on the shore.
The smell of burning oak and pine. The smell of seawater. Above the shore, the gulls, which had been wheeling silently overhead through the morning, now cried out, all at once, as if the launch had broken some long held silence in them too. Hringhorni floated on the water, low and heavy, the great prow still curling forward over the calm gray waves. It bobbed once.
It steadied. It sat, waiting, on the water for what would come next. Þórr was angry. Why Þórr was angry, Snorri does not fully explain. The simplest reading is that Þórr was angry because he, the strongest of the Æsir, had not been able to launch the ship, and a giantess had. The deeper reading is that Þórr, in his grief, needed to be angry at something, and Hyrrokkin, having succeeded where he had failed, was at hand. Þórr raised Mjǫllnir.
He was going, in his anger, to bring it down on her head. He was going to kill her there on the shore. The other gods stopped him. They held him. They reasoned with him.
They reminded him that Hyrrokkin had done what they had asked her to do. She had launched the ship. She was not their enemy. She was their helper. Þórr lowered the hammer. He turned and walked away from the shore.
He did not look at Hyrrokkin again. Hyrrokkin, in the surviving sources, does not appear after this moment. She went, we may assume, back to her wolf and her vipers and her country in the east, and was not seen by the gods again. Then came the burning. The gods began to prepare the pyre on the ship's deck.
They piled wood around Baldr's body. They placed his ship's gear at his feet. They placed his weapons beside him, the spear, the shield, the sword he had carried in his life but never used in battle. They placed gold around him. They placed silver.
They placed the small things he had loved in life. His wife came forward. Nanna, daughter of Nepr, the goddess who had been Baldr's wife. The surviving sources tell us little about her. We know that she was Baldr's wife.
We know that she had a son with him named Forseti, who would, in the time after this story, become the god of justice in Asgard. We know that she was, in the small fragments that survive, gentle. She came to the side of the ship. She looked at her husband lying on the pyre. She did not weep.
Snorri says only that she died, that her heart broke from sorrow, and she died on the shore. The gods, when they saw it, lifted her body also, and they placed her on the pyre beside Baldr. Two now, lying together. The husband and the wife. Óðinn came forward then. He took, from his arm, the great gold ring Draupnir.
Draupnir is one of the strangest objects in the Norse mythology. It is a gold ring made by the dwarves. It has the property that every ninth night, eight more rings of equal weight drip from it. It is a self replicating ring of gold. It is one of Óðinn's greatest treasures.
He took it from his arm. He placed it on the pyre. He placed it beside Baldr's hand. Why he did this, Snorri does not say. We will let our small interpretation stand: he was giving his son, who had ridden no road into death and would now ride a fire road, a gift for the country beyond.
Baldr's horse was led forward. The horse, in its trappings of gold and bronze, walked up the gangway. It walked, in the slow way of horses on a strange surface, onto the deck of the ship. It stood beside Baldr. It did not, in the surviving sources, struggle.
It seemed to know it had been asked to come. The fire was set. A dwarf, and this is the small strange moment in Snorri's account, a dwarf named Litr ran in front of Þórr at the moment Þórr was raising Mjǫllnir to bless the pyre. Why he ran in front of him, Snorri does not say. Perhaps he was clumsy.
Perhaps he was running for some other purpose and crossed the wrong path. Þórr, who was already on edge, kicked the dwarf. He kicked him with such force that Litr was thrown into the flames of the pyre. Litr burned with Baldr and with Nanna and with the horse and with Draupnir and with all the small things of Baldr's life. Thus, Snorri says, was Baldr burned. The ship, on fire, drifted out from the shore.
The flames rose. The smoke went up into the gray sky. The gods stood on the shore and watched. They watched the ship go out, burning, into the western sea. They watched it become a small bright shape on the water.
They watched it become a smaller shape. They watched it become a point of light. They watched until they could not see it anymore. Then they turned and walked, in silence, back into the city of Asgard.
Part 2649
Chapter Eleven. Hermóðr's Nine Nights. The gods did not, all of them, accept Baldr's death. Some of them, Snorri implies, settled into it the way one settles into a great grief. They did the work of the city.
They tended the orchards. They sat the council. They went on, in the slow heavy way of those who have lost something irreplaceable, with the business of being gods. But Frigg, Frigg the mother, did not settle. She stood, in the days after the funeral, in the great hall of the Æsir.
She looked around at the assembled gods. She said: Who among you would ride down to Hel for me, and offer Hel ransom for my son? Who would do this thing? Snorri's chapter 49 tells us who answered her. Hermóðr the bold.
Hermóðr was another son of Óðinn, and we should pause briefly on him too. Hermóðr is, in the surviving Norse sources, a minor figure. He appears mostly in this story. The lateness of his appearance in the texts has led some scholars to wonder whether he is an old figure or a relatively new one. We will not settle that tonight.
We will say only that Hermóðr was Baldr's brother. He was a god of Asgard. He was, the sources imply, swift on his feet and brave of heart. He was not, perhaps, the obvious one to send. He was not the strongest god in the hall, Þórr was.
He was not the wisest, Óðinn was. He was not the most clever, well, Loki was, and Loki was at this moment not in the hall, and the gods did not yet quite know why. Hermóðr was none of these things. He was, perhaps, the bravest in the simplest meaning of the word. He was willing to go because Baldr was his brother, and because no one else had stepped forward yet, and because someone had to.
He stepped forward. He said: I will go. Óðinn took the bridle of Sleipnir, his own eight legged horse, the only horse strong enough to ride the road down, and put it in Hermóðr's hand. Hermóðr swung up onto the saddle. The other gods watched. He turned the horse east, toward the road that goes down.
He kicked Sleipnir into a run. He rode for nine nights. This is the great detail of Hermóðr's journey, and it is given to us in Snorri's chapter 49 almost word for word. He rode through valleys so deep and so dark that he could see nothing, not the road, not the sides of the valley, not the head of his own horse. Only the deep cold dark of the country below the country, and the soft regular sound of the eight hooves on the unseen ground beneath, and the cold breath of the horse on his hands.
Think about what nine nights of riding in the dark would be. Nine nights, with no sleep. Nine nights, with no companion. Nine nights, with no fire, for there was nothing in the country below the country with which to make a fire, and even if there had been, Hermóðr would not have stopped. Nine nights, with no food, for he could not see to eat what he carried, and he was not, by then, in the part of himself that thought about eating.
Nine nights, in which the only sound was the soft eight fold drumming of Sleipnir's hooves, and the only thing he could feel was the cold air moving past his face, and the warm reassuring bulk of the horse beneath him. He rode through the country of mist. He rode through the country below the country of mist. He rode through countries the names of which the surviving sources do not record. We will not invent names for them.
We will say only that they were countries of cold, and countries of dark, and countries through which no living thing had ever ridden before, except, perhaps, his father Óðinn on his earlier ride, and even Óðinn had not ridden them in the way Hermóðr was riding them now. Óðinn had ridden them as the wisest of the gods, who knew where he was going. Hermóðr was riding them as a brother who was riding in grief, who did not know where he was going, who knew only that he had to keep going. On the ninth night, he came to a river. The river was called Gjǫll. The name means, in Old Norse, "loud noise." It was a river of crashing water and grinding ice.
Across the river was the country of Hel proper, the country of the unhonored dead, the country where those who had not died in battle went to live their second long quiet existence. The river was spanned by a bridge. The bridge was called Gjallarbrú, Gjǫll's bridge. It was a bridge of gold. It had been built long ago by the gods, although in the surviving sources who built it is not clear.
The planks of the bridge were gold. The rails were gold. The whole bridge gleamed dimly even in the deep dark of the country east of the road. Hermóðr rode onto the bridge. The bridge resounded under the hooves of Sleipnir.
A maiden stood at the far end of the bridge. Her name was Móðguðr. The name means, in Old Norse, "battle weary", or possibly "spirit battle." She was the guardian of the bridge. She watched who came across, and asked of each their name and their lineage, and what their business was on the road to Hel. She saw Hermóðr coming.
She said: What is your name? What is your lineage? Yesterday five hosts of the dead passed across this bridge, and it did not resound as loudly under their feet as it resounds now under yours alone. You have not the color of the dead about you. You are not pale.
You are not bloodless. Why have you come to ride to Hel before you are dead? Hermóðr drew up Sleipnir at the far end of the bridge. He said: I am Hermóðr the bold, son of Óðinn. I have come to look for my brother Baldr.
Has he passed this way? Móðguðr said: Yes. Baldr has crossed Gjallarbrú. He passed yesterday. The road to Hel lies down and to the north from here.
Ride down. Ride down and to the north. You will find the gates. Hermóðr rode on. He rode down and to the north.
He rode through countries colder than the countries he had passed before. He rode until the road brought him at last to the great gates of Hel. The gates were closed. They were great iron gates. They were the gates Snorri described to us already, the gates of Hel, the gates beyond which Óðinn had not gone, on his earlier ride to wake the seeress.
They were closed against the living. Hermóðr did not stop. He could not stop. He gathered Sleipnir under him. He leaned forward.
He kicked the eight legged horse into the hardest run it had run on the whole nine night journey. Sleipnir leapt. He cleared the gates. He cleared them with the ground a great distance below his hooves. He landed on the other side, his eight hooves striking the cold stone of the courtyard within.
He did not stumble. He came smoothly to a walking pace. Hermóðr rode through the courtyard. He rode up to the door of Hel's great hall. He dismounted.
He went inside. In the hall of Hel, the benches were strewn with gold, as the seeress at the mound had said. The mead was brewed and set out. The hall was deep and long. Its walls were of dark stone.
Its ceiling, where it could be seen, was hung with the smoke of small old fires that never quite went out and never quite blazed. The hall was full of figures, many figures, sitting at the long benches, eating and drinking in a slow quiet way, the way the dead eat and drink. They did not look up when Hermóðr came in. They did not seem to notice him. At the head of the high table, in the great high seat of honor, sat Baldr, pale now, with the pallor of the dead, but otherwise as he had been in life.
His hair was the same. His face was the same. The small new pallor around his eyes was the only sign of what had happened to him. He saw Hermóðr come in. He stood up.
He came around the head of the table. They embraced. Snorri does not give us this moment in any detail. He says only that the brothers were together, and that they spoke. We will not invent the speech they spoke.
We will say only that, in the long shape of the story, this was the last time the two brothers would be together, or, in the prophecy we will tell on the last evening of our season, the last time before the new world. They sat together at the high table. They drank from the cups in front of them. They did not eat, or if they ate, the surviving sources do not say so. They spoke.
Whatever they spoke of, it was not, in the part of it we are told, an unhappy speaking. They were brothers. They had loved each other. They had time, in the long pale evening of Hel's hall, to be brothers for a while longer. His brother Hermóðr saw him there.
He sat with him a long time. They spoke, although what they spoke of Snorri does not record. They spoke through the night. In the morning, Hermóðr went to the goddess Hel. Hel was the daughter of Loki.
She was the queen of the country named for her. She is described, in Snorri's account elsewhere, as half fair and half livid, that is, half her body alive and the other half the color of death. She was strange to look at, but she was not cruel. She kept her country with the cold patience of one who knew she would have all the dead, eventually. Hermóðr stood before her.
He said: Lady. I have come to ride down for my brother. The Æsir have sent me. They mourn him so deeply that the worlds are heavy with the weight of their mourning. Let him return.
Hel looked at Hermóðr for a long moment. She was not, the implied tone of her words suggests, easily persuaded. But she said: I will test what you say. If Baldr is truly so beloved that every thing in the world will weep for him, I will let him go back. If even one thing refuses to weep, he will stay with me.
She said this and she sat in her seat and she waited. We may pause, here, and notice the cruelty of the condition. It is not, in any ordinary sense, a kind condition. It is a condition that has been set knowing that there are, in the great wide worlds, many things that do not weep. Stones do not weep.
Iron does not weep. The cold black places between the stars do not weep. To require that every thing in the world weep for one mortal, even a mortal as beloved as Baldr, is to set a condition that is, in its very form, almost impossible to fulfill. But Hel is not, in the surviving sources, exactly cruel. She is the keeper of a country, and the keeper of a country has rules.
The rules are not personal. The rules are how the country runs. Hel did not require that every thing in the world weep because she wanted Baldr to stay. She required it because Baldr, having died, belonged to her country now, and the only way the rules of her country could be set aside was by a demonstration that the rest of the worlds wanted him back more than her country had the right to keep him. If the demonstration succeeded, she would let him go.
If even one thing in the worlds did not weep, the demonstration would fail, and she would keep him by the same logic by which any keeper of any country keeps what is theirs. Hermóðr understood the terms. He understood them in the part of his mind that had ridden nine nights in the dark to get there. He understood them in the part of his heart that had loved his brother. He understood them, also, in the part of him that knew his foster brother Loki, and knew that there was, very likely, somewhere in the worlds, something Loki could find that would refuse to weep.
But he did not let himself think of that. Not yet. He rose. He bowed. He left her hall.
He walked back to the courtyard. He mounted Sleipnir. He rode out through the gates, which opened for him this time, on his way out, and he rode back up the long road, through the country below the country of mist, through the country of mist, through nine more nights of cold dark. He returned to Asgard on the eighteenth night since he had left. He told the Æsir what Hel had said.
The Æsir sent out messengers in every direction. They sent messengers to all the kingdoms of Miðgarðr. They sent messengers to the high places and the low places. They sent messengers to the kings of men, the queens of women, the chiefs of the dwarves, the elves of the bright country, the elves of the dark country. We may imagine, here, the kind of messengers the Æsir sent.
They were not, the surviving sources do not tell us, ordinary messengers. They were swift. They were carried by horses that could cover in a day what a mortal messenger would cover in a week. They went by every road. They went by paths the gods had used in older times and had since forgotten.
They went to places no living mortal had gone in a thousand years. They carried the same message everywhere: weep. Weep for Baldr, son of Óðinn, son of Frigg, brother of Hermóðr, husband of Nanna, father of Forseti, the most beloved of the Æsir, who lies in Hel and waits to come home. The message was simple. The message was direct.
The message was hard to deny. And the answer, in every place, was the same. Men wept. Women wept. Children wept.
The dwarves wept in their forges under the mountains, and their tears hissed on the hot iron of the anvils, and they did not stop their work because of the weeping, they wept and worked at the same time, because that is how the dwarves grieve. The elves wept in their gardens, the bright elves of Álfheimr and the dark elves of Svartalfheim, both kinds together, who did not in the ordinary course of their long lives weep, but on these mornings wept. The kings wept on their thrones, before their courts, without shame. The queens wept in their chambers. The cattle in the fields wept.
The horses in the stables wept. The dogs at the doors wept. The cats on the hearths wept. The small mice in the walls wept. The fires in the hearths gave up small bright tears that hissed on the hearthstones.
The very stones at the edges of the roads, and here Snorri's account is at its most lyrical, the very stones wept. There was, in that season, a phenomenon that mortals afterward remembered: when the cold mornings came, the stones along the roadsides would be covered in a kind of dew that was not exactly dew, that came from the stones themselves rather than from the air. The mortals did not understand what they were seeing. They thought it was a strange new weather. The Æsir understood.
The stones were weeping for Baldr. Iron wept. The blades of weapons in their scabbards, the heads of axes hanging on the walls of halls, the small thin needles in the sewing boxes of women, the great iron rings of gates and the small iron nails of doors, all of them, in the cold mornings of that season, were beaded with a strange wet that was not condensation, because it formed on the iron when the air was dry. The iron was weeping. The metals wept.
Gold wept its slow soft tears. Silver wept its bright fast tears. Copper wept tears the color of its own surface. Lead wept the heaviest tears, which fell straight down and did not splash. Tin wept tears that, in some traditions of the story, made small ringing sounds as they hit the floor.
The trees wept. There was, in the worlds, in that season, a strange phenomenon that mortals afterward remembered: in the cold mornings, the trees would weep small clear drops from their bark. Snorri describes it directly. He says, and we will give it close to his own words, that the trees in those mornings were seen by men to have wept, and that this is the same thing that happens when trees come out of frost, where they shed drops as the sun rises. He is telling us, in his careful scholar's way, that the natural phenomenon mortals had observed in their lives, sap and frost melt running down the bark of trees in the early mornings of late winter, was, according to the old story, the trees weeping for Baldr.
The story explains the natural fact. The natural fact remembers the story. The sicknesses wept. This is the strange one. Snorri tells us that the sicknesses, which had taken the oath not to harm Baldr, also wept for him.
We may imagine, for a moment, what that means. A fever, hot in a man's chest, weeping. A cough, in the throat of a small child, weeping. A wasting sickness, slow at its work in some old woman in some far country, pausing in its work to weep. The poisons wept, the venom in the fangs of serpents, the dark drops in certain berries, all of them wept.
The serpents wept, opening their cold dry mouths, and small bright drops fell from them onto the rocks where they coiled. Everything that lived, everything that did not live but had once been thought to live, everything that the gods had thought to ask, everything wept. Almost. There was one thing that did not weep. In a cave, far from any road, in a country east of the road to Hel, in a cave whose mouth was set into the side of a low gray hill, whose floor was packed dry earth, whose ceiling was hung with the smoke of an old small fire, there sat a giantess.
Her name was given, in Snorri's account, as Þǫkk. The name means, in Old Norse, "thanks." Whose thanks she was given, or for what, is not explained. She was old. She was alone. She sat by her small fire in her cave and she did her own small business and she did not speak with anyone.
A messenger of the Æsir came to her cave. The messenger stood at the mouth of the cave. The messenger bowed. The messenger said: Mother. Lady.
Will you weep for Baldr the son of Óðinn, that he may come back from Hel? Þǫkk did not rise. She did not turn her head. She did not even look at the messenger. She spoke from her place by the fire. She spoke in verse, the surviving sources preserve her words as a small couplet, which we will speak in English tonight: Þǫkk will weep dry tears for Baldr's funeral journey.
The son of the Allfather is none of mine, in life nor in death. Let Hel hold what she has. The messenger heard the words. The messenger turned. The messenger walked back out of the cave, back along the road, back through the long countries, back at last to Asgard.
The Æsir heard the report. They sat for a long time in silence, as they had sat in silence on the day of Baldr's death. They knew, then, that Baldr would not be coming back. They knew that Hel would keep him. They knew that the small old giantess in the cave had refused, alone of all the worlds, to weep.
And they knew, although Snorri does not state it outright in this chapter, they knew, or strongly suspected, who Þǫkk really was. It is the long tradition, in the surviving sources and in the centuries of scholarship that have followed them, that Þǫkk was Loki. Loki in another shape. Loki taking the form of a giantess in a cave, to ensure that his work was complete. Loki refusing to weep for the god he had killed.
Snorri leaves this implicit. He does not say so directly. He says only that "men believed" that this was Loki. We will let men believe it tonight.
Part 2650
Chapter Twelve. Goodnight. And the Wolf at the Edge of Time. Baldr did not come back. He stayed in Hel.
He sat, the surviving sources tell us, in the high seat in Hel's hall, with the gold strewn on the benches and the covered mead cup at his hand. He waited. What he was waiting for is told in one short passage of Vǫluspá, the great prophetic poem of the Poetic Edda. The poem describes the coming of the appointed twilight, the day when the gods will face their final fates. The poem describes the wolf in the east, the great wolf bound on the island Lyngvi by the cord called Gleipnir, the wolf who is called Fenrir, and you may remember his binding from an earlier evening's story.
The poem describes the serpent that lies in the sea. The poem describes the ship of the dead that will come from the east. The poem describes the burning of the world. And then, at the end of the burning, the poem describes the new world that will rise from the sea. A green earth.
A small clear place. The sons of the dead gods, walking out into the morning, finding each other, finding a place to sit and play with old game pieces in the grass. In that new world, Vǫluspá tells us, Baldr will return. He will come back from Hel. He will come back into the green earth after the burning.
He will sit with the surviving gods in the new place. He will speak with his brother Hǫðr, who will also be there, for the new world, in the poem's vision, is the world after the old quarrels have been forgotten, and Hǫðr will be there beside him. This is the long shape of it. But that is for another evening, for the eleventh and the twelfth episodes of our season, when we will tell the appointed twilight and what comes after. For tonight, the story closes on the silence in Asgard after the messenger returned.
The gods stood in the great hall. They knew now that Baldr would not be coming back to them. They knew the worlds had wept, all but one. They knew Loki had killed their son with the small dart of mistletoe and had then, in the form of a giantess in a cave, refused the weeping that would have brought him home. What the gods did to Loki, in time, is also a story for another evening.
We will tell it on our next night. There is a cave, in the story to come. There is a serpent. There is the long pain. We will not begin it tonight.
For tonight, we close on the shore of Asgard. The pyre fire of Hringhorni has long gone down. The smoke has drifted east on the wind. The shore is cold. The sea is dark.
The waves come in, the way waves come in, against the cold sand. The sound of the waves is the only sound on the shore. The footprints of the gods who carried Baldr's body to the ship, the prints of bare feet and of sandaled feet and of the heavier feet of Þórr, are still in the sand, just above the line where the tide will reach. By the morning the tide will have washed them away. By the morning there will be no sign on the shore that the ship was launched there.
Only the small charred remains of the rollers, half buried in the sand, will remain to tell, for a few days more, what happened. The gods know now what their bright son's dreams meant. They know now that even Baldr the most beautiful, Baldr who shone with his own light, Baldr whose hall was so clean nothing unclean could enter it, Baldr whose mother walked all the worlds and took every oath she could think to take, even Baldr could die. They know, now, that one small parasitic plant on an oak west of Valhǫll was enough. They know that the small things are the dangerous things.
They sit, in the great hall of Asgard, in the evening of the day Hermóðr returned. They do not speak much. The mead is on the table. The bread is laid out. They eat little.
They drink little. They look at one another's faces, and on each face the small new lines of grief are visible. In the long shadow of this evening, and this is something the sources do not say outright, but is implied by everything that comes after, in the long shadow of this evening, the worlds have changed. Before Baldr died, the gods were the gods. They knew, in some far off way, that they would die in the end.
They knew the appointed twilight was coming. But it was far away. It was something a seeress might speak of in a deep mound. It was not real. After Baldr died, it was real.
The first death had come. The first irreplaceable thing had been taken. The shape of what was coming was no longer hidden. The wolf at the edge of time, the wolf bound on the island Lyngvi, the wolf whose binding we told you of three evenings ago, that wolf was now no longer a thing that the gods could pretend to ignore. That wolf was waiting.
And the wolf knew, somehow, what had happened in Asgard. The wolf knew the gods had taken their first wound. The wolf knew that the long pull on the cord Gleipnir was, very slowly, beginning to loosen. You may have felt something like this in your own life. A first death.
A first irreplaceable thing taken. The way the world, after such a thing, no longer looks the way it used to look. The way the small remaining people in the room, the people who are still there, the people you still have, become more precious, but also somehow more fragile. The way a person who has known a great loss walks through their days differently afterward. Slower.
More careful. More aware that everything around them could, at any moment, be the next thing taken. The gods of Asgard knew this, on the night Hermóðr returned with the news of Þǫkk in the cave. They did not speak of it. They sat in their hall.
The mead was on the table. The fire was low. Frigg, who had walked all the worlds to bind every thing she could think to bind, sat at her place at the long table. She had not, since the news returned from the cave, cried again. Her grief had moved into a different shape.
It had become the shape of stone, a heavy unchanging weight she would, for the rest of her long life, carry with her wherever she went. She would carry it, in time, into the day of the appointed twilight. She would carry it across the burning of the world. She would, in the new world that came after, still carry it. The stone of a mother who knew that her son, who had been bound by every promise the world could give, had been killed by the one small plant she had not asked. Óðinn sat at the head of the table.
He did not speak. He had, in his long life, learned many things. He had given his eye for one of them. He had hung on the tree for nine nights for others. But of all the things he had learned, what he had learned tonight, that even the most loved of the gods could die, and that the one who had killed him was a god of Óðinn's own household, his own foster brother, what he had learned tonight was, perhaps, the heaviest thing. Þórr sat midway down the table.
The hammer Mjǫllnir was on the bench beside him. He had used it, that day, to bless the pyre. He had used it, in his anger, to threaten Hyrrokkin on the shore. He had, in his sudden flash of grief and rage, kicked the dwarf Litr into the fire. He sat now and looked at the hammer beside him, and his great hand rested on the handle, and his face was, for once, not the face of the storm god.
It was the face of a brother. Bragi sat with his harp at the far end of the table. He had not, since the news came, played anything. The harp lay on the bench beside him, untouched. We will say only that, in the long traditions of the story, no song was ever composed in Asgard for Baldr, no song that could match what was being mourned, no song that could carry the weight.
Bragi sat with his harp untouched, and he did not, on this night, try. Hermóðr, the brother who had ridden down for him, sat near Óðinn. He had not eaten since he had come back. He had drunk a little water. He would sleep, eventually, that night, for he was very tired, nine nights of riding down and nine nights of riding back, and the day of the messengers between, and the long evening of waiting for them to return.
But he had not slept yet. He sat with his hands flat on the table, and his eyes were open, and he was looking, not at anything in particular, at the wood of the table itself. And the wolf in the east, and the wolf at the edge of time, did not move. But the wolf knew. That is the story for tonight.
Tomorrow, in another evening, we will tell of what came after. We will tell of Loki, who fled from Asgard after this, and who in the form of a salmon hid in a river under a waterfall, and who was caught in a net the gods themselves had taught the salmon, and who was carried back to a cave under the earth and there bound, bound the way Fenrir had been bound, but with crueler bonds, and for a longer time. We will tell, on a coming night, of his children, who had been taken from him long before this, and what the gods did to each of them. We will tell of the slow waiting for the appointed twilight that begins on the night this story closes. We will tell, in time, of the new world.
We will tell, in the very last of these evenings, of what Vǫluspá tells us: that after the appointed twilight has come, after the wolf has swallowed the sun and the great burning has happened and the gods have fallen and the world has sunk back into the sea, after all of that, the sources say, the sea will rise again. Green earth will come up out of the water. A small clear morning will come. The gods who survive, and there are, in the prophecy, a few, will walk out into the new grass. They will find the small game pieces of the old gods, the small carved wooden tokens the old gods used to play with on the long evenings, half buried in the new earth where the old halls had been.
They will pick them up. They will sit on the new grass in the new morning, and they will look at the game pieces in their hands, and they will, in the slow way of survivors, begin to remember. And Baldr will be there. He will come back from Hel. The prophecy tells us so.
He will come back in the new world, in the new green. He will sit with his brother Hǫðr, who in that new world will not be blind, and who will not need to be forgiven for what he did in the old world, because in the new world it will be understood that the old quarrels are not the new quarrels. They will sit on the grass. They will play with the game pieces. They will speak, perhaps, of small things.
They will be, again, the brothers they had been before the dart. This is the end of the story. It is in the very far distance. But it is there. It is, the prophecy implies, the only kindness the old gods got, the knowledge, on the night Hermóðr returned with the news of Þǫkk in the cave, that somewhere in the long unfolding of time, after the burning, there would be a morning.
And in that morning, Baldr the most beloved, the brightest, the one whose dreams had been so heavy, Baldr would walk out into the new grass, and he would not, in the new world, dream those dreams again. But that is for another evening. For tonight, we close here. If you have stayed with me this far, and few do, then you have been very patient. If you have drifted off, somewhere in the long ride of Sleipnir, or in the sport of the gods, or on the cold shore where Hringhorni burned, or in the cave where Þǫkk refused to weep, then you are exactly where you should be.
The Almanac will return. Goodnight, dear listener. Goodnight.
Ragnarok
Welcome to The Sleeping Almanac.
Ragnarok
Tonight: the story the old north put at the end of every other story. The story the gods had been hearing prophesied for a thousand winters. The story they could not avoid and did not, in the end, try to avoid.
Part 2653
A long cold winter that will not end. A wolf that slips its chain. A great serpent that lifts itself up out of the deep sea. A ship made of the fingernails of the dead. A horn lifted in the dark to call the gods to a field they had always known they would die on.
Part 2654
We will tell the story tonight from the Vǫluspá, the Seeress's Prophecy, the first poem of the Codex Regius. And from Gylfaginning, the part of Snorri Sturluson's Prose Edda that gathers all the old north's endings into one quiet long telling.
Part 2655
The Hávamál has a stanza for this kind of story. Cattle die, kinsmen die, you yourself shall die. But one thing I know that never dies: the judgement of a dead man's life.
Part 2656
Tonight, by the time the story is done, the gods will have died, the earth will have drowned, and a small green field will have risen again. And the Hávamál's quiet promise about what does not die will still hold.
Part 2657
Settle in. Let your shoulders drop. We begin in a winter that will not end.
Part 2658
Chapter One. The Fimbulvetr.
Part 2659
The Vǫluspá tells us that the long winter came first.
Part 2660
It does not, the poem implies, give the long winter any particular dramatic introduction. The seeress moves into it the way a winter moves into a country. The wind shifted. The light got thinner. The first snow came earlier than it should have.
And then it did not stop.
Part 2661
The old north called the long winter the Fimbulvetr. The word means, the scholars say, the great winter, the terrible winter, the winter beyond winters. The poem tells us, with the dry exactness it uses for the worst things, that the Fimbulvetr lasted three years. Three winters in a row, with no summer between them. Three winters with no green grass and no warm wind and no return of the long days.
Three winters that came on top of each other the way a man piles three woollen cloaks on top of each other, each heavier than the one beneath.
Part 2662
The first winter was harder than any winter that had been remembered. The rivers froze deeper than the rivers had ever frozen. The seas froze along the coasts. The deep snow came earlier in the autumn and stayed later into the spring. The cattle grew thin.
The hay was used up before the spring was anywhere near. The old people, who had seen many winters, said this was not a usual winter. The young people, who had not seen many winters, learned what a hard winter actually looked like.
Part 2663
Picture a farmer at the door of his cold byre in the middle of the morning, the small visible breath of the man hanging in the air, looking at his cattle and counting ribs he should not have been able to count yet. Picture a woman at a hearth, looking at a basket of dried fish she had counted twice already, counting it a third time, finding that the count had not changed. Picture a child at a small window, looking out at the snow that had come in the night, asking, in the careful way of children who have begun to understand that something is wrong, whether the spring would come.
Part 2664
The first winter ended. The old north would have said this was the test. The first winter had been bad. The first winter had been the kind of winter the bards would sing about. But the snow had gone, in the end.
The green had come back, in the end. The old people, who had seen many things, said, we have come through the worst of it. The young people, who wanted to believe their elders, agreed.
Part 2665
But the second winter, the Vǫluspá tells us, came down without any spring in between.
Part 2666
The first cold wind of autumn came in the middle of what should have been the middle of summer. The leaves browned and fell. The cattle, which had not yet grown back the weight they lost in the first winter, were now thinner than they had been at the end of the first winter. The hay barns had no more in them than they had had at the worst of the first spring. And the snow came again.
And the rivers froze again. And the deep cold settled into the country again. This time, no one said anything about coming through the worst of it.
Part 2667
The second winter was harder than the first. The country, which had not had a summer in between to recover, did not have anything to give to the second winter. The forests, which had not put out new leaves, had nothing to lose. The fields, which had not been mown, had nothing to be cut. The cattle, which had not been fattened, had nothing to give back.
The Fimbulvetr was a winter that ate its own future.
Part 2668
The second winter ended. There was no spring. The third winter began.
Part 2669
The Vǫluspá says, with the small dry brevity it uses for the worst things, that during the Fimbulvetr the wolves swallowed the sun and the moon.
Part 2670
Two wolves had been chasing the sun and the moon since the world began. The wolf chasing the sun was called Sköll. The wolf chasing the moon was called Hati. They had been running since the days were first counted. They had been getting closer for a thousand winters.
The slow narrowing of the long chase. One step behind at the start of the world. Nine tenths of a step behind by the end. The wolves had been patient. The wolves had been certain.
The wolves had been getting closer.
Part 2671
And in the third year of the Fimbulvetr, the seeress says, they caught their long quarry, and they swallowed the sun and the moon, and the sky went dark.
Part 2672
This was when everyone knew.
Part 2673
This was when the old people, who had been saying it was a bad winter, stopped saying it was a bad winter. This was when the young people, who had been hoping their elders were right, stopped hoping. This was when even the children stopped asking when the spring would come. The dark hung over the world in the middle of what should have been a noonday in the third year. The cold settled into bones that had been cold for two and a half years already.
The wolves howled, somewhere out beyond the edge of every fence, somewhere closer than they should have been. The small hearth fires in every long winter hall burned a little lower, because the wood had been used up, because the careful stores had thinned, because the dark outside was now a dark that did not even have the small reliable light of the moon to push back against.
Part 2674
The Vǫluspá says, in the small careful way it says the worst things, that this was the time when the brothers began to kill the brothers.
Part 2675
Chapter Two. Brother Will Kill Brother.
Part 2676
The Vǫluspá says, in one of the most famous stanzas of any old north poem, that the moral collapse came next.
Part 2677
Brothers will fight, the seeress says, and slay each other. Cousins will break the bonds of kinship. It will be a hard time in the world. A time of much fornication. An axe age, a sword age.
Shields will be cleft. A wind age, a wolf age, before the world goes down. No man will spare another.
Part 2678
We have to pause on what these stanzas meant.
Part 2679
The old north was a kin bound culture. The deepest bond a being could have, in the old north, was the bond between brothers, the bond between cousins, the bond between father and son, the bond between the long lines of kindred that ran out into every long winter hall and every cold mountain country. To say that the brothers would kill the brothers was to say, in the deepest language of the old north, that the social fabric had unraveled. The thing that held the cold north together had stopped holding.
Part 2680
The first killings, the seeress implies, came over the small things. Over a sheep that died and a brother who blamed another brother for it. Over a stored barrel of grain that was eaten by one cousin without sharing with another cousin. Over the borrowed sword that was never returned, the broken oath that was never repaired, the harsh word in the cold hall that was never taken back. These small things, in a country where the cold had gone on for three years and the wolves were howling at the edge of every fence, became the things that the kindred killed each other over.
Part 2681
Picture the first careful moment. Two brothers in a small hall in some long valley of the cold north. The fire was low. The hay was nearly out. The cattle in the byre were down to two.
One brother had taken, perhaps without asking, the last small piece of dried fish from the basket. The other brother, when he came to the basket and found it empty, said something sharp. The first brother said something sharper back. The second brother stood up. The first brother stood up.
And the careful hand that had been holding a careful knife at the table did, in a careful moment that neither brother had quite planned, what it should not have done.
Part 2682
This was, in some small steading, the first moment.
Part 2683
Then the same moment happened in other steadings. The same small fights, the same small refusals to forgive, the same standings up at the table, the same hands holding knives. The Vǫluspá says, with the same dry brevity, that no man spared another.
Part 2684
The seeress did not mean that every single man in the world killed his brother. She meant something subtler and worse. She meant that, in the third year of the Fimbulvetr, when a man in the cold north decided to do a small ordinary wickedness against his kindred, no one stopped him. The neighbours did not intervene. The elders did not speak up.
The law speakers did not come to the door. The small bonds that had held the cold north together for ten thousand winters had thinned. And then, in the long dark of the third year, they had broken.
Part 2685
Picture the long quiet morning after the first killing. The brother who was still alive sat at the cold table for a long time. The brother who was dead lay where he had fallen. The cattle in the byre did not say anything. The neighbours, in the next steading, would have heard.
The neighbours did not come. The brother who was still alive eventually got up and went out. And the day went on as if nothing had happened. As if the long quiet thing the cold north had relied on for ten thousand winters had not, in that careful morning, been broken.
Part 2686
The poem says that this was the wolf age.
Part 2687
The wolf, in the old north, was the symbol of the broken bond. The wolf was the one who lived outside the kindred, outside the hall, outside the law. The wolf was what a man became, in the old language, when he had broken his kindred so badly that he could not come back to the hall. The wolf was the warning the grandmothers told their grandchildren around the long winter fires. Do not become the wolf.
Do not become the one who lives outside the long warm hall, outside the careful bond, outside the promise the kindred owe each other.
Part 2688
The wolf age was the age when every being in the cold north had stepped, by their own small choices, outside the bond that had held them. Every refusal to forgive, every choosing of the self over the kindred, every picking up of the knife at the table, was a small step into the wolf age.
Part 2689
And it was, the poem implies, in this wolf age that the actual wolf began to stir.
Part 2690
Chapter Three. The Wolf Slips the Chain.
Part 2691
The Vǫluspá and Gylfaginning both tell us, in their different ways, that Fenrir slipped the chain.
Part 2692
We told the story of how Fenrir was bound, in an earlier episode of The Sleeping Almanac. We told the story of the three chains. The gods had first tried a great iron chain called Loeding, which the wolf broke with one tightening of its shoulders. The second chain was called Drómi, twice as strong as Loeding, which the wolf broke with two tightenings. The gods, who had run out of ordinary chains, sent down to the dwarves in the deep mountains and asked for a chain that could not be broken.
Part 2693
The dwarves made a soft ribbon called Gleipnir. It was woven from six impossible things. The sound of a cat's footfall. The beard of a woman. The roots of a mountain.
The sinews of a bear. The breath of a fish. The spittle of a bird. The six things were impossible because the world did not have any of them. Cats made no sound when they walked.
Women had no beards. Mountains had no roots that anyone had ever seen. Bears had no sinews you could pull out. Fish did not breathe. Birds did not spit.
The dwarves took the six things that did not exist in the world, and they spun them into a ribbon.
Part 2694
The ribbon was soft. The ribbon was thin. The ribbon was no thicker than a careful thread of silk. And it was the one chain the wolf could not break.
Part 2695
Týr put his hand into the wolf's mouth as a pledge of the gods' good faith, and the wolf bit it off when the chain held. The gods bound the wolf to a great rock called Gioll, which they sank into the deep earth, with another rock called Þviti for an anchor. They jammed a great sword between the wolf's jaws, with the hilt against the lower jaw and the point against the upper jaw, so that the wolf could not close its mouth, so that the great spittle of the wolf's hunger ran out forever and made a river that the old north called Vón, the river of expectation.
Part 2696
The wolf had been straining at that chain for a thousand winters.
Part 2697
It had not stopped straining for one day. It had been pulling, very slowly, very steadily, against the soft ribbon and the great rock and the deep earth. It had been growing, the way old gods and old serpents and old wolves grow, slowly and steadily and without ever being seen to grow. It had been waiting, the way a being waits when it has been wronged.
Part 2698
A wolf does not think the way a man thinks. The wolf did not count the days or mark the years. The wolf knew, in the deep wolf way, that it was waiting. The wolf knew the careful old chain was thinning, very slowly, in some small place that only the wolf could feel against its leg. The wolf knew the long time was passing.
The wolf knew the long time was, by some measure that only the wolf knew, almost done.
Part 2699
The Vǫluspá says, with the dry economy it uses for the worst hinges, that the wolf slipped the chain.
Part 2700
The poem does not tell us how. It does not say that the chain was cut by a sword or undone by a key. It says only that the wolf, in the third year of the Fimbulvetr, in the wolf age when no man spared another, slipped the chain that had been holding it. Perhaps the chain had stretched. Perhaps the rock had begun to give.
Perhaps the deep earth had thinned around the anchor. Perhaps the soft ribbon called Gleipnir had finally, in some small place, given way.
Part 2701
The wolf did not roar. The wolf did not howl. The wolf did not do any of the loud things a small wolf in a small story might be expected to do at this moment. The wolf lifted its head, slowly, the way an old being lifts its head when an old expectation has at last been met. The wolf rose, slowly.
The wolf shook off the last small pieces of Gleipnir that still clung to its forelegs. It shook off the pieces of Gioll the great rock that had broken when the chain at last gave. It shook off the deep earth that had still been clinging to its hide.
Part 2702
The wolf walked up through the long cold dark place where it had been chained. The deep earth opened, very slowly, around its great shoulders, the way deep earth opens around the great roots of an old tree being lifted by an old storm. The wolf walked up. The wolf walked through the deep stone. The wolf walked through the deep cold dark.
The wolf walked, very slowly, very steadily, the way a wolf walks when a wolf has been waiting for a thousand winters and is no longer in any hurry, up toward the surface of the world.
Part 2703
And then the wolf walked out.
Part 2704
It walked out into the broken country of the Fimbulvetr. It walked into the dark that had come down when the wolves Sköll and Hati had swallowed the sun and the moon. It walked into the cold that had been settling for three years. It walked into the wolf age when the brothers were killing the brothers. The wolf walked the way an old debt walks when an old debt has at last come due.
Part 2705
The Vǫluspá says it with one of its most famous lines. Fenrir is loose.
Part 2706
The door was open.
Part 2707
Chapter Four. The Serpent Stirs.
Part 2708
The Vǫluspá tells us, a few stanzas later, that the great serpent Jǫrmungandr lifted itself up out of the deep sea.
Part 2709
We have told this story too, in an earlier episode of The Sleeping Almanac. We told the story of Þórr fishing with Hymir. Þórr had gone, in disguise, to the great hall of the giant Hymir. Hymir had taken Þórr out fishing in the deep sea. Þórr had baited his hook with the head of a great ox. The line had gone down into the deep. The great pull had come. Þórr's feet had gone through the bottom of the boat as he braced against the pull. Þórr had brought the serpent up out of the deep enough that he could see its small careful eyes looking up at him through the dark water.
Hymir had lost his nerve and cut the line. The serpent had gone back down. And Þórr had been waiting, in the long quiet thousand winters since, for the serpent to come up again.
Part 2710
The serpent had not been still in the deep. It had been growing.
Part 2711
It was, by the third year of the Fimbulvetr, so long that it lay coiled around the whole of the world, holding its own tail in its own mouth, the way a long snake will sometimes lie when it has nowhere else to go. The serpent was the slow long boundary of the world itself. It was the dark line at the bottom of every careful old map. It was what the small fishermen knew was somewhere under their small boats. It had been there, in the deep sea, the bottom of every story, the dark below every story, the long quiet thing the gods knew was there but did not, for a thousand winters, do anything about.
Part 2712
The serpent, in some old north sense the seeress does not name, had been thinking about Þórr. A serpent does not think the way a man thinks. It does not count the days. But the serpent knew the careful old god with the careful old hammer had come within an arm's reach of pulling it up out of the deep once. And the serpent knew, in some deep serpent way, that the old god was coming again.
Part 2713
The Vǫluspá says, with the same dry economy, that the serpent rose.
Part 2714
The poem does not say how. It does not describe the great waves that would have come up across the cold north shores, the way the small fishermen on the cold coasts would have watched the water go strange and high. It says only that the serpent, in the third year of the Fimbulvetr, lifted itself up out of the deep, uncoiled from around the world, and came up onto the land.
Part 2715
The serpent was so large that its movement was almost too slow to see. It did not lash and writhe the way a small angry snake lashes and writhes. It uncoiled the way a long slow tide uncoils, the way a cold heavy current turns in the deep. The water of every coast on the cold north went strange. The fish swam in confused circles.
The seabirds rose in great wheeling clouds without knowing why they were rising. The small fishermen pulled their boats up onto the shore and went home, the way small fishermen will sometimes do when the sea has gone wrong without their being able to say why.
Part 2716
The fishermen had been pulling up less and less. They had been catching almost nothing. They had been pulling up nets that had things in them they did not recognise. Deep things from the deep sea. The long thin pale fish that lived a long way down.
The small blind crabs of the cold deep. They had been pulling up, in the last days of the Fimbulvetr, things they did not want to look at. And on the morning when the sea went wrong, they did not need to be told that the morning had gone wrong. The old men with the long careful wisdom of the cold north coast pulled their boats up, in silence, the way men sometimes do when they know without having to say.
Part 2717
And then, the Vǫluspá says, the serpent came onto the land.
Part 2718
It came up out of the sea on the eastern coast. It crawled up out of the cold black water and onto the cold black stones of the shore. It was so large that it was hard to see it as a serpent. It looked, from any distance, like a long ridge that had not been there yesterday. It looked like a long dark river of scales, lying along the eastern shore, breathing.
Part 2719
The Vǫluspá says, with the same dry care, that the serpent's breath was poison.
Part 2720
The serpent breathed, and the breath went up into the sky, and the sky went the colour of old bronze. The breath rolled out across the cold country in slow heavy waves of poison fog. The grass that the breath touched died. The trees that the breath touched died. The small creatures that the breath caught died where they stood.
The cattle in the steadings of the eastern shore lay down and did not get up. The old men who had pulled up their boats went into their halls and closed the doors and sat at their hearths in silence, knowing.
Part 2721
And the great serpent crawled, very slowly, up the eastern coast toward the long road inland.
Part 2722
The wolf was loose. The serpent was up. The third sign had not yet come, but it was coming.
Part 2723
Chapter Five. The Ship of Nails.
Part 2724
The Vǫluspá says, in the deepest stanzas of its prophecy, that the ship called Naglfar sailed.
Part 2725
The old north remembered that Naglfar was a ship that had been built, very slowly, out of the fingernails and toenails of the dead. Every being who had died without having their nails properly cut, the old north said, had contributed a small piece of Naglfar. Every careless mourner who had not, in the careful old way, trimmed the nails of the dead before laying the dead in the ground, had given a small piece of nail to a great dark hull that was being built, very slowly, somewhere across the cold sea.
Part 2726
This was a small everyday warning. A reminder. The old north's way of telling its children that what you did with the small things mattered. That every act of carelessness toward the dead, every forgetting to do the right thing by a kinsman who had gone, was being added to a great long thing that was being built somewhere out beyond the horizon. The grandmothers in the long halls told the grandchildren, in a careful voice, to be sure they did the cutting properly when the time came.
The grandchildren nodded.
Part 2727
Over ten thousand winters, the small carelessness of the cold north had built a great dark ship.
Part 2728
It was the longest ship that had ever been imagined.
Part 2729
It had no decks. It had no clear wood. It was nothing but a long dark hull of overlapping nails, fingernails packed against fingernails, toenails packed against toenails, the keratin of ten thousand uncut dead set together by some long careful hand into the shape of a vessel. The mast was a single great bone, taken from some old creature the poem does not name. The sail was the woven shrouds of the unburied.
The rope was the long careful hair of the long careful dead, taken in handfuls from the cold graves and braided together over ten thousand winters into the long quiet ropes of the long dark ship.
Part 2730
The ship was kept in a long quiet harbour somewhere across the cold sea.
Part 2731
Snorri, in Gylfaginning, says that the captain of Naglfar was the giant Hrym. Hrym was an old enemy of the gods, a frost giant who had been waiting in the deep east for the third year of the Fimbulvetr the way every other thing in this story had been waiting. The Vǫluspá itself shows Hrym at the prow, holding a shield, leading the army of the giants in from the east.
Part 2732
The dead, in Snorri's telling, sailed a separate ship, out of Hel, with Loki at the helm.
Part 2733
Hel, the daughter of Loki, the lady of the dead, had been waiting in her cold country for ten thousand winters. She had been counting the dead, sorting the dead, gathering the dead into long quiet ranks. Hel was half blue and half white. One side of her face was the face of a living woman. The other side was the face of a long dead one.
She had been given, in the deep old beginning, the cold country of the dead to rule. She had been ruling it, in the careful old way, for ten thousand winters. She had not, in any of those winters, been impatient. She had been counting. She had been sorting.
She had been waiting.
Part 2734
The Vǫluspá says that, in the third year of the Fimbulvetr, the signal came.
Part 2735
The poem does not say how. It says only that Hel, in her cold country, knew the time had come. And Hel walked down to the harbour where her ship was waiting, and Hel walked aboard. And the long quiet ranks of the dead walked aboard behind her. The cold north dead who had been waiting in Hel's country, who had not died in battle and so had not gone to Valhalla, who had not died at sea and so had not gone to Rán, who had died small careful old deaths and gone to Hel, walked, in long order, down to the harbour and aboard the ship.
Part 2736
And the helmsman of that ship, the Vǫluspá says, was Loki.
Part 2737
We told the story of Loki's binding, in an earlier episode of The Sleeping Almanac. Loki had been bound, after the death of Baldr, with the entrails of his own son turned to iron, in a cold cave under a stone, with a serpent dripping venom onto his face, and his wife Sigyn standing beside him with a bowl to catch the venom. Loki had been bound, like the wolf, for a thousand winters. And Loki, like the wolf, had been waiting.
Part 2738
The Vǫluspá implies that Loki also slipped his chain. The poem does not dwell on how. Perhaps the entrails of the son, which had been iron, had at last given way. Perhaps Sigyn, who had been holding the bowl for a thousand winters, had at last, in the long dark of the Fimbulvetr, looked away for one careful moment, and the venom had splashed Loki's face, and Loki had shaken with the shaking he had been doing for a thousand winters, and the shaking had at last been enough to break the careful old binding.
Part 2739
When the long signal came, Loki rose from the long dark cave under the stone, and walked through the broken country of the Fimbulvetr, and came down to the harbour where the ship from Hel was waiting. And Loki, with the clever face he had always had, the face the old north had loved and feared in equal measure for ten thousand winters, took the helm.
Part 2740
And the ship set sail across the cold sea, with the dead at the oars and the lady of the dead at the mast and the clever god at the helm.
Part 2741
Hrym and the giants sailed Naglfar from the east. Loki and the host of Hel sailed from the north. Both ships, the Vǫluspá implies, were aimed at the same shore.
Part 2742
Chapter Six. The Horn.
Part 2743
The Vǫluspá and Gylfaginning both tell us, in their own careful ways, that Heimdallr blew the horn.
Part 2744
We have told the story of Heimdallr in earlier episodes of The Sleeping Almanac. Heimdallr was the watcher of the rainbow bridge, the white god, the foreseeing one, the one who needed less sleep than a bird, the one who could hear the grass growing in the field and the wool growing on the sheep's back. Heimdallr stood, year after year, on the parapet at the gate of Asgard, looking out at the long road from the east, and listening.
Part 2745
He had been listening for the wolf for a thousand winters. He had been listening for the serpent. He had been listening for the long slow approach of the ship of nails across the cold sea. His hearing was the most careful hearing in any of the nine worlds. He could hear a single thread of wool growing on a sheep on a hill in a country a thousand leagues away.
He could hear the breath of a sleeping child in a cradle in a steading in a valley a hundred days' ride from the gate of Asgard.
Part 2746
On the day in the third year of the Fimbulvetr when all three sounds came at once, the breath of the wolf newly freed from the chain, the slow crawl of the serpent up the eastern shore, the slap of the oars of Naglfar across the cold sea, Heimdallr lifted his great horn called Gjallarhorn, and Heimdallr blew it.
Part 2747
Heimdallr had always been calm. He was the steady one. He was the patient one. He was the one who would do the careful work of watching for the careful thousand winters that the careful work required. On the morning of the long signal, he lifted the horn with the same careful calm he had always had.
Part 2748
He lifted Gjallarhorn. He put the great curve of horn to his white lips. He drew a breath that was as careful and steady as every other breath he had ever drawn. And he blew.
Part 2749
The sound went out across the worlds.
Part 2750
The Gjallarhorn was the loudest horn in any of the nine worlds. It was made of a great curl of horn from a great cold creature no one in the old north could quite name. It could be heard at the bottom of the deepest sea and at the top of the tallest mountain and in the deepest cave under the deepest stone. It was the horn you blew at the end of the world.
Part 2751
When Heimdallr blew it, every being in every world heard it.
Part 2752
The gods in Asgard heard it. Þórr, who had been waiting for the serpent for a thousand winters, heard it and lifted his head from whatever he had been doing in his hall at Bilskírnir, and Þórr knew. Óðinn, who had been preparing for the wolf for a thousand winters, heard it and put down whatever he had been doing in his great hall at Valaskjálf, and Óðinn knew. Freyja, who had been gathering the einherjar, the slain warriors who would fight beside the gods at the last battle, heard it and went to the doors of Vingólf and called the einherjar out. Frigg, in her quiet hall called Fensalir, heard it and folded her hands in her lap and looked at the empty chair where Baldr had once sat, and the long quiet patience she had been holding for a thousand winters since Baldr's death came finally to its end. Sif and Iðunn and Skaði and all the goddesses of the cold country heard it and rose.
Part 2753
The einherjar in Valhalla heard it. The great roar that came from Óðinn's long hall when the eight hundred doors opened and the eight hundred warriors per door came out, eight hundred times eight hundred warriors, the einherjar who had been training for this battle for ten thousand winters, was, in the old north's imagination, the loudest sound any place had ever made. The doors opened. The warriors poured out. The long ranks rolled out across the long open field of Vígríðr.
Part 2754
The dwarves in the deep mountains heard it. They stood at the doors of their cold stone halls and groaned. They had been making the weapons of the gods for ten thousand winters. They had made Mjǫllnir. They had made Gungnir.
They had made Gleipnir. They heard the horn and knew the long careful work was about to be tested. They had always known, in some deep dwarf way, that the long careful work would eventually be tested. They had hoped, perhaps, that the testing would come a little later than it did. They did not complain.
They stood at the doors and listened.
Part 2755
The light elves in Álfheimr heard it. The dead in Hel heard it, though they were already aboard the ship. The frost giants in Jǫtunheimr heard it and put on their armour.
Part 2756
And the ash of Yggdrasill heard it and shook.
Part 2757
The Vǫluspá says the great tree shook from root to crown. The squirrel called Ratatoskr, who ran up and down the trunk carrying insults between the eagle in the top branches and the serpent at the roots, stopped, the old north imagined, for the first time in ten thousand winters. The eagle at the top of the tree opened its wings without yet flying. The serpent at the roots lifted its head. The four stags who ate the leaves, Dáinn and Dvalinn and Duneyrr and Duraþrór, lifted their heads.
The three Norns at the well of Urðr, who had been weaving the careful threads of every being's life for ten thousand winters, looked at each other and at the great tree. The whole long axis of the worlds hung still for a single careful moment after the horn had sounded.
Part 2758
And then the gods began to arm.
Part 2759
Chapter Seven. The Gods Arm.
Part 2760
The Vǫluspá and Gylfaginning both tell us, with the dry economy they use for the most important moments, that the gods of Asgard armed themselves and went to the field.
Part 2761
The field was called Vígríðr. The name meant the plain of battle, the long open ground where the last battle would be fought. Snorri says Vígríðr was a hundred leagues long on each side, a country with no hills or trees or rivers, a country built to be the country where the last battle would be fought. The gods had known about Vígríðr for ten thousand winters. They had not visited it in any of those winters.
They had not wanted to look at the place where they were going to die.
Part 2762
But, in the third year of the Fimbulvetr, the gods rode out to Vígríðr.
Part 2763
Óðinn rode first. He was on his eight legged horse Sleipnir, the grey stallion that ran across earth and sea and sky and the deep places between. Sleipnir was the strangest horse anyone had ever imagined. He had eight legs because he had been born, in the old story, of Loki in the shape of a mare and a great stallion called Svaðilfari. He could run faster than any horse with four legs.
He could run across water as if water were grass. He could run up into the sky. He was the horse the all father rode when the all father needed to be everywhere at once.
Part 2764
Óðinn wore the helmet he had carried for ten thousand winters, the great helmet of grey iron with the two ravens stamped on the crown. He carried Gungnir, the spear that had been made by the dwarves and that had never missed its mark. He was dressed for war. His long grey beard, which had grown for ten thousand winters, was tucked into the collar of his cloak. His one eye, the one he had not given up at the well of Mímir, looked steadily out from under the helmet.
He was calm. He had been preparing for this for ten thousand winters. He knew, in the deepest sense, what was coming. He rode out to it anyway.
Part 2765
Þórr rode beside him. He was in the chariot pulled by Tanngrísnir and Tanngnjóstr, the two great goats whose names meant the gnasher and the toothgrinder. The chariot was a wagon of dark wood with the two great goats in the traces. Þórr could kill and eat the goats at any hall, and he could then bring them back to life with Mjǫllnir, by a careful waving of the hammer over the careful gathered bones. The goats were the cold north's way of telling its children that the god of the thunder always had something to eat. Þórr wore the belt of strength, Megingjǫrð, which doubled his already great strength. He wore the iron gloves, Járngreipr, which let him grip the haft of Mjǫllnir.
And he carried Mjǫllnir, the hammer that had been forged in the deep mountains by the dwarves Brokkr and Sindri, the hammer we have told the story of in an earlier episode of The Sleeping Almanac.
Part 2766
Frey rode beside them. Frey, the lord of the sun and the rain and the fruitful summer, was on his great boar called Gullinbursti, the golden bristled one. Gullinbursti was a great creature with bristles of pure gold, which gave off a small light of their own, so that Frey on Gullinbursti could ride into the deepest darkest night and still see his way by the light of the boar he was riding. Frey was missing his sword. He had given it away in the wooing of the giantess Gerðr, the story Skírnismál tells.
He had given the sword that fights by itself to his servant Skírnir, and the sword had not, in any of the long thousand winters since, come back. And now, in the third year of the Fimbulvetr, on the long ride out to Vígríðr, Frey had no sword. He rode out anyway.
Part 2767
Týr rode beside them. Týr, who had lost his hand to the wolf in the binding, rode out one handed to the last battle. He carried a sword in the only hand he had. He was the calmest of all the gods on the long ride out. He had already done, a thousand winters earlier, the thing the situation had asked of him.
He had put his hand into the mouth of the wolf when no other god would. He had paid the price. He was, in some quiet sense, already at peace with what was coming.
Part 2768
Heimdallr rode beside them. He had the great horn at his belt now, lowered after the long sounding. He carried his own sword, the one called Hǫfuð, the head. He was looking at the small dark figure of Loki at the helm of his ship far across the field, and he was very calm. Heimdallr and Loki had been waiting to meet each other for the whole of the ten thousand winters.
They had been, in some traditions, brothers. They had been, in some traditions, enemies for a thousand winters. They were going, today, to settle it.
Part 2769
The einherjar came up behind the gods, eight hundred doors of Valhalla open, eight hundred warriors per door, the long ranks of the slain rolling out across the long open field of Vígríðr. The Valkyries rode at the head of them, the long haired women of the cold north, the choosers of the slain, the ones who had been bringing the dead to Valhalla for ten thousand winters. The Valkyries were now riding the slain out to their final battle. They rode great pale horses. The long pale braids fell down their armoured shoulders.
The careful spears were lowered. They had been training the dead for ten thousand winters. They were now leading them out.
Part 2770
The army of the giants came up from the east with Hrym at the prow of Naglfar. The host of Hel came up from the north, off Loki's ship, the long ranks of the dead walking in slow formation across the long open field. Surtr, the giant of fire from the deep south, the lord of Muspell, the one who had been waiting in the south with his sword of fire for ten thousand winters, came up from the south. Surtr was a giant of pure flame, his body a long shape of burning, his sword a long line of fire so hot the cold air of the Fimbulvetr around him hissed and steamed and pulled back. The wolf came up from the east beside the giants.
The serpent crawled up from the deep sea beside the wolf. Loki, with the clever face he had always had, stood at the head of the army of Hel.
Part 2771
The Vǫluspá says, with the same dry brevity it uses for the most important hinges, that the two armies met on the field of Vígríðr.
Part 2772
And the gods did what they had been preparing to do for ten thousand winters.
Part 2773
Chapter Eight. Óðinn and the Wolf.
Part 2774
The Vǫluspá says, with the brevity it uses for the worst things, that Óðinn went to meet the wolf.
Part 2775
Óðinn, on his grey eight legged stallion Sleipnir, the spear Gungnir lowered, the helmet on his head, rode out to meet the wolf alone. The wolf had grown so large in its thousand winters in the chain that its open mouth, when it opened, reached from the floor of the world to the roof of the world. The wolf was the size of mountains. Its two great eyes were the size of the great cold lakes of the deep north country. When it breathed in, it pulled the cold air of the cold north toward it from a hundred leagues away.
Part 2776
Óðinn rode at the wolf anyway.
Part 2777
This was the moment the whole of the old north had been waiting for. Óðinn, the all father, the king of the gods, the long watcher, the wisdom seeker, the one who had sacrificed his eye at the well of Mímir and his life on the tree of Yggdrasill, the one who had spent ten thousand winters preparing for this exact wolf, lowered his spear and rode at the wolf.
Part 2778
Sleipnir's eight hooves on the cold ground of Vígríðr, the pace of a horse going into a charge. The pull on the reins. The lowering of the long shaft of Gungnir to the level. The steady look from the one eye under the grey iron helmet. The wolf, in the same suspended moment, lifting its great head and seeing the small grey figure on the small grey horse coming at it across the long open field.
The wolf opening, very slowly, the great mouth.
Part 2779
And the wolf swallowed Óðinn.
Part 2780
The Vǫluspá says it, with the same dry brevity. The wolf swallowed Óðinn. The all father went into the great mouth of the great wolf, and the wolf closed its mouth, and Óðinn was gone.
Part 2781
We have to sit on what this means.
Part 2782
The old north did not soften what the seeress was saying. The all father did not defeat the wolf. The all father did not drive his spear into the wolf's throat and bring the wolf down. The all father, the king of all the gods, the one who had been preparing for ten thousand winters, was eaten. The wolf, who had been waiting for the same ten thousand winters, won.
Part 2783
This was, in the deepest sense, the lesson of the whole poem. The gods were not immortal. The gods could die. The gods were going to die. The seeress was telling the whole cold north that the gods knew this, and prepared for it, and rode out to it anyway.
The gods did not refuse the battle because the battle was lost. They rode out into the lost battle because the lost battle was the battle that had been given to them.
Part 2784
And the wolf, the Vǫluspá says, was killed in turn.
Part 2785
The wolf was killed by Víðarr, the silent son of Óðinn. Víðarr was the god of the small dark wood, a quiet steady young man who did not say much. He was, in Snorri's reckoning, the second strongest of all the gods after Þórr. He had been waiting, in his small dark wood, for the same ten thousand winters that everyone else had been waiting. He had not, in any of those winters, said much about it.
He had not complained. He had been quietly preparing.
Part 2786
In the moment the wolf swallowed his father, Víðarr walked up to the wolf.
Part 2787
He was wearing a single great shoe. The shoe was a famous shoe in the old north. It had been made, Snorri tells us, out of every scrap of leather that every cobbler in every country had ever cut off the heel and the toe of every shoe they had ever made and thrown away. Every careless cobbler who had ever, in any of ten thousand winters, thrown a scrap of leather into the corner of a workshop, had been making, without knowing it, the great shoe of Víðarr. Every grandmother who had told her grandchildren to save their scraps of leather had been preparing the shoe.
Part 2788
This was the second small everyday warning in the poem. The first had been the cutting of the nails of the dead, the small act of carelessness that built the long dark ship. The second was the saving of the scraps of leather, the small act of carefulness that built the great shoe. Both of them were small everyday acts. Both of them, over ten thousand winters, had been building two great long things, a ship for the enemies and a shoe for the avenger.
Part 2789
Víðarr put the great shoe into the wolf's lower jaw. He braced his foot. He took the wolf's upper jaw in his hands. And he, with the steady strength he had always had, tore the wolf's mouth open from top to bottom and killed the wolf.
Part 2790
The wolf, which had just swallowed the all father, lifting its great head in the moment after. The steady figure of Víðarr walking up to the wolf the way Víðarr always walked. Víðarr saying nothing. Víðarr putting the great shoe in. Víðarr taking the great upper jaw.
Víðarr pulling, with the steady strength of a being who had been waiting ten thousand winters for this moment. The great jaw giving way. The wolf dying.
Part 2791
The wolf died. The wolf had won. The wolf had eaten Óðinn. And then, the moment after, the wolf was gone.
Part 2792
This was the quiet justice of the old north. The wolf got what it had been waiting for. And then the wolf was killed in turn. And the long careful chain of cause and effect rolled forward.
Part 2793
Chapter Nine. Þórr and the Serpent.
Part 2794
The Vǫluspá says that, at the same moment Óðinn was meeting the wolf, Þórr was meeting the serpent.
Part 2795
The two great single combats of the last battle happened at the same time. On one side of the field of Vígríðr, the all father was riding at the great wolf. On the other side, the great red bearded god of the thunder, the strongest of all the gods, the keeper of Mjǫllnir, was meeting the great serpent who had been waiting for him since the day Hymir cut the line.
Part 2796
Þórr was ready.
Part 2797
He had been ready for ten thousand winters. He had thought about the serpent more often than any other god in any of the worlds had thought about anything. He had wanted, with the clean wanting Þórr always had, to finish what had been started in the boat with Hymir. He had wanted the serpent for a thousand winters. In the long evenings in his hall at Bilskírnir, when he sat at the long table with Sif and the servants, his mind drifted back to the moment in the boat.
The line going down. The pull. The careful eyes of the serpent looking up at him through the dark water. The line being cut. The serpent going back down.
And Þórr knew, in some deep way, that he would meet the serpent again.
Part 2798
Today, he was meeting it.
Part 2799
The two of them met on the field of Vígríðr.
Part 2800
The serpent came up across the field on its great length of dark scales, the poison breath rolling out in slow heavy waves around it. Þórr came at the serpent from the other side, in the chariot of the two goats, Mjǫllnir lifted. The poem does not tell us what they said to each other. They had said everything they needed to say in the boat with Hymir a thousand winters earlier.
Part 2801
Þórr standing in the chariot. Tanngrísnir and Tanngnjóstr pulling the chariot at a long careful pace toward the great long ridge of dark scales that was the serpent. Þórr's red beard standing out in the small cold wind of Vígríðr. The iron gloves Járngreipr on Þórr's hands. The belt Megingjǫrð doubling his already great strength. Mjǫllnir lifted, the great forge marked head of the hammer dark against the cold sky.
Part 2802
The serpent's great head, in the same suspended moment, lifting on the long dark neck. The serpent's small careful eyes finding Þórr. The recognition between the two of them, the recognition of two beings who had at last met again after a thousand winters.
Part 2803
Þórr struck the serpent with Mjǫllnir.
Part 2804
The Vǫluspá says it, with the same dry brevity. Þórr struck the serpent. The hammer came down. The great forge marked head of the dwarves' hammer, the hammer the old north remembered as the one that always returned to the hand that threw it, the hammer that had been forged in the deep mountains by Brokkr and Sindri, came down on the head of the great serpent. And the serpent, who had been growing in the deep sea for a thousand winters, who had wrapped its great length around the whole of the world, who had been breathing its poison breath across the cold north for the last long days of the Fimbulvetr, died.
Part 2805
The great long dark length of the serpent, which had been the slow long boundary of the world itself, going still. The great scales going darker. The careful light of the day, what light there was, in the long dark of the Fimbulvetr with the sun and moon already swallowed, catching, perhaps, on the great forge marked head of Mjǫllnir as Þórr lifted it back. The careful satisfaction of a long thing at last done.
Part 2806
But Þórr did not walk away.
Part 2807
The serpent's death breath, in the moment of its dying, rolled out one last time. The serpent breathed the great poison breath one last time, into Þórr's face, into Þórr's mouth, into Þórr's lungs. And Þórr, who had killed the serpent, who had finished the work he had been waiting to finish for a thousand winters, took the serpent's last poison breath into his own body.
Part 2808
Þórr took nine steps back from the dead serpent. The old north remembered the exact number. Nine steps. The number was the number of completion, the number of cycles, the number that came back to every careful story.
Part 2809
The first step. Þórr backing away from the great length of the dead serpent, Mjǫllnir still in his hand. The second step. The third step. The fourth step, Þórr feeling, perhaps, the cold of the poison beginning to work in his chest. The fifth step.
The sixth step, the iron gloved hand still holding Mjǫllnir but a little lower than it had been at the fifth step. The seventh step. The eighth step, Þórr's face going pale in the slow way a face goes pale. The ninth step.
Part 2810
And then Þórr, who had killed the serpent, who had finished his work, fell down dead from the poison.
Part 2811
This was the deep lesson again. Þórr killed the thing he had been waiting to kill. And the thing he killed killed him in turn. The cycle came back. The serpent and the thunder went down together.
Part 2812
The Vǫluspá says, with the same dry brevity, that other gods died on the field of Vígríðr at the same time.
Part 2813
Frey met Surtr, the giant of fire. Frey, who had given away his sword in the wooing of Gerðr, fought Surtr with whatever he had, with his fists, perhaps, or with an antler from his great boar Gullinbursti, or with nothing more than the clean light of a god who had loved a giantess once and had not regretted it. The poem does not tell us what the fight looked like. It says only that Frey met Surtr, and that Frey died. Surtr lived on, for one more thing he had to do.
Part 2814
Týr met Garmr, the great hound at the gates of Hel. Týr, the one handed god, fought Garmr with the only hand he had. The Vǫluspá says, with the same brevity, that they killed each other. The one handed god and the great hound, both of them creatures of the broken hand and the bitten hand, both of them with a careful old history of biting and being bitten. They killed each other.
The ledger between them closed.
Part 2815
Heimdallr met Loki.
Part 2816
This was the meeting everyone had been waiting for. Heimdallr, the watcher of the rainbow bridge, the white god, the foreseeing one. Loki, the clever god, the trickster, the one who had been bound for the death of Baldr. The two of them had been, in some traditions, brothers. The two of them had been, in some traditions, enemies for a thousand winters.
The two of them had been opposites, the watcher and the breaker, the careful one and the careless one, the one who kept the rainbow bridge and the one who set the bridge on fire.
Part 2817
They met on the field of Vígríðr. The Vǫluspá says, with the same dry brevity, that they killed each other.
Part 2818
By now, everything was going down.
Part 2819
Chapter Ten. The World Burns and Drowns.
Part 2820
The Vǫluspá says, in some of its most famous stanzas, that after the gods had killed and been killed, the world itself ended.
Part 2821
Surtr, the giant of fire from the deep south, was still alive. Surtr had killed Frey. Surtr had one more thing to do. Surtr lifted his great sword of fire, the sword that had been burning since the days when the world was first made, and Surtr brought the sword down across the whole of the cold north country.
Part 2822
The Vǫluspá says, in one of its most famous lines, that fire flickered up against the sky.
Part 2823
The cold north began to burn. The trees that the serpent's poison had not killed caught fire from Surtr's sword. The grass that had survived the Fimbulvetr caught fire. The halls of the long winter steadings caught fire. The wooden bridges over the cold rivers caught fire.
The walls of Asgard, which the old story said had been built by a giant who lost a bet, caught fire. The roof of Valhalla caught fire. The roots of Yggdrasill, the great ash tree that held the worlds together, began to catch fire.
Part 2824
The great ash of Yggdrasill, which had stood since the days the world was made, which had held the nine worlds on its branches, began to burn from the roots. The roots, which went down into the well of Urðr and into the deep cold spring of Hvergelmir and into the deep dark place where the serpent Níðhǫggr lay coiled, began to catch fire. The fire climbed slowly up the great trunk. The fire reached the lower branches, where the four stags ate the leaves. The four stags ran, in four directions, out of the great tree.
The fire reached the top branches, where the eagle nested. The eagle took off with a great beat of its great wings, and flew out into the burning sky.
Part 2825
The Vǫluspá says, with the same dry brevity, that the fire reached the heavens.
Part 2826
The whole of the cold north sky glowed orange and red and the colour of old bronze. The smoke rose so high that the stars were lost. The sun was already gone, swallowed by the wolf Sköll in the first sign of the Fimbulvetr. The moon was already gone, swallowed by the wolf Hati. And now the small fires of the cold north hearths, which had been the last warm lights in the long dark of the Fimbulvetr, were lost too in the great fire of Surtr.
The great fire of the burning world. The great long flame that had been waiting in the deep south, in the cold country of the fire giant, for ten thousand winters. The great fire that was now eating the whole of the cold north at the end.
Part 2827
And then, the Vǫluspá says, the earth sank into the sea.
Part 2828
The poem does not tell us exactly how. It says only that the great fire and the great death of the gods had broken the careful balance of the long axis of the worlds, and the earth, which had been held up between the deep below and the high above by the ash of Yggdrasill, no longer had anything to hold it up. The earth slid into the cold sea. The mountains went down first. The long fjords filled in and were lost.
The long forests went under. The great halls of the gods, which had already been burning, went under burning. The whole of the cold north country went down into the cold sea, and the cold sea closed over it.
Part 2829
The great walls of Asgard, already on fire, beginning to lean. The great roof of Valhalla, which had been the roof under which the einherjar had feasted for ten thousand winters, beginning to slip. The great bridge Bifrǫst, the rainbow bridge that Heimdallr had watched for ten thousand winters, breaking, the colours of the rainbow scattering, the bridge falling into the cold sea. The whole long careful architecture of the nine worlds, which had stood since the world was made, going down into the cold dark.
Part 2830
The Vǫluspá says, in one of its most famous stanzas, that the stars went out.
Part 2831
The stars had been the fixed lights in the cold sky. They had been there since the days when the world was first made. They had watched every old north winter from the same long calm careful distance. And now, in the third year of the Fimbulvetr, after the gods had died and the earth had drowned, the stars, one by one, went out.
Part 2832
The seeress's stanza was one of the most beautiful in the whole poem. She said it simply. The stars went out of the heavens. The light that had been there for ten thousand winters was, one by one, the seeress said, not there.
Part 2833
The Vǫluspá says, with the same dry brevity that has been carrying us through the whole prophecy, that the world was dark.
Part 2834
There was a long quiet moment. The long calm of a world that has died. The cold sea was still. The sky was empty. The stars were gone.
The sun was gone. The moon was gone. The gods were gone. The wolf was dead. The serpent was dead.
The fire of Surtr had at last burned itself out. There was nothing left.
Part 2835
The cold sea moved very slowly. The deep dark was complete. There was no wind, because there was no shore for any wind to come from. There was no sound, because there was no being to make any sound, and no other being to hear any sound that was made. There was, in the deepest sense, nothing.
Part 2836
And then, the Vǫluspá says, in the stanzas that turn the whole poem, something began to come back.
Part 2837
Chapter Eleven. The Green Earth.
Part 2838
The Vǫluspá says, with a stanza the old north loved as much as any other stanza in any other poem, that the green earth came up out of the sea.
Part 2839
The seeress, who has been telling the whole prophecy in her dry careful brevity, lets the line breathe a little here. She has been waiting for this stanza for the whole of the rest of the poem. She lets the words come out slowly. The earth, the seeress says, rises up out of the sea, a second time, green.
Part 2840
The poem does not tell us how. The seeress says only that the earth came back. The seeress says only that, after the long dark moment when there had been nothing, the earth rose, and the earth was green.
Part 2841
The sea slowly grew quiet. The dark slowly thinned. A small light came back into the eastern sky. Not the sun, for the sun had been swallowed by the wolf, but the daughter of the sun, whom Vafþrúðnismál tells us the sun had borne before the wolf came. The daughter of the sun rose, slowly, into the cleared eastern sky.
And the light that the daughter of the sun gave was the same warm calm light her mother had given.
Part 2842
The sky, which had been the long quiet dark for what could not be measured, lightening, very slowly, in the east. The first hint of grey. The first hint of pale. The first thin line of gold. The daughter of the sun coming up, slowly, with the same steadiness her mother had had.
The first light falling on the long quiet sea.
Part 2843
And under the new light, the earth rose.
Part 2844
The earth rose slowly out of the cold sea. The water rolled off the slopes. The grass, which had not been there before, the grass which had no business being there, was there. The grass was green. The grass was deep and soft and the colour of the deepest summer that had ever come to the cold north.
The trees, which had also no business being there, were there, and they were green, and they were the deep green of summer.
Part 2845
The grass was the kind of grass that had not been seen in the cold north for three years of the Fimbulvetr. The grass was thick. The grass was soft. The grass came up to the knees in places. The grass was full of small flowers, the small white star flowers of the cold north spring, the yellow flowers the old north had loved, the purple flowers that came up in the meadows after the long snow.
The earth's quiet way of saying that the earth was, in the deepest sense, back.
Part 2846
The Vǫluspá says, with care, that the new earth was without sowing.
Part 2847
The new earth had not been sown. No farmer had ploughed it. No seed had been put into it. The grain that grew on it grew because the grain wanted to grow there. The trees that stood on it stood because the trees wanted to be there.
The deep summer that lay on it lay there because the deep summer wanted to lie there. The old north would have called this, in their language, the gift.
Part 2848
And, the Vǫluspá says, there were beings on the new earth.
Part 2849
The poem says that two human beings had survived the burning and the drowning. They had hidden, in the wood of Yggdrasill itself, Vafþrúðnismál calls it Hoddmímis holt, the wood of Hoddmímir, which Snorri identifies with Yggdrasill. They had found a hollow in the great old trunk, no bigger than two beings could fit into, the grain of the great old wood around them, the dark, the quiet. They had not, the poem implies, said much. They had only waited.
Part 2850
Their names were Líf and Lífþrasir. Life and the one who longs for life.
Part 2851
They came out when the earth was green again. They walked out onto the grass. They ate the morning dew. And from them, the new humanity came. Every grandchild of every grandparent in every long line of every country that came after was descended, the old north said, from Líf and Lífþrasir.
Every baby in every cradle had, in the deep careful sense, two old grandparents who had walked out of the great trunk of Yggdrasill and eaten the morning dew.
Part 2852
And there were gods on the new earth too.
Part 2853
The Vǫluspá says that some of the gods came back. Víðarr was there, the silent son of Óðinn, who had killed the wolf. Váli was there, the avenger of Baldr, who had been born for the purpose of killing Hǫðr and had done so. Móði and Magni, the sons of Þórr, were there, and they had inherited Mjǫllnir, their father's hammer. The two sons of the thunder had been small enough not to ride out to the field of Vígríðr, and so had survived.
The hammer had come to them.
Part 2854
And, the Vǫluspá says in the stanza the old north loved most of all the stanzas in the poem, Baldr came back.
Part 2855
Baldr, the beautiful god, the one we have told the story of in an earlier episode of The Sleeping Almanac, the one who had been killed by his blind brother Hǫðr with a sprig of mistletoe, the one who had been in Hel for the whole of the long quiet thousand winters before Ragnarǫk, came back. Hǫðr came back too. The two brothers walked out onto the green grass together. The killing was finished. The long grief Frigg had carried for a thousand winters had, in the deepest sense, ended.
Part 2856
The gods, the Vǫluspá says, sat down together on the new earth, in a place called Iðavǫllr, which had been a meadow in old Asgard, and they found in the grass, the seeress lets this image breathe too, the golden chess pieces that the old gods had been playing with in the days before the world began.
Part 2857
The old gods had been playing chess. The pieces had been lost in the long burning. And in the new green grass, the new gods, the survivors, found the pieces, and they would now, the seeress implies, play the same game on the new earth.
Part 2858
The new green grass, deep and soft, full of small flowers. Víðarr and Váli and Móði and Magni and Baldr and Hǫðr sitting in the grass in a careful circle. The small golden chess pieces of the old gods scattered in the grass between them. One piece, perhaps a king, perhaps a queen, picked up by Baldr in his careful hand, turned over, looked at, set back in its place. The game beginning again.
Part 2859
The Hávamál line we anchored at the start of this episode comes back here.
Part 2860
Cattle die, kinsmen die, you yourself shall die. But one thing I know that never dies. What never dies is the judgement of a dead man's life. What never dies is the long careful weight of how a being lived. The gods died.
The wolf died. The serpent died. The earth burned and drowned. And what came back was a green earth where the careful work of the dead gods still mattered. Where the gold pieces of the old game were still in the grass.
Part 2861
The dead gods are remembered. The judgement of their lives, in the old language, never died.
Part 2862
Chapter Twelve. Goodnight. And the Wolf at the Edge of Time.
Part 2863
We are at the end of the story, and the end of the season.
Part 2864
We have spent eleven episodes of The Sleeping Almanac in the old north together. We have spent them in the hall of Yggdrasill, in the search of Óðinn for wisdom, in the forging of Mjǫllnir in the deep mountains, in the binding of Fenrir with the soft ribbon called Gleipnir, in the long quiet hall of Ægir where the gods drank with the sea king, in the death of Baldr by the mistletoe, in the long binding of Loki in the cave under the stone, in the open sea where Thor went fishing for the serpent, in the cold hall of Þrymr where the bride who was Thor sat with eyes burning at the bottom of the veil, in the deep mountain where Bǫlverkr drank the three vessels of the mead of poetry, and in the cold mountain country where Skaði learned what kind of home she actually wanted.
Part 2865
And tonight, we have spent the last episode at Ragnarǫk.
Part 2866
The story we have told tonight is, in the old north's deepest careful way, the story that all the other stories were always pointing toward. Every chapter of every earlier episode of The Sleeping Almanac has ended in this same Chapter Twelve. Goodnight. And the Wolf at the Edge of Time. Every closing has folded the small individual story back into the great long story that ends here.
The wolf at the edge of time was, in every earlier episode, the wolf we told the long full story of tonight.
Part 2867
And the wolf came. The wolf was Fenrir, slipping the chain in the third year of the Fimbulvetr. The wolf came onto the field of Vígríðr. The wolf swallowed Óðinn. The wolf was killed by Víðarr.
The wolf is done.
Part 2868
And so are the gods.
Part 2869
The old north did not regret the death of the gods. The old north loved the gods. The old north sang about the gods for a thousand winters. The old north put the gods at the centre of every long winter hall and every cold mountain story and every quiet evening by every small fire. And the old north also knew, from the very beginning, that the gods were going to die.
Part 2870
The old north knew this and did not flinch. The old north knew this and made the stories anyway. The old north put the wolf at the edge of every time and let the gods come into the long warm halls and tell the long stories anyway, knowing that the wolf was coming, knowing that the long stories were going to end, knowing that the cold winter was going to come and the green grass was going to grow over the long winter and the cycle was going to come around again.
Part 2871
The Hávamál, in the same deep way, gave us the line for this. Cattle die, kinsmen die, you yourself shall die. But one thing I know that never dies. The judgement of a dead man's life. The careful weight of a being's small choices.
The long quiet remembering that the old north did, around the long winter fires, of the gods who had once lived and who had once made these careful choices.
Part 2872
You, lying in your bed in the warm dark of your own evening, are part of that long quiet remembering.
Part 2873
You are the small continuation of what the old north imagined. The grass that came back after the long drowning is the grass that grew, eventually, into the place where you are lying. The two human beings who walked out of the wood of Yggdrasill are the long careful ancestors that made the line that led to your own quiet night. The careful old gods who sat on the new earth and found the golden chess pieces in the grass are the careful old gods who sit, in your own long quiet evening, in the small careful old stories you have just heard.
Part 2874
The wolf at the edge of time is also at the edge of your time. The long dark of the Fimbulvetr is also at the edge of your night. The cold winter that does not end is, in the deepest sense, the same cold winter that is somewhere always at the edge of every long quiet evening. The gods were not immortal. The gods knew this.
The gods rode out anyway.
Part 2875
This was the deep careful old lesson. Ride out anyway.
Part 2876
Go to sleep tonight knowing that the wolf is there, somewhere at the edge of your time. Go to sleep knowing that the long careful old gods rode out at it anyway. Go to sleep knowing that, after the long burning and the long drowning, the green earth came up out of the sea a second time. Go to sleep knowing that Líf and Lífþrasir walked out of the wood of Yggdrasill onto the new green grass. Go to sleep knowing that the chess pieces are still, in the deep careful way, lying in the new grass.
Part 2877
Go to sleep knowing that Baldr came back.
Part 2878
The Hávamál's line will hold. Cattle die, kinsmen die, you yourself shall die. But one thing I know that never dies. The judgement of a dead man's life.
Part 2879
Sleep well.
Part 2880
Goodnight. And the wolf at the edge of time.
